search icon

Fayetteville City Zoning Code

ARTICLE 30

5: Development Standards

30-5.L. Signage*

*Editor’s note—Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, adopted June 23, 2025, repealed Section L, in its entirety, which pertained to Signage. See also the Code Comparative Table.

30-5.P. Multi-Unit Single-Family Design Standards

 

  1. Zoning Districts - Permitted in the following districts:
    1. MR-5 - Mixed Residential 5
    2. OI - Office & Institutional
    3. NC - Neighborhood Commercial
  2. Dimensional Standards
    1. Total Acreage. Minimum total development size shall be no less than 10 acres.
    2. Density.
      1. Must meet that of the underlying Zoning District.
  3. Building Orientation
    1. Separation. All buildings/units within a Multi-Unit Single-Family Detached Dwelling development must meet the following building location standards.
      1. Each building/unit front shall be located at least 55 feet from the centerline of the street fronting the dwelling or 25 feet from edge of pavement.
      2. Each building/unit shall have a distance separation of 10 feet between each structure.
    2. To Streets. All dwellings shall be oriented so that the primary entrance faces the private street or drive serving the community. In the case of corner lots, the primary entrance shall face the street from which the dwelling derives its street address.
      1. All dwelling units shall be accessed by a series of internal private drives.
    3. Fronting Open Space.
      1. At least 10 percent of all dwellings shall front upon or abut an open space dedicated area.
      2. As an alternative to subsection (a) above, a developer may propose access to open space facilities within or adjacent to a development via a right-of-way 20 feet wide that is reasonably accessible to all residents in a development.
  4. Garage Standards
    1. Applicability. The standards in this section shall apply to new attached and detached street-facing and side-loaded garages and carports located within 50 feet of the street fronting a dwelling.
    2. Maximum Size.
      1. Detached garages and carports shall not exceed 30 percent of the dwelling's total floor area.
      2. A street-facing garage door(s) or carport opening shall not exceed 40 percent of the total front facade area of the dwelling.
  5. Roof Projections. All roof vents, antennas, satellite dishes, and other roof penetrations and equipment (except chimneys) shall be located on the rear elevations to the maximum extent practicable, or be otherwise configured to have a minimal visual impact as seen from the street.
  6. Accessory Structures. Accessory structures such as clubhouse, pools, mail kiosks, etc., are allowed as part of the overall development.
  7. Internal streets. All streets internal to the development must meet the City's public or private street standards.

(Ord. No. S2022-004, § 1, 03/28/2022

Effective on: 1/1/1901

30-5.A.1. Purpose and Intent

The purpose of this section is to ensure that development provides the off-street parking, loading, and circulation facilities needed to meet demands created by occupants, employees, visitors, customers, and patrons—and that these demands are met without adversely affecting local traffic patterns or adjacent land uses and neighborhoods. The standards in this section are intended to allow the flexibility needed to accommodate alternative solutions and achieve City policies of supporting the development and revitalization of a mixed-use downtown area, accommodating appropriate development, encouraging pedestrian-oriented development, avoiding excessive paved surface areas, promoting low impact development, and safeguarding natural and historic resources.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.2. Applicability

  1. a.
    General
    The off-street parking, loading, and circulation standards of this section shall apply to all development in the City.
  2. b.
    Existing Development
    1. 1.
      Change in Use
      Any change in use within an existing development shall provide any additional loading and circulation facilities required to comply with the minimum loading and circulation standards applicable to the new use.
    2. 2.
      Expansion
      Any expansion or enlargement of an existing structure that will increase the number of units upon which the applicable parking standard is based (e.g., square feet, employees, dwelling units, seats) shall not be required to provide additional off-street parking. However, additional loading and circulation facilities shall still be provided as required, unless exempted. Any additional parking provided in the absence of any requirement must conform to all related parking standards of this ordinance.
    3. 3.
      Nonconforming Parking or Loading Facilities
      Any remodeling, expansion, or enlargement of an existing use or structure on a nonconforming site shall comply with the requirements of Section 30-7.F, Nonconforming Sites.
  3. c.
    Parking and Loading in the DT-1 and DT-2 Districts
    1. 1.
      Exemption from Minimum Parking Requirements
      Development within the DT-1 and DT-2 districts is exempted from the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required in Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards.
    2. 2.
      Maximum Off-Street Parking Requirements
      Development within the DT-1 and DT-2 districts is exempted from the maximum number of off-street parking spaces in Section 30-5.A.4.f, Maximum Number of Spaces Permitted provided that any spaces in excess of the maximum area are located within parking structures.
    3. 3.
      Exemption from Off-Street Loading Requirements
      Development within the DT-1 district is exempted from the minimum number of off-street loading spaces required in Table 30-5.A.10, Required Off-Street Loading Spaces.

(Ord. No. S2012-007, § 2, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2013-002, § 11, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2022-009, § 1, 05/23/2022; Ord. No. S2024-006, § 1, 05/28/2024)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.3. General Standards for Off-Street Parking, Stacking, and Loading Areas

  1. a.
    Use of Parking Area, Stacking Area, or Loading Space
    All vehicular parking areas, stacking areas, methods of vehicular ingress and egress, internal aisles, and loading spaces required by this section may be referred to as "vehicular use area" and shall be used only for their intended purposes. Any other use, including, but not limited to, vehicular storage, vehicle sales, vehicular repair work, vehicle service, or display of any kind, shall constitute a separate business use of the space.
  2. b.
    Identified as to Purpose and Location
    Off-street parking areas of three or more spaces and off-street loading spaces shall include painted lines, wheel stops, or other methods of identifying individual parking and loading spaces and loading areas and distinguishing such spaces from aisles or other vehicular use areas.
  3. c.
    Surfacing
    Except as provided for in Section 30-5.A.5, Parking Standards for Residential Development, and Section 30-5.A.8.i, Alternative Materials, all off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be surfaced with asphalt, concrete, brick, stone, pavers, aligned concrete strips, or an equivalent material. These materials shall be maintained in a smooth, well-graded condition.
  4. d.
    Arrangement
    1. 1.
      Convenient Access
      1. a.
        All off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be arranged for the access and safety of pedestrians and vehicles.
      2. b.
        Off-street parking areas with three or more spaces shall be arranged so that no parking or maneuvering incidental to parking shall occur on a public street or sidewalk, and so that an automobile may be parked and un-parked without moving another automobile (except as provided in Section 30-5.A.8.g, Valet and Tandem Parking).
      3. c.
        Large developments providing over 200 spaces are subject to one or both off-street circulation standards found in Section 30-5.A.11.e, Primary Drive Aisles and 30-5.A.11.f, Pedestrian Pathways.
      4. d.
        Large non-residential development with a single ground plate area of over 75,000 gross square feet for one tenant or 150,000 gross square feet for multiple tenants must meet the parking and circulation standards in Section 30-5.J.8, Parking and Circulation, associated with "large retail" development.
    2. 2.
      Backing onto Streets Prohibited
      Except for parking areas serving single-family detached dwellings, townhomes, and two- to four-family dwellings, all off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be arranged so that no vehicle is required to back from such areas directly onto a public street. Vehicular access ways and vehicular use areas on private lands are not considered public streets.
    3. 3.
      Easements
      No off-street parking, loading, or circulation area shall be located within an easement without the written consent of the person or agency that holds the easement, unless already provided for by an existing easement agreement.
  5. e.
    Access and Curb Cuts
    Any construction of or modification to an access drive or curb cut shall require prior approval of the City Manager. This provision shall not apply to private drives that are consistent with 30-5.F.4.a.7, which requires that private streets be built to the same standard as public streets.
  6. f.
    Parking Lot Cross-Access
    1. 1.
      General
      All development except single-family attached or detached dwellings and two- to four-family dwellings shall be designed to allow for cross-access to adjacent compatible development in accordance with the following standards:
      1. a.
        Limited to Two Parcels
        Cross-access ways shall be designed and located based on the standards of this section, but in no case shall a development be required to provide cross-access to more than two adjacent parcels.
      2. b.
        Future Stubs Required
        A connection for future parking lot cross-access shall be provided to all adjacent vacant land zoned MR-5 or within a Business or Planned Development zoning district. Development subject to these standards shall be designed to provide future cross-access in at least one location while remaining in compliance with all landscaping and stormwater standards.
      3. c.
        Minimum Width
        Cross-access ways shall allow for two-way traffic between parcels through the use of a single drive aisle with a minimum width of 20 feet, or through two one-way aisles, each with a minimum width of ten feet.
Figure 30-5.A.3.f: Parking Lot Cross Access
Diagram illustrating parking lot cross access
Parking lot cross access allows vehicles to move from one development to another without use of a street
  1.   
    1. 2.
      Waiver
      1. a.
        The cross-access standard may be waived by the City Manager if the TRC recommends such waiver based on consideration of topography or natural features, vehicular safety factors, adequate access from comparable side streets, or similar factors.
      2. b.
        When cross-access is waived in accordance with this section, bicycle and pedestrian connections shall be provided between adjacent developments or uses, unless the provision is deemed unreasonable or impracticable.
    2. 3.
      Recording Required
      Where provided, a cross-access easement shall be recorded by the owner/developer prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy (see Section 30-2.C.13).
  1. g.
    Drainage
    All off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be properly drained in accordance with the stormwater management standards in Chapter 23 of the Code of Ordinances, so as not to cause any nuisance on adjacent land.
  2. h.
    Exterior Lighting
    When lighted, off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be lighted so as to prevent glare or illumination exceeding maximum allowable levels on adjacent land (see Table 30-5.E.5, Maximum Illumination Levels), and unless exempted, shall comply with the standards of Section 30-5.E, Exterior Lighting.
  3. i.
    Landscaping
    All off-street parking lots, stacking lanes, loading, and other circulation areas shall be landscaped to soften their visual impact on adjacent areas, and unless exempted, shall comply with the standards of Section 30-5.B.4.c, Vehicular Use Area Landscaping.
  4. j.
    Curbs and Motor Vehicle Stops
    All off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be designed to prevent vehicles from overhanging a right-of-way, sidewalk, walkway, or adjacent property.
  5. k.
    Maintained in Good Repair
    1. 1.
      Maintained at All Times
      All off-street parking, loading, motor vehicle stops, and circulation areas shall be maintained in good repair and in safe condition at all times so as not to constitute a hazard to public safety or a visual or aesthetic nuisance to surrounding land.
    2. 2.
      Periodically Restored
      All off-street parking, loading, motor vehicle stops, and circulation areas shall be periodically painted or otherwise restored to maintain a clear identification of separate parking stalls or loading spaces.
  6. l.
    Responsibility for Provision
    The responsibility for providing the off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas required by this section shall be that of whoever develops the land requiring parking and loading areas. Review for compliance with the standards of this section shall occur during review of an application for a Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5), Building Permit (see Section [@@9372]), or Temporary Use Permit (see Section 30-2.C.10), as appropriate.
  7. m.
    Construction of Off-street Parking, Loading, and Circulation Areas
    All off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas shall be completed prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy (see Section 30-2.C.13) for the use or uses they serve. In the case of phased development, surface off-street parking, loading, and circulation areas should only be provided for the portions of the development for which a Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5) is approved.

(Ord. No. S2012-006, § 1, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-016, § 3.1, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-018, § 4.1,9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-002, § 11, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2019-020, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2024-013, § 1, 05/28/2024; )

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.4. Off-Street Parking Standards

  1. a.
    Parking Plan Required
    A Parking Plan shall be submitted with every application for a Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5), Building Permit (see Section 30-2.C.12), or Temporary Use Permit (see Section 30-2.C.10) for any development that is required to provide more than three off-street parking spaces. The plan shall accurately designate the required parking spaces, access aisles, and driveways, and the relation of the off-street parking facilities to the uses or structures such facilities are designed to serve. The plan shall also indicate the minimum number of required spaces, maximum number of allowed spaces (if applicable), and include an Alternative Parking Plan, if requested (see Section 30-5.A.8, Alternative Parking Plan). No Parking Plan is required for the development of single-family residential dwellings.
  2. b.
    Minimum Number of Spaces Required
    Unless otherwise expressly stated in this section, the minimum number of off-street parking spaces shall be provided in accordance with Table 30-5.A.4.B, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards:
Table 30-5.A.4.b: Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards
USE CATEGORYUSE TYPEMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1]
AGRICULTURAL USE CLASSIFICATION
AgriculturePlant nursery1 per every 300 sf + 1 per every 1,000 sf outdoor nursery lot
All other agricultureSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Agricultural Support and ServicesEquestrian facility1 space + 1 per stall
All other agricultural support and servicesSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
RESIDENTIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Household LivingDwelling/unit, live/workSee Section 30-5.A.4.e
Dwelling, multi-family1.8 per DU
Dwelling, single-family attached2 per DU
Dwelling, single-family detached
Dwelling, two- to four-family
Dwelling, upper story0.5 per DU
Manufactured home, ClassA[1]2 per DU
Manufactured home park(Class A or B homes)
Group LivingDormitory1 per every 2 resident beds
Fraternity or sorority house1 per every 2 resident beds
Group home, large1 per employee + 1 per every 5 children or 1 per every 3 adults
Group home, small2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
Rooming or boarding house1 + 1 per guest bedroom
Therapeutic home2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
PUBLIC AND INSTITUTIONAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Community ServicesCommunity center1 per every 300 sf
Cultural facility1 per every 300 sf
Library1 per every 300 sf
Museum1 per every 500 sf
Senior center1 per every 300 sf
Youth club facility
Day CareAdult day care center1 per every 5 persons up to 50, then 1 per every 10 persons
Child day care center4 + 1 per employee on the largest shift
Educational FacilitiesCollege or university7 per classroom plus 1 per 4 beds in main campus dormitories plus 1 per 300 square feet of office space plus 1 per 5 fixed seats in assembly halls and stadiums
School, elementary1 per employee + 5
School, middle1 per every 30 students + 1 per employee
School, high1 per every 300 sf
Vocational or trade school1 per every 300 sf
Government FacilitiesGovernment maintenance, storage, or distribution facility1 per every 600 sf
Government office1 per every 300 sf
Post office1 per every 300 sf
Health Care FacilitiesBlood/tissue collection facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Drug or alcohol treatment facility1 per every 300 sf
Hospital1 per 2 inpatient beds + 1 per employee
Medical or dental clinic1 per every 250 sf
Medical or dental lab
Medical treatment facility1 per 2 patient beds + 1 per employee
Outpatient facility1 per every 300 sf
InstitutionsAssisted living facility1 per every 3 patient beds
Auditorium1 per 4 seats
Club or lodge1 per 300 sf
Convention center1 per 300 sf
Community Reintegration Center1 per employee + 1 per every 4 persons
Nursing home1 per every 3 patient beds
Psychiatric treatment facility1 per every 3 beds
Religious institution1 per every 6 seats in worship area
Parks and Open AreasArboretum or botanical gardenSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Cemetery, columbaria, mausoleum1 per employee on largest shift
Community garden2 + 1 per every 0.5 acre
GreenwaySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Golf course, public4 per hole
Park, public or privateSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Public square or plaza
Public SafetyCorrectional facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Fire or EMS facility
Police substation
Police station
TransportationAirportSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Helicopter landing facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Passenger terminal, surface transportation1 per every 200 sf
UtilitiesTelecommunications antenna, collocation on existing towerNone
Telecommunications antenna, placement on existing building
Telecommunications tower, freestanding
Utility, major1 per employee on largest shift
Utility, minorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
COMMERCIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Adult EntertainmentAdult entertainment1 per every 3 persons of maximum fire rated capacity
Animal CareAnimal grooming1 per every 300 sf
Animal shelter1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, indoor1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, outdoor
Veterinary clinic1 per every 300 sf
Conference and Training CentersConference or training centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Eating EstablishmentsDinner theater1 per every 4 seats
Restaurant, with indoor or outdoor seatingLess than 100 seats: 1 per every 125 sf (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas). Maximum parking shall be 175% of the minimum.

100 or more seats: 1 per every 4 seats. Maximum parking shall be 1 space per every 2 seats (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas)
Restaurant, with drive-through service
Specialty eating establishment1 per every 200 sf
OfficesBusiness services1 per every 300 sf
Financial services
Professional services1 per every 300 sf
Radio and television broadcasting studio1 per every 500 sf
Sales (including real estate)1 per every 300 sf
Parking, CommercialParking lotNone
Parking structure
Parking tractor trailers
Recreation/Entertainment, IndoorCommercial recreation, indoor1 per every 300 sf
Theater1 per every 4 seats
Recreation/Entertainment, Outdoor [2]Arena, amphitheater, or stadium1 per every 4 seats
Golf course, private4 per hole
Athletic field and clubhouse1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Golf driving range1 per tee + 1 per every 15 sf of hitting area
Swimming pool, private1 per every 75 sf of water surface area
Swimming pool, nonprofit
Tennis court3 per court
Other commercial recreation, outdoor1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Retail Sales and ServicesBar, nightclub, or cocktail lounge1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Entertainment establishment1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Gasoline sales1 per employee
Crematory1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Financial institution, without drive-through service1 per every 300 sf
Financial institution, with drive-through service
Funeral home1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Laundromat1 per every 250 sf
Personal services establishment1 per every 300 sf
Tattoo parlor/body piercing establishment1 per every 300 sf
Repair establishment1 per every 300 sf
Convenience store, without gas sales1 per every 250 sf
Convenience store, with gas sales
Drug store or pharmacy, without drive-through service1 per every 250 sf
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service
Flea market1 per every 200 sf of building or use area
Grocery store1 per every 250 sf
Liquor Store1 per every 250 sf
Retail sales establishment, large1 per 350 sf
Electronic gaming operationThe greater of 1 per machine or one space per 150 gross square feet, + 1 per employee on largest shift.
Other retail sales establishments1 per every 300 sf
Self-Service StorageMini-warehouse (with external access)5 for the first 100 units plus 1 per each additional 100 units
 Mini-warehouse (internal access only)5 for the first 200 units plus 1 per each additional 200 units
Vehicle Sales and Services, HeavyAircraft parts, sales, and maintenance1 per every 300 sf
Automotive painting/body shop1 per every 300 sf
Automotive wrecker service1 per employee on largest shift
Transmission shop1 per every 300 sf
Boat and marine rental and sales1 per every 400 sf + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Truck stop1 per every 300 sf of retail + 1 per service bay + 0.5 per gasoline pump
Vehicle Sales and Services, LightAutomotive parts and installation1 per every 300 sf
Automobile repair and servicing (without painting/body-work)1 per every 300 sf
Automobile sales or rentals1 per every 300 sf of building area + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Car wash or auto detailing1 per employee on largest shift
Taxicab service1 per employee on largest shift
Tire/muffler sales and mounting1 per every 300 sf
Visitor AccommodationsBed and breakfast inn2 spaces + 1 per guest bedroom
Hotel or motelHotel or Motel: 1 per every guest room plus75% of spaces required for on-site accessory uses
Tourist Home2 spaces + 1 per guest room
INDUSTRIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Extractive IndustryAll uses1 per employee on largest shift
Industrial ServicesBuilding, heating, plumbing, or electrical contractor1 per every 1,000 sf
Electric motor repair1 per every 400 sf
Fuel oil/bottled gas distributor1 per employee on largest shift
General industrial service1 per 1,500 sf
Heavy equipment sales, rental, or storage1 per 400 sf + 1 per 5,000 sf outdoor display area
Heavy equipment servicing and repair1 per every 1,000 sf
Laundry, dry cleaning, and carpet cleaning plants1 per every 500 sf
Machine shop1 per every 400 sf
Repair of scientific or professional instruments
Research and development1 per every 800 sf
Tool repair1 per every 400 sf
Manufacturing and ProductionManufacturing, heavySee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Manufacturing, high impact/hazardous
Manufacturing, light
Research and Technology ProductionSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse and Freight MovementCold storage plantSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Outdoor storage (as a principal use)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Parcel services1 per employee on largest shift
Truck or freight terminal1 per employee on largest shift
Warehouse (distribution)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse (storage) 
Waste-Related ServicesEnergy recovery plantSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Hazardous waste collection sites1 per employee on largest shift
IncineratorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Land application of wastesNone
Landfill, land clearing and inert debris or construction debrisSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Landfill, sanitary
Recycling center1 per employee on largest shift + 3 spaces
Recycling drop-off centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Salvage and junkyard1 per every 10,000 sf of outdoor area + 1 per employee on largest shift
Tire disposal or recycling1 per employee on largest shift
Waste composting
Wholesale salesAll usesSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
NOTE:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet of gross floor area.
[2] Miniature golf/go-cart tracks shall provide 1 off-street parking space per every 300 sf of use area.
Table 30-5.A.4.b: Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards
USE CATEGORYUSE TYPEMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1]
AGRICULTURAL USE CLASSIFICATION
AgriculturePlant nursery1 per every 300 sf + 1 per every 1,000 sf outdoor nursery lot
All other agricultureSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Agricultural Support and ServicesEquestrian facility1 space + 1 per stall
All other agricultural support and servicesSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
RESIDENTIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Household LivingDwelling/unit, live/workSee Section 30-5.A.4.e
Dwelling, multi-family1.8 per DU
Dwelling, single-family attached2 per DU
Dwelling, single-family detached
Dwelling, two- to four-family
Dwelling, upper story0.5 per DU
Manufactured home, ClassA[1]2 per DU
Manufactured home park(Class A or B homes)
Group LivingDormitory1 per every 2 resident beds
Fraternity or sorority house1 per every 2 resident beds
Group home, large1 per employee + 1 per every 5 children or 1 per every 3 adults
Group home, small2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
Rooming or boarding house1 + 1 per guest bedroom
Therapeutic home2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
PUBLIC AND INSTITUTIONAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Community ServicesCommunity center1 per every 300 sf
Cultural facility1 per every 300 sf
Library1 per every 300 sf
Museum1 per every 500 sf
Senior center1 per every 300 sf
Youth club facility
Day CareAdult day care center1 per every 5 persons up to 50, then 1 per every 10 persons
Child day care center4 + 1 per employee on the largest shift
Educational FacilitiesCollege or university7 per classroom plus 1 per 4 beds in main campus dormitories plus 1 per 300 square feet of office space plus 1 per 5 fixed seats in assembly halls and stadiums
School, elementary1 per employee + 5
School, middle1 per every 30 students + 1 per employee
School, high1 per every 300 sf
Vocational or trade school1 per every 300 sf
Government FacilitiesGovernment maintenance, storage, or distribution facility1 per every 600 sf
Government office1 per every 300 sf
Post office1 per every 300 sf
Health Care FacilitiesBlood/tissue collection facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Drug or alcohol treatment facility1 per every 300 sf
Hospital1 per 2 inpatient beds + 1 per employee
Medical or dental clinic1 per every 250 sf
Medical or dental lab
Medical treatment facility1 per 2 patient beds + 1 per employee
Outpatient facility1 per every 300 sf
InstitutionsAssisted living facility1 per every 3 patient beds
Auditorium1 per 4 seats
Club or lodge1 per 300 sf
Convention center1 per 300 sf
Community Reintegration Center1 per employee + 1 per every 4 persons
Nursing home1 per every 3 patient beds
Psychiatric treatment facility1 per every 3 beds
Religious institution1 per every 6 seats in worship area
Parks and Open AreasArboretum or botanical gardenSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Cemetery, columbaria, mausoleum1 per employee on largest shift
Community garden2 + 1 per every 0.5 acre
GreenwaySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Golf course, public4 per hole
Park, public or privateSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Public square or plaza
Public SafetyCorrectional facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Fire or EMS facility
Police substation
Police station
TransportationAirportSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Helicopter landing facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Passenger terminal, surface transportation1 per every 200 sf
UtilitiesTelecommunications antenna, collocation on existing towerNone
Telecommunications antenna, placement on existing building
Telecommunications tower, freestanding
Utility, major1 per employee on largest shift
Utility, minorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
COMMERCIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Adult EntertainmentAdult entertainment1 per every 3 persons of maximum fire rated capacity
Animal CareAnimal grooming1 per every 300 sf
Animal shelter1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, indoor1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, outdoor
Veterinary clinic1 per every 300 sf
Conference and Training CentersConference or training centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Eating EstablishmentsDinner theater1 per every 4 seats
Restaurant, with indoor or outdoor seatingLess than 100 seats: 1 per every 125 sf (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas). Maximum parking shall be 175% of the minimum.

100 or more seats: 1 per every 4 seats. Maximum parking shall be 1 space per every 2 seats (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas)
Restaurant, with drive-through service
Specialty eating establishment1 per every 200 sf
OfficesBusiness services1 per every 300 sf
Financial services
Professional services1 per every 300 sf
Radio and television broadcasting studio1 per every 500 sf
Sales (including real estate)1 per every 300 sf
Parking, CommercialParking lotNone
Parking structure
Parking tractor trailers
Recreation/Entertainment, IndoorCommercial recreation, indoor1 per every 300 sf
Theater1 per every 4 seats
Recreation/Entertainment, Outdoor [2]Arena, amphitheater, or stadium1 per every 4 seats
Golf course, private4 per hole
Athletic field and clubhouse1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Golf driving range1 per tee + 1 per every 15 sf of hitting area
Swimming pool, private1 per every 75 sf of water surface area
Swimming pool, nonprofit
Tennis court3 per court
Other commercial recreation, outdoor1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Retail Sales and ServicesBar, nightclub, or cocktail lounge1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Entertainment establishment1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Gasoline sales1 per employee
Crematory1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Financial institution, without drive-through service1 per every 300 sf
Financial institution, with drive-through service
Funeral home1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Laundromat1 per every 250 sf
Personal services establishment1 per every 300 sf
Tattoo parlor/body piercing establishment1 per every 300 sf
Repair establishment1 per every 300 sf
Convenience store, without gas sales1 per every 250 sf
Convenience store, with gas sales
Drug store or pharmacy, without drive-through service1 per every 250 sf
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service
Flea market1 per every 200 sf of building or use area
Grocery store1 per every 250 sf
Liquor Store1 per every 250 sf
Retail sales establishment, large1 per 350 sf
Electronic gaming operationThe greater of 1 per machine or one space per 150 gross square feet, + 1 per employee on largest shift.
Other retail sales establishments1 per every 300 sf
Self-Service StorageMini-warehouse (with external access)5 for the first 100 units plus 1 per each additional 100 units
 Mini-warehouse (internal access only)5 for the first 200 units plus 1 per each additional 200 units
Vehicle Sales and Services, HeavyAircraft parts, sales, and maintenance1 per every 300 sf
Automotive painting/body shop1 per every 300 sf
Automotive wrecker service1 per employee on largest shift
Transmission shop1 per every 300 sf
Boat and marine rental and sales1 per every 400 sf + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Truck stop1 per every 300 sf of retail + 1 per service bay + 0.5 per gasoline pump
Vehicle Sales and Services, LightAutomotive parts and installation1 per every 300 sf
Automobile repair and servicing (without painting/body-work)1 per every 300 sf
Automobile sales or rentals1 per every 300 sf of building area + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Car wash or auto detailing1 per employee on largest shift
Taxicab service1 per employee on largest shift
Tire/muffler sales and mounting1 per every 300 sf
Visitor AccommodationsBed and breakfast inn2 spaces + 1 per guest bedroom
Hotel or motelHotel or Motel: 1 per every guest room plus75% of spaces required for on-site accessory uses
Tourist Home2 spaces + 1 per guest room
INDUSTRIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Extractive IndustryAll uses1 per employee on largest shift
Industrial ServicesBuilding, heating, plumbing, or electrical contractor1 per every 1,000 sf
Electric motor repair1 per every 400 sf
Fuel oil/bottled gas distributor1 per employee on largest shift
General industrial service1 per 1,500 sf
Heavy equipment sales, rental, or storage1 per 400 sf + 1 per 5,000 sf outdoor display area
Heavy equipment servicing and repair1 per every 1,000 sf
Laundry, dry cleaning, and carpet cleaning plants1 per every 500 sf
Machine shop1 per every 400 sf
Repair of scientific or professional instruments
Research and development1 per every 800 sf
Tool repair1 per every 400 sf
Manufacturing and ProductionManufacturing, heavySee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Manufacturing, high impact/hazardous
Manufacturing, light
Research and Technology ProductionSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse and Freight MovementCold storage plantSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Outdoor storage (as a principal use)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Parcel services1 per employee on largest shift
Truck or freight terminal1 per employee on largest shift
Warehouse (distribution)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse (storage) 
Waste-Related ServicesEnergy recovery plantSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Hazardous waste collection sites1 per employee on largest shift
IncineratorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Land application of wastesNone
Landfill, land clearing and inert debris or construction debrisSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Landfill, sanitary
Recycling center1 per employee on largest shift + 3 spaces
Recycling drop-off centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Salvage and junkyard1 per every 10,000 sf of outdoor area + 1 per employee on largest shift
Tire disposal or recycling1 per employee on largest shift
Waste composting
Wholesale salesAll usesSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
NOTE:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet of gross floor area.
[2] Miniature golf/go-cart tracks shall provide 1 off-street parking space per every 300 sf of use area.
Table 30-5.A.4.b: Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards
USE CATEGORYUSE TYPEMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1]
AGRICULTURAL USE CLASSIFICATION
AgriculturePlant nursery1 per every 300 sf + 1 per every 1,000 sf outdoor nursery lot
All other agricultureSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Agricultural Support and ServicesEquestrian facility1 space + 1 per stall
All other agricultural support and servicesSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
RESIDENTIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Household LivingDwelling/unit, live/workSee Section 30-5.A.4.e
Dwelling, multi-family1.8 per DU
Dwelling, single-family attached2 per DU
Dwelling, single-family detached
Dwelling, two- to four-family
Dwelling, upper story0.5 per DU
Manufactured home, ClassA[1]2 per DU
Manufactured home park(Class A or B homes)
Group LivingDormitory1 per every 2 resident beds
Fraternity or sorority house1 per every 2 resident beds
Group home, large1 per employee + 1 per every 5 children or 1 per every 3 adults
Group home, small2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
Rooming or boarding house1 + 1 per guest bedroom
Therapeutic home2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
PUBLIC AND INSTITUTIONAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Community ServicesCommunity center1 per every 300 sf
Cultural facility1 per every 300 sf
Library1 per every 300 sf
Museum1 per every 500 sf
Senior center1 per every 300 sf
Youth club facility
Day CareAdult day care center1 per every 5 persons up to 50, then 1 per every 10 persons
Child day care center4 + 1 per employee on the largest shift
Educational FacilitiesCollege or university7 per classroom plus 1 per 4 beds in main campus dormitories plus 1 per 300 square feet of office space plus 1 per 5 fixed seats in assembly halls and stadiums
School, elementary1 per employee + 5
School, middle1 per every 30 students + 1 per employee
School, high1 per every 300 sf
Vocational or trade school1 per every 300 sf
Government FacilitiesGovernment maintenance, storage, or distribution facility1 per every 600 sf
Government office1 per every 300 sf
Post office1 per every 300 sf
Health Care FacilitiesBlood/tissue collection facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Drug or alcohol treatment facility1 per every 300 sf
Hospital1 per 2 inpatient beds + 1 per employee
Medical or dental clinic1 per every 250 sf
Medical or dental lab
Medical treatment facility1 per 2 patient beds + 1 per employee
Outpatient facility1 per every 300 sf
InstitutionsAssisted living facility1 per every 3 patient beds
Auditorium1 per 4 seats
Club or lodge1 per 300 sf
Convention center1 per 300 sf
Community Reintegration Center1 per employee + 1 per every 4 persons
Nursing home1 per every 3 patient beds
Psychiatric treatment facility1 per every 3 beds
Religious institution1 per every 6 seats in worship area
Parks and Open AreasArboretum or botanical gardenSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Cemetery, columbaria, mausoleum1 per employee on largest shift
Community garden2 + 1 per every 0.5 acre
GreenwaySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Golf course, public4 per hole
Park, public or privateSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Public square or plaza
Public SafetyCorrectional facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Fire or EMS facility
Police substation
Police station
TransportationAirportSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Helicopter landing facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Passenger terminal, surface transportation1 per every 200 sf
UtilitiesTelecommunications antenna, collocation on existing towerNone
Telecommunications antenna, placement on existing building
Telecommunications tower, freestanding
Utility, major1 per employee on largest shift
Utility, minorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
COMMERCIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Adult EntertainmentAdult entertainment1 per every 3 persons of maximum fire rated capacity
Animal CareAnimal grooming1 per every 300 sf
Animal shelter1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, indoor1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, outdoor
Veterinary clinic1 per every 300 sf
Conference and Training CentersConference or training centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Eating EstablishmentsDinner theater1 per every 4 seats
Restaurant, with indoor or outdoor seatingLess than 100 seats: 1 per every 125 sf (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas). Maximum parking shall be 175% of the minimum.

100 or more seats: 1 per every 4 seats. Maximum parking shall be 1 space per every 2 seats (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas)
Restaurant, with drive-through service
Specialty eating establishment1 per every 200 sf
OfficesBusiness services1 per every 300 sf
Financial services
Professional services1 per every 300 sf
Radio and television broadcasting studio1 per every 500 sf
Sales (including real estate)1 per every 300 sf
Parking, CommercialParking lotNone
Parking structure
Parking tractor trailers
Recreation/Entertainment, IndoorCommercial recreation, indoor1 per every 300 sf
Theater1 per every 4 seats
Recreation/Entertainment, Outdoor [2]Arena, amphitheater, or stadium1 per every 4 seats
Golf course, private4 per hole
Athletic field and clubhouse1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Golf driving range1 per tee + 1 per every 15 sf of hitting area
Swimming pool, private1 per every 75 sf of water surface area
Swimming pool, nonprofit
Tennis court3 per court
Other commercial recreation, outdoor1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Retail Sales and ServicesBar, nightclub, or cocktail lounge1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Entertainment establishment1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Gasoline sales1 per employee
Crematory1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Financial institution, without drive-through service1 per every 300 sf
Financial institution, with drive-through service
Funeral home1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Laundromat1 per every 250 sf
Personal services establishment1 per every 300 sf
Tattoo parlor/body piercing establishment1 per every 300 sf
Repair establishment1 per every 300 sf
Convenience store, without gas sales1 per every 250 sf
Convenience store, with gas sales
Drug store or pharmacy, without drive-through service1 per every 250 sf
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service
Flea market1 per every 200 sf of building or use area
Grocery store1 per every 250 sf
Liquor Store1 per every 250 sf
Retail sales establishment, large1 per 350 sf
Electronic gaming operationThe greater of 1 per machine or one space per 150 gross square feet, + 1 per employee on largest shift.
Other retail sales establishments1 per every 300 sf
Self-Service StorageMini-warehouse (with external access)5 for the first 100 units plus 1 per each additional 100 units
 Mini-warehouse (internal access only)5 for the first 200 units plus 1 per each additional 200 units
Vehicle Sales and Services, HeavyAircraft parts, sales, and maintenance1 per every 300 sf
Automotive painting/body shop1 per every 300 sf
Automotive wrecker service1 per employee on largest shift
Transmission shop1 per every 300 sf
Boat and marine rental and sales1 per every 400 sf + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Truck stop1 per every 300 sf of retail + 1 per service bay + 0.5 per gasoline pump
Vehicle Sales and Services, LightAutomotive parts and installation1 per every 300 sf
Automobile repair and servicing (without painting/body-work)1 per every 300 sf
Automobile sales or rentals1 per every 300 sf of building area + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Car wash or auto detailing1 per employee on largest shift
Taxicab service1 per employee on largest shift
Tire/muffler sales and mounting1 per every 300 sf
Visitor AccommodationsBed and breakfast inn2 spaces + 1 per guest bedroom
Hotel or motelHotel or Motel: 1 per every guest room plus75% of spaces required for on-site accessory uses
Tourist Home2 spaces + 1 per guest room
INDUSTRIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Extractive IndustryAll uses1 per employee on largest shift
Industrial ServicesBuilding, heating, plumbing, or electrical contractor1 per every 1,000 sf
Electric motor repair1 per every 400 sf
Fuel oil/bottled gas distributor1 per employee on largest shift
General industrial service1 per 1,500 sf
Heavy equipment sales, rental, or storage1 per 400 sf + 1 per 5,000 sf outdoor display area
Heavy equipment servicing and repair1 per every 1,000 sf
Laundry, dry cleaning, and carpet cleaning plants1 per every 500 sf
Machine shop1 per every 400 sf
Repair of scientific or professional instruments
Research and development1 per every 800 sf
Tool repair1 per every 400 sf
Manufacturing and ProductionManufacturing, heavySee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Manufacturing, high impact/hazardous
Manufacturing, light
Research and Technology ProductionSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse and Freight MovementCold storage plantSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Outdoor storage (as a principal use)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Parcel services1 per employee on largest shift
Truck or freight terminal1 per employee on largest shift
Warehouse (distribution)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse (storage) 
Waste-Related ServicesEnergy recovery plantSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Hazardous waste collection sites1 per employee on largest shift
IncineratorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Land application of wastesNone
Landfill, land clearing and inert debris or construction debrisSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Landfill, sanitary
Recycling center1 per employee on largest shift + 3 spaces
Recycling drop-off centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Salvage and junkyard1 per every 10,000 sf of outdoor area + 1 per employee on largest shift
Tire disposal or recycling1 per employee on largest shift
Waste composting
Wholesale salesAll usesSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
NOTE:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet of gross floor area.
[2] Miniature golf/go-cart tracks shall provide 1 off-street parking space per every 300 sf of use area.
Table 30-5.A.4.b: Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards
USE CATEGORYUSE TYPEMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1]
AGRICULTURAL USE CLASSIFICATION
AgriculturePlant nursery1 per every 300 sf + 1 per every 1,000 sf outdoor nursery lot
All other agricultureSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Agricultural Support and ServicesEquestrian facility1 space + 1 per stall
All other agricultural support and servicesSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
RESIDENTIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Household LivingDwelling/unit, live/workSee Section 30-5.A.4.e
Dwelling, multi-family1.8 per DU
Dwelling, single-family attached2 per DU
Dwelling, single-family detached
Dwelling, two- to four-family
Dwelling, upper story0.5 per DU
Manufactured home, ClassA[1]2 per DU
Manufactured home park(Class A or B homes)
Group LivingDormitory1 per every 2 resident beds
Fraternity or sorority house1 per every 2 resident beds
Group home, large1 per employee + 1 per every 5 children or 1 per every 3 adults
Group home, small2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
Rooming or boarding house1 + 1 per guest bedroom
Therapeutic home2 + 1 per employee not residing in the home
PUBLIC AND INSTITUTIONAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Community ServicesCommunity center1 per every 300 sf
Cultural facility1 per every 300 sf
Library1 per every 300 sf
Museum1 per every 500 sf
Senior center1 per every 300 sf
Youth club facility
Day CareAdult day care center1 per every 5 persons up to 50, then 1 per every 10 persons
Child day care center4 + 1 per employee on the largest shift
Educational FacilitiesCollege or university7 per classroom plus 1 per 4 beds in main campus dormitories plus 1 per 300 square feet of office space plus 1 per 5 fixed seats in assembly halls and stadiums
School, elementary1 per employee + 5
School, middle1 per every 30 students + 1 per employee
School, high1 per every 300 sf
Vocational or trade school1 per every 300 sf
Government FacilitiesGovernment maintenance, storage, or distribution facility1 per every 600 sf
Government office1 per every 300 sf
Post office1 per every 300 sf
Health Care FacilitiesBlood/tissue collection facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Drug or alcohol treatment facility1 per every 300 sf
Hospital1 per 2 inpatient beds + 1 per employee
Medical or dental clinic1 per every 250 sf
Medical or dental lab
Medical treatment facility1 per 2 patient beds + 1 per employee
Outpatient facility1 per every 300 sf
InstitutionsAssisted living facility1 per every 3 patient beds
Auditorium1 per 4 seats
Club or lodge1 per 300 sf
Convention center1 per 300 sf
Community Reintegration Center1 per employee + 1 per every 4 persons
Nursing home1 per every 3 patient beds
Psychiatric treatment facility1 per every 3 beds
Religious institution1 per every 6 seats in worship area
Parks and Open AreasArboretum or botanical gardenSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Cemetery, columbaria, mausoleum1 per employee on largest shift
Community garden2 + 1 per every 0.5 acre
GreenwaySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Golf course, public4 per hole
Park, public or privateSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Public square or plaza
Public SafetyCorrectional facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Fire or EMS facility
Police substation
Police station
TransportationAirportSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Helicopter landing facilitySee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Passenger terminal, surface transportation1 per every 200 sf
UtilitiesTelecommunications antenna, collocation on existing towerNone
Telecommunications antenna, placement on existing building
Telecommunications tower, freestanding
Utility, major1 per employee on largest shift
Utility, minorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
COMMERCIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Adult EntertainmentAdult entertainment1 per every 3 persons of maximum fire rated capacity
Animal CareAnimal grooming1 per every 300 sf
Animal shelter1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, indoor1 per every 400 sf
Kennel, outdoor
Veterinary clinic1 per every 300 sf
Conference and Training CentersConference or training centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Eating EstablishmentsDinner theater1 per every 4 seats
Restaurant, with indoor or outdoor seatingLess than 100 seats: 1 per every 125 sf (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas). Maximum parking shall be 175% of the minimum.

100 or more seats: 1 per every 4 seats. Maximum parking shall be 1 space per every 2 seats (including outdoor waiting/seating/dining areas)
Restaurant, with drive-through service
Specialty eating establishment1 per every 200 sf
OfficesBusiness services1 per every 300 sf
Financial services
Professional services1 per every 300 sf
Radio and television broadcasting studio1 per every 500 sf
Sales (including real estate)1 per every 300 sf
Parking, CommercialParking lotNone
Parking structure
Parking tractor trailers
Recreation/Entertainment, IndoorCommercial recreation, indoor1 per every 300 sf
Theater1 per every 4 seats
Recreation/Entertainment, Outdoor [2]Arena, amphitheater, or stadium1 per every 4 seats
Golf course, private4 per hole
Athletic field and clubhouse1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Golf driving range1 per tee + 1 per every 15 sf of hitting area
Swimming pool, private1 per every 75 sf of water surface area
Swimming pool, nonprofit
Tennis court3 per court
Other commercial recreation, outdoor1 per every 5,000 sf of land area
Retail Sales and ServicesBar, nightclub, or cocktail lounge1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Entertainment establishment1 per 3 persons of maximum North Carolina Building or Fire Code rated capacity
Gasoline sales1 per employee
Crematory1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Financial institution, without drive-through service1 per every 300 sf
Financial institution, with drive-through service
Funeral home1 per 4 seats in main assembly room
Laundromat1 per every 250 sf
Personal services establishment1 per every 300 sf
Tattoo parlor/body piercing establishment1 per every 300 sf
Repair establishment1 per every 300 sf
Convenience store, without gas sales1 per every 250 sf
Convenience store, with gas sales
Drug store or pharmacy, without drive-through service1 per every 250 sf
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service
Flea market1 per every 200 sf of building or use area
Grocery store1 per every 250 sf
Liquor Store1 per every 250 sf
Retail sales establishment, large1 per 350 sf
Electronic gaming operationThe greater of 1 per machine or one space per 150 gross square feet, + 1 per employee on largest shift.
Other retail sales establishments1 per every 300 sf
Self-Service StorageMini-warehouse (with external access)5 for the first 100 units plus 1 per each additional 100 units
 Mini-warehouse (internal access only)5 for the first 200 units plus 1 per each additional 200 units
Vehicle Sales and Services, HeavyAircraft parts, sales, and maintenance1 per every 300 sf
Automotive painting/body shop1 per every 300 sf
Automotive wrecker service1 per employee on largest shift
Transmission shop1 per every 300 sf
Boat and marine rental and sales1 per every 400 sf + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Truck stop1 per every 300 sf of retail + 1 per service bay + 0.5 per gasoline pump
Vehicle Sales and Services, LightAutomotive parts and installation1 per every 300 sf
Automobile repair and servicing (without painting/body-work)1 per every 300 sf
Automobile sales or rentals1 per every 300 sf of building area + 1 per every 5,000 sf of outdoor display area
Car wash or auto detailing1 per employee on largest shift
Taxicab service1 per employee on largest shift
Tire/muffler sales and mounting1 per every 300 sf
Visitor AccommodationsBed and breakfast inn2 spaces + 1 per guest bedroom
Hotel or motelHotel or Motel: 1 per every guest room plus75% of spaces required for on-site accessory uses
Tourist Home2 spaces + 1 per guest room
INDUSTRIAL USE CLASSIFICATION
Extractive IndustryAll uses1 per employee on largest shift
Industrial ServicesBuilding, heating, plumbing, or electrical contractor1 per every 1,000 sf
Electric motor repair1 per every 400 sf
Fuel oil/bottled gas distributor1 per employee on largest shift
General industrial service1 per 1,500 sf
Heavy equipment sales, rental, or storage1 per 400 sf + 1 per 5,000 sf outdoor display area
Heavy equipment servicing and repair1 per every 1,000 sf
Laundry, dry cleaning, and carpet cleaning plants1 per every 500 sf
Machine shop1 per every 400 sf
Repair of scientific or professional instruments
Research and development1 per every 800 sf
Tool repair1 per every 400 sf
Manufacturing and ProductionManufacturing, heavySee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Manufacturing, high impact/hazardous
Manufacturing, light
Research and Technology ProductionSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse and Freight MovementCold storage plantSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
Outdoor storage (as a principal use)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Parcel services1 per employee on largest shift
Truck or freight terminal1 per employee on largest shift
Warehouse (distribution)See Table 30-5.A.4.c
Warehouse (storage) 
Waste-Related ServicesEnergy recovery plantSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Hazardous waste collection sites1 per employee on largest shift
IncineratorSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Land application of wastesNone
Landfill, land clearing and inert debris or construction debrisSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Landfill, sanitary
Recycling center1 per employee on largest shift + 3 spaces
Recycling drop-off centerSee Section 30-5.A.4.d
Salvage and junkyard1 per every 10,000 sf of outdoor area + 1 per employee on largest shift
Tire disposal or recycling1 per employee on largest shift
Waste composting
Wholesale salesAll usesSee Table 30-5.A.4.c
NOTE:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet of gross floor area.
[2] Miniature golf/go-cart tracks shall provide 1 off-street parking space per every 300 sf of use area.
  1. c.
    Off-Street Parking Standards for Selected Service and Industrial Uses
    Uses in Table 30-5.A.4.B that reference Table 30-5.A.4.C shall provide the minimum number of spaces established in Table 30-5.A.4.C, Off-Street Parking Standards for Selected Industrial Uses:
Table 30-5.A.4.c: Off-street Parking Standards for Selected Industrial Uses
USE OR ACTIVITYMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1] [2]
Office or administrative area1 per every 300 sf
Indoor sales area1 per every 250 sf
Indoor storage/warehousing/assembly/vehicular service/manufacturing area:

1 space per employee on the largest shift + 3 additional spaces

Outdoor sales/display/storage area (3,000 sf or less)1 per every 750 sf
Outdoor sales/display/storage area (more than 3,000 sf)1 per every 1,000 sf
NOTES:
[1] sf = square feet (of floor area unless otherwise noted)
[2] The total number of required spaces is cumulative, based on the variety of different functions present in a single use.
Table 30-5.A.4.c: Off-street Parking Standards for Selected Industrial Uses
USE OR ACTIVITYMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1] [2]
Office or administrative area1 per every 300 sf
Indoor sales area1 per every 250 sf
Indoor storage/warehousing/assembly/vehicular service/manufacturing area:

1 space per employee on the largest shift + 3 additional spaces

Outdoor sales/display/storage area (3,000 sf or less)1 per every 750 sf
Outdoor sales/display/storage area (more than 3,000 sf)1 per every 1,000 sf
NOTES:
[1] sf = square feet (of floor area unless otherwise noted)
[2] The total number of required spaces is cumulative, based on the variety of different functions present in a single use.
Table 30-5.A.4.c: Off-street Parking Standards for Selected Industrial Uses
USE OR ACTIVITYMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1] [2]
Office or administrative area1 per every 300 sf
Indoor sales area1 per every 250 sf
Indoor storage/warehousing/assembly/vehicular service/manufacturing area:

1 space per employee on the largest shift + 3 additional spaces

Outdoor sales/display/storage area (3,000 sf or less)1 per every 750 sf
Outdoor sales/display/storage area (more than 3,000 sf)1 per every 1,000 sf
NOTES:
[1] sf = square feet (of floor area unless otherwise noted)
[2] The total number of required spaces is cumulative, based on the variety of different functions present in a single use.
Table 30-5.A.4.c: Off-street Parking Standards for Selected Industrial Uses
USE OR ACTIVITYMINIMUM NUMBER OF PARKING SPACES [1] [2]
Office or administrative area1 per every 300 sf
Indoor sales area1 per every 250 sf
Indoor storage/warehousing/assembly/vehicular service/manufacturing area:

1 space per employee on the largest shift + 3 additional spaces

Outdoor sales/display/storage area (3,000 sf or less)1 per every 750 sf
Outdoor sales/display/storage area (more than 3,000 sf)1 per every 1,000 sf
NOTES:
[1] sf = square feet (of floor area unless otherwise noted)
[2] The total number of required spaces is cumulative, based on the variety of different functions present in a single use.
  1. d.
    Uses with Variable Parking Demand Characteristics
    Uses that reference this subsection in Table 30-5.A.4.B, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, have widely varying parking and loading demand characteristics, making it difficult to establish a single off-street parking or loading standard. Upon receiving a development application for a use subject to this subsection, the City Manager shall apply the off-street parking, loading, and circulation standard specified for the listed use that is deemed most similar to the proposed use or establish minimum off-street parking standards on the basis of a parking and loading study prepared by the applicant. Such a study shall include estimates of parking demand based on recommendations of the Institute of Traffic Engineers (ITE) or other acceptable estimates as approved by the City Manager, and should include other reliable data collected from uses or combinations of uses that are the same as or comparable with the proposed use. Comparability will be determined by density, scale, bulk, area, type of activity, and location. The study shall document the source of data used to develop the recommendations.
  2. e.
    Mixed-Uses
    Unless otherwise approved, lots containing more than one use shall provide parking spaces in an amount equal to the total of the standards for all individual uses. This provision shall not limit the ability to submit an Alternative Parking Plan (see Section 30-5.A.8) to reduce the minimum number of required off-street parking spaces in recognition of different operating hours or peak business periods.
  3. f.
    Compact Spaces
    Off-street parking spaces provided in excess of the minimum number of required off-street parking spaces in Table 30-5.A.4.B, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, may be provided as compact car spaces, provided the following standards are met:
    1. 1.
      Minimum Dimensions
      Each compact car parking space shall have minimum dimensions of eight feet in width and 16 feet in length, with a total area of at least 128 square feet;
    2. 2.
      Location
      Compact car parking spaces shall be located no closer to the primary building entrance than any standard parking spaces; and
    3. 3.
      Designated
      All compact car spaces shall be designated by signage and pavement marking.
  4. g.
    Placement
    Figure 30-5.A.4.i: Minimum Separation
    Diagram illustrating minimum separation
    Separation between building walls and parking spaces allows room for pedestrian movement.
    1. 1.
      The location or placement of off-street parking areas on a development site shall be limited in accordance with the placement standards of Section 30-5.I, Commercial, Office, and Mixed-Use Design Standards, Section 30-5.J, Large Retail Design Standards, and Section 30-5.H, Multi-Family Design Standards, as appropriate.
    2. 2.
      Placement of off-street parking, loading, or circulation areas within an easement shall require the written consent of the easement holder.
  5. h.
    Minimum Separation
    All parking areas shall be separated at least ten feet from building façades to allow room for sidewalks, landscaping, and other plantings between the building and the parking area. This separation may be eliminated to the rear of buildings in areas designed for service or unloading and loading of materials (see Figure 30-5.A.4.i).

(Ord. No. S2011-008, §§ 12.2c, 12.3, 7-25-2011; Ord. No. S2011-013, §§ 10, 11, 11-28-2011; Ord. No. S2012-007, § 2,4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-016, § 3.2, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, §§ 7, 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2013-006,§ 1, 2, 5-13-2013; Ord. No. S2014-014, §5, 8-11-2014; Ord. No. S2021-034, § 1, 10/25/2021; Ord. No. S2022-025, § 1, 09/26/2022; Ord. No. S2023-001D, §, 01/26/2023; Ord. No. S2023-006, § 1, 03/23/2023; Ord. No. S2024-011, § 1, 05/28/2024; )

Effective on: 8/11/2014

30-5.A.5. Parking Standards for Residential Development

Off-street parking serving single-family detached, attached, or two- to four-family dwellings and located within front yard and/or corner side yard areas shall comply with the following standards:

  1. a.
    Parking in Vehicular Use Area Required:
    Vehicles, whether parked or stored, shall be located in a vehicular use area. For the purposes of this subsection, "vehicles" shall include, but not be limited to, passenger vehicles, all trucks with a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 13,000 pounds or less, vans, golf carts, or other similar vehicles.
  2. b.
    Maximum Area Available for Vehicular Use
    Vehicular use areas located within the first 40 feet of the front or corner side yard (as measured from the edge of the street right-of-way) shall be limited to the greater of 33 percent of the entire front and/or corner side yard area, or 750 square feet (see Figure 30-5.A.5, Maximum Vehicular Use Area), but not to exceed one-half the minimum required yard area. Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to limit the size of the vehicular use area located beyond the first 40 feet of a front or corner side yard area.
  3. c.
    Limitation on Heavy Trucks, Trailers, or Major Recreational Equipment
    1. 1.
      In accordance with Section 30-4.D.3.t, Storage of Heavy Trucks, Trailers, or Major Recreational Equipment, parking of heavy trucks, commercial vehicles, or similar vehicles exceeding a gross vehicle weight rating of 13,000 pounds is prohibited in front and corner side yards.
    2. 2.
      Vehicles intended for personal transport with a gross vehicle weight rating of 13,000 pounds or less may be parked within the vehicular use area in front or corner side yards.
  1.   
    (Ord. No. S2013-020, § 1, 10-28-2013; Ord. No. S2015-008, § 3, 8-10-2015)
Figure 30-5.A.5.b: Maximum Vehicular Use Area
Diagram illustrating maximum vehicular use area
  1. d.
    Surfacing
    1. 1.
      Vehicular use areas shall be surfaced in accordance with the standards in Section 30-5.A.3.c, Surfacing, within 40 feet of the edges of all adjacent right-of-way, except that gravel, crushed stone, or similar material may be used. The City Manager may approve alternative surfacing in cases where topography, existing trees, or existing structures make compliance with the standards impossible or impractical.
    2. 2.
      When used, gravel or crushed stone shall be at least two inches deep throughout the vehicular use area, and the vehicular use area shall maintain a visibly discernible and definable edge composed of landscape timbers, metal edging, vegetation (such as low shrubs or decorative grasses), or a similar technique.
    3. 3.
      Vehicular use areas within utility easements disturbed by the PWC during installation or servicing of underground utilities shall be resurfaced with materials to match the existing surface after completion of utility work.
  2. e.
    Inoperable Vehicle/Equipment Storage
    Storage of inoperable vehicles or equipment shall only take place within an enclosed structure.

(Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012)

Effective on: 8/10/2015

30-5.A.6. Accessible Parking Spaces for Physically Disabled Persons

Development required to provide off-street parking spaces shall ensure that a portion of the total number of required off-street parking spaces shall be specifically designated, located, and reserved for use by persons with physical disabilities, in accordance with the standards in the Federal American with Disabilities Act.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.7. Dimensional Standards for Parking Spaces and Aisles

  1. a.
    General
    Standard car parking spaces and parking lot aisles shall comply with the minimum dimensional standards established in Table 30-5.A.7, Dimensional Standards for Parking Spaces and Aisles, and Figure 30-5.A.7, Parking Stall Measurement.
Table 30-5.A.7: Dimensional Standards for Parking Spaces and Aisles 
PARKING ANGLESTALL WIDTH (FEET)STALL DEPTH (FEET)AISLE WIDTH FOR TWO-WAY TRAFFIC (FEET)AISLE WIDTH FOR ONE-WAY TRAFFIC (FEET)
Parallel9222012
45 degrees9182014
60 degrees9182018
90 degrees9202422
  1. b.
    Dimensional Adjustments
    Parking structures may be subject to dimensional adjustments based on utilization, but in no case shall the standard parking space width be less than eight feet. Reduction in design standards shall be subject to approval by the City Manager.
Figure 30-5.A.7: Parking Stall Measurement
Diagram illustrating parking stall measurement
Parking stall width and length is measured from the face of the curb, or the inside edge of the striping, as appropriate.

(Ord. No. S2011-008, § 1, 7-25-2011; Ord. No. S2011-013, § 1.2, 11-28-2011; Ord. No. S2012-001, § 5.3, 1-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2018-017, 6-25-2018; Ord. No. S2019-022, 1, 04/23/2019)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.8. Alternative Parking Plan

The City Manager is be authorized to approve an Alternative Parking Plan that proposes alternatives to providing the number of required off-street parking spaces required by Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, in accordance with the standards listed below. Nothing in this subsection shall limit the utilization of one or more of the following off-street parking alternatives by a single use.

  1. a.
    Provision over the Maximum Allowed
    Requests to provide more than the maximum number of off-street parking spaces required by Section 30-5.A.4.f, Maximum Number of Spaces Permitted, shall comply with the following:
    1. 1.
      Parking Demand Study
      Requests for exceeding the maximum number of required off-street parking spaces shall be accompanied by a parking demand study demonstrating how the maximum number of parking spaces specified by Section 30-5.A.4.f, Maximum Number of Spaces Permitted, is insufficient for the proposed development. A build-to-suit agreement or firm tenant lease specifications or similar documentation may be considered in-lieu of a parking demand study.
  2. b.
    Provision Under the Minimum Required
    Requests to provide fewer than the minimum number of off-street parking spaces required by Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, shall comply with the following:
    1. 1.
      Parking Demand Study
      Requests for reducing the minimum number of required off-street parking spaces shall be accompanied by a parking demand study demonstrating how the minimum number of parking spaces specified by Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, is excessive for the proposed development.
    2. 2.
      Minimum Amount Required
      The minimum number of off-street spaces allowed shall equal the minimum number of off-street parking spaces demonstrated as needed by the required parking demand study.
    3. 3.
      Site Plan Requirements for less than Minimum Amount Required
      In cases where less than the minimum number of spaces is provided, the Site Plan shall set aside land area strategically located for conversion to parking in the event there is a subsequent change in use. The additional set-aside shall enable the development of enough parking spaces to satisfy the minimum number of spaces required by this Ordinance for the use contemplated under the original development.
  3. c.
    Shared Parking
    Requests for shared parking shall comply with all of the following standards:
    1. 1.
      Location
      1. a.
        Except for shared parking located within a parking structure or served by a parking shuttle, shared parking spaces shall be located within 400 linear feet of the primary entrance of all uses served.
      2. b.
        Shared parking located within a parking structure or served by a shuttle shall be located within 1,000 feet of the primary entrance of all uses served.
      3. c.
        Shared parking spaces shall not be separated from the use they serve by an arterial or collector street, unless the shared parking area or parking structure is served by an improved pedestrian crossing.
    2. 2.
      Pedestrian Access
      Adequate and safe pedestrian access shall be provided from and to the shared parking areas.
    3. 3.
      Directional Signage
      Directional signage that complies with the standards of this Ordinance shall be provided to direct the public to the shared parking spaces. It is preferable for the employees of an establishment to utilize these spaces.
    4. 4.
      Shared Parking Plan
      1. a.
        Justification
        Those requesting to use shared parking as a means of satisfying the off-street parking standards must submit a Shared Parking Plan as part of an Alternative Parking Plan that justifies the feasibility of shared parking. Justification shall include information on the size and type of the proposed development, the composition of tenants, the anticipated rate of parking turnover, and the anticipated peak parking and traffic loads for all uses that will be sharing off-street parking spaces.
      2. b.
        Recorded Agreement
        A Shared Parking Plan portion of an Alternative Parking Plan shall be enforced through written agreement among all owners of record. An attested copy of the agreement between the owners of record must be recorded with the Cumberland County Register of Deeds. Recordation of the agreement shall take place prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy (see Section 30-2.C.13) for any use to be served by the shared parking areas.  A shared parking agreement may be revoked only if all required off-street parking spaces will be provided in accordance with the requirements of Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards.
  4. d.
    Off-Site Parking for Nonresidential Uses
    Generally, all off-street parking areas for any nonresidential use shall be provided on the same parcel of land as the use it serves. Off-street parking for nonresidential uses may be located on another parcel of land, if there are practical difficulties in locating the parking area on-site or the public safety or public convenience is better served by off-site parking. Off-site parking for nonresidential uses shall comply with the following standards:
    1. 1.
      Pedestrian Way Required
      Except within the Downtown (DT) district, a pedestrian way that complies with all applicable ADA requirements, and is not more than 600 feet in length, shall be provided from the off-site parking area to the use it serves. Pedestrian ways are not required within the Downtown (DT) district.
    2. 2.
      No Undue Hazard
      The off-site parking area shall be convenient to the use it serves without causing unreasonable:
      1. a.
        Hazard to pedestrians;
      2. b.
        Hazard to vehicular traffic;
      3. c.
        Traffic congestion;
      4. d.
        Interference with commercial activity or convenient access to other parking areas in the vicinity;
      5. e.
        Detriment to the appropriate use of business lands in the vicinity; or
      6. f.
        Detriment to any abutting residential neighborhood.
    3. 3.
      Recorded Agreement
      An attested copy of the agreement shall be recorded with the Cumberland County Register of Deeds. Recordation of the agreement shall take place prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy (see Section 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards.
  5. e.
    Deferred Parking
    An applicant may submit a request to defer the construction of up to 30 percent of the number of parking spaces required in Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, if the request complies with the following standards:
    1. 1.
      Fewer Spaces Needed
      The applicant shall demonstrate that because of the location, nature, or mix of uses, there is a reasonable probability the number of parking spaces actually needed to serve the development is less than the minimum required by Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards.
    2. 2.
      Reserve Parking Plan
      The request shall be accompanied by a Reserve Parking Plan identifying: (a) the amount of off-street parking being deferred, and (b) the location of the area to be reserved for future parking, if future parking is needed.
    3. 3.
      Parking Demand Study
      The applicant shall provide assurance that a Parking Demand Study evaluating the adequacy of the existing parking spaces in meeting the parking demand generated by the development will be submitted to the City Manager within 16 months after the initial Certificate of Occupancy (see Section 30-2.C.13) is issued for the development. If the study indicates that the existing parking is adequate, then construction of the remaining number of parking spaces shall not be required. If the study indicates a need for additional parking, it shall be provided consistent with the Reserve Parking Plan and the standards of this section.
    4. 4.
      Limitations on Reserve Areas
      Areas reserved for future parking shall be brought to the finished grade and shall not be used for buildings, storage, loading, or other purposes requiring buildings or permanent structures.
    5. 5.
      Landscaping Required
      Areas reserved for future parking shall be landscaped with an appropriate ground cover, and shall comply with all relevant landscaping standards of this Ordinance.
  6. f.
    Parking Structures
    The off-street parking required by this section may be located in a parking structure, whether on the same or a different lot than the uses it serves, but in no instance shall credit be given for shared parking spaces in a parking structure farther than 1,000 feet from the primary entrance of uses served. Ground floor parking provided in a parking structure shall be screened, insofar as practicable, from surrounding uses and from public view as required by Section 30-5.B.4.c, Vehicular Use Area Landscaping. In addition, for uses located on the same lot as the structure, the standards required for shared parking shall apply. For uses located on a different lot as the structure, the standards required for off-site parking shall apply.
  7. g.
    Valet and Tandem Parking
    An off-street parking program utilizing limited tandem parking may be allowed for uses listed under the commercial or industrial use classification in Table 30-5.A.4.b, Minimum Off-Street Parking Standards, in accordance with the following standards:
    1. 1.
      The development served shall provide 75 or more parking spaces;
    2. 2.
      No more than 30 percent of the total number of spaces shall be designated as tandem; and
    3. 3.
      A valet parking attendant must be on duty during hours of operation.
  8. h.
    In-Lieu Fee
    1. 1.
      Limited to MU District
      Within the Mixed-Use (MU) district, off-street parking requirements for nonresidential uses may be satisfied, at the option of the City, by developer payment of a proportionate share in-lieu parking fee established by the City Manager that is consistent with, but does not exceed, costs the City will incur to provide for comparable off-street parking spaces for the development.
    2. 2.
      Procedure for Approval
      The payment of such proportionate share fees-in-lieu shall be reviewed and approved as part of the Site Plan (Section 30-2.C.5), or Final Plat (Section 30-2.C.6.e), as appropriate. Any applicant proposing to make such payment shall attach a letter to the City Manager requesting the payment of fees in-lieu of installing required parking spaces. Upon receipt of the application, the City Manager shall review the request and submit recommendations concerning the payment of fees in-lieu. In the event of a dispute between an applicant who wants to make payment in-lieu, and a recommendation by the City Manager, or finding by the TRC, that the parking standards in this Ordinance shall apply, the City Council shall make the final determination.
    3. 3.
      Time of Payment
      The fees in-lieu for parking shall be paid prior to recording the Final Plat, and if no Final Plat is required, prior to the issuance of a Building Permit (Section 30-2.C.12).
    4. 4.
      Proportionate Amount of Payment
      Where the proportionate payment of fees to the City is to be made in-lieu of installing parking as permitted by this subsection, the City Manager shall verify the cost estimate for installing the parking in accordance with the adopted fee schedule, as amended.
    5. 5.
      Use of Funds
      Fees-in-lieu received in accordance with this subsection shall be used only for the development of new off-street and on-street parking in the vicinity of the use proposing the fee-in-lieu that can be used for parking by that development.
  9. i.
    Alternative Materials
    Figure 30-5.A.8: Alternative Materials
    Example of alternative materials
    “Grasscrete” is one type of alternative parking material that can help address stormwater quality issues.
    The use of pervious or semi-pervious parking area surfacing materials—including, but not limited to, grass, mulch, "grass-crete," or recycled materials such as glass, rubber, used asphalt, brick, block and concrete—may be approved for the required vehicular surface area on a site, provided such areas are properly maintained. Where possible, such materials should be used in areas proximate to and in combination with on-site stormwater control devices (see Figure 30-5.A.8, Alternative Materials).

(Ord. No. S2012-007, § 2, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-017, § 3, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2019-023, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-024, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-025, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2023-010, § 1, 03/23/2023)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.9. Bicycle Parking

Within the Neighborhood Commercial (NC), Limited Commercial (LC), Mixed-Use  (MU), and  Downtown  (DT) zoning  districts,  residential development with 30 or more  dwelling units and nonresidential development with 5,000 or more square feet of gross floor area shall provide individual or shared bicycle parking facilities in accordance with the following standards.  Nonresidential uses  of up to 20,000  square feet in size  may  share bicycle parking facilities in accordance with this section.

  1. General Standards
    1. Bicycle parking facilities shall be conveniently located, but in no case shall such facilities be located more than 150 feet from the primary building entrance.
    2. Bicycle parking spaces shall be provided at the rate of one bicycle parking space per every 30 residential dwelling units and/or  every 5,000 square feet of nonresidential floor area.
    3. Bicycle facilities  shall  include  a  rack  or other  device  to enable bicycles  to be secured.
  2. Shared Bicycle Parking
    Nonresidential uses  of  20,000  square feet  in size  or less  may  share bicycle  parking spaces provided:
    1. Each  use  provides or is served by improved  pedestrian access from the bicycle parking facility to the primary building entrance; and
    2. The shared bicycle parking facility and  improved  pedestrian access is depicted on a Site Plan.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.10. Loading Space Standards

  1. a.
    Number of Required Off-Street Loading Spaces
    On-site loading spaces shall be provided in accordance with Table 30-5.A.10, Required Off-Street Loading Spaces, depending on the use or its gross floor area. The developer shall determine if the use requires a greater number of spaces than those required by this section. The intent of these standards is to prevent commercial loading and unloading activities from occurring on public or private streets or blocking other vehicular circulation.
Table 30-5.A.10: Required Off-Street Loading Spaces [1]
USE OR ACTIVITY [2]UNITS OR GROSS FLOOR AREA (GFA)MINIMUM NUMBER OF LOADING SPACES
Offices and personal service establishments15,000 sf or more1
Visitor Accommodations [3]50—149 units1 plus 1 per each additional 100 units above 149 units
Space used by, designed for, or adaptable to a retail sales and services use10,000—19,999 sf1
20,000—49,999 sf2
50,000—99,999 sf3
100,000 sf or more4 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 100,000 sf GFA
Wholesale and manufacturing usesUp to 15,000 sf1
15,000—49,999 sf2
50,000 sf or more3 + 1 per every 50,000 sf GFA above 50,000 sf GFA
Mini-warehouse (internal access only)50 units or more1 per every 50 units [4]
All other Commercial and Industrial Uses15,000—39,999 sf1
40,000—99,999 sf2
100,000—159,999 sf3
160,000—239,999 sf4
240,000—319,999 sf5
320,000—399,999 sf6
400,000 sf or more7 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 400,000 sf GFA

NOTES:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet; GFA = gross floor area
[2] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[3] Loading space is not required if there is not a full service restaurant in the hotel in accordance with the Cumberland County Health Department standards and regulations.
[4] Loading spaces shall be located near the entrance(s) to the building. If there is more than one entrance, the loading spaces should be evenly distributed among all entrances, as shown on the Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5, Site Plan.)

Table 30-5.A.10: Required Off-Street Loading Spaces [1]
USE OR ACTIVITY [2]UNITS OR GROSS FLOOR AREA (GFA)MINIMUM NUMBER OF LOADING SPACES
Offices and personal service establishments15,000 sf or more1
Visitor Accommodations [3]50—149 units1 plus 1 per each additional 100 units above 149 units
Space used by, designed for, or adaptable to a retail sales and services use10,000—19,999 sf1
20,000—49,999 sf2
50,000—99,999 sf3
100,000 sf or more4 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 100,000 sf GFA
Wholesale and manufacturing usesUp to 15,000 sf1
15,000—49,999 sf2
50,000 sf or more3 + 1 per every 50,000 sf GFA above 50,000 sf GFA
Mini-warehouse (internal access only)50 units or more1 per every 50 units [4]
All other Commercial and Industrial Uses15,000—39,999 sf1
40,000—99,999 sf2
100,000—159,999 sf3
160,000—239,999 sf4
240,000—319,999 sf5
320,000—399,999 sf6
400,000 sf or more7 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 400,000 sf GFA

NOTES:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet; GFA = gross floor area
[2] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[3] Loading space is not required if there is not a full service restaurant in the hotel in accordance with the Cumberland County Health Department standards and regulations.
[4] Loading spaces shall be located near the entrance(s) to the building. If there is more than one entrance, the loading spaces should be evenly distributed among all entrances, as shown on the Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5, Site Plan.)

Table 30-5.A.10: Required Off-Street Loading Spaces [1]
USE OR ACTIVITY [2]UNITS OR GROSS FLOOR AREA (GFA)MINIMUM NUMBER OF LOADING SPACES
Offices and personal service establishments15,000 sf or more1
Visitor Accommodations [3]50—149 units1 plus 1 per each additional 100 units above 149 units
Space used by, designed for, or adaptable to a retail sales and services use10,000—19,999 sf1
20,000—49,999 sf2
50,000—99,999 sf3
100,000 sf or more4 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 100,000 sf GFA
Wholesale and manufacturing usesUp to 15,000 sf1
15,000—49,999 sf2
50,000 sf or more3 + 1 per every 50,000 sf GFA above 50,000 sf GFA
Mini-warehouse (internal access only)50 units or more1 per every 50 units [4]
All other Commercial and Industrial Uses15,000—39,999 sf1
40,000—99,999 sf2
100,000—159,999 sf3
160,000—239,999 sf4
240,000—319,999 sf5
320,000—399,999 sf6
400,000 sf or more7 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 400,000 sf GFA

NOTES:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet; GFA = gross floor area
[2] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[3] Loading space is not required if there is not a full service restaurant in the hotel in accordance with the Cumberland County Health Department standards and regulations.
[4] Loading spaces shall be located near the entrance(s) to the building. If there is more than one entrance, the loading spaces should be evenly distributed among all entrances, as shown on the Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5, Site Plan.)

Table 30-5.A.10: Required Off-Street Loading Spaces [1]
USE OR ACTIVITY [2]UNITS OR GROSS FLOOR AREA (GFA)MINIMUM NUMBER OF LOADING SPACES
Offices and personal service establishments15,000 sf or more1
Visitor Accommodations [3]50—149 units1 plus 1 per each additional 100 units above 149 units
Space used by, designed for, or adaptable to a retail sales and services use10,000—19,999 sf1
20,000—49,999 sf2
50,000—99,999 sf3
100,000 sf or more4 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 100,000 sf GFA
Wholesale and manufacturing usesUp to 15,000 sf1
15,000—49,999 sf2
50,000 sf or more3 + 1 per every 50,000 sf GFA above 50,000 sf GFA
Mini-warehouse (internal access only)50 units or more1 per every 50 units [4]
All other Commercial and Industrial Uses15,000—39,999 sf1
40,000—99,999 sf2
100,000—159,999 sf3
160,000—239,999 sf4
240,000—319,999 sf5
320,000—399,999 sf6
400,000 sf or more7 + 1 per every 100,000 sf GFA above 400,000 sf GFA

NOTES:
[1] DU = dwelling unit; sf = square feet; GFA = gross floor area
[2] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[3] Loading space is not required if there is not a full service restaurant in the hotel in accordance with the Cumberland County Health Department standards and regulations.
[4] Loading spaces shall be located near the entrance(s) to the building. If there is more than one entrance, the loading spaces should be evenly distributed among all entrances, as shown on the Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5, Site Plan.)

  1. b.
    Standards
    1. 1.
      Minimum Dimensions
      Each  loading space required  by this subsection shall be at least  12 feet wide by 25 feet long (or deep), with at least 14 feet of overhead clearance. Each off-street loading  space shall  have  adequate, unobstructed means for the  ingress and egress of vehicles (see Figure 30-5.A.10,  Loading Spaces).
Figure 30-5.A.10:  Loading Spaces
Diagram illustrating loading spaces
Loading zones shall be striped, landscaped, and located to the side or rear of a building, wherever possible.
  1.   
    1. 2.
      Berths or Loading Docks
      Except  in the  DT district,  buildings  required  to provide  three  or more  loading spaces or buildings with nonresidential uses on three or more floors shall provide a loading dock adjacent to a loading space.
    2. 3.
      Location
      Where  possible, loading areas shall be located to the rear of the use  they serve. In addition,  the  loading  area shall  be  located adjacent to the  building's  loading doors, in an area that promotes their practical  use.
    3. 4.
      Delineation of Loading Spaces
      All loading spaces shall be delineated by signage and striping and labeling of the pavement.
    4. 5.
      Access to a Street
      Every  loading  space shall  be  provided  with safe  and  convenient access to a street, but in no case shall the loading space extend into the required  aisle of the parking lot.
    5. 6.
      Paving
      The ground  surface of loading  spaces shall be paved with a durable, dust  free, and  hard  material,  such  as surface and  seal  treatment,  bituminous hot  mix, Portland cement, concrete, or some comparable material.  Such  paving shall be maintained for safe  and convenient use  at all times.
    6. 7.
      Landscaping
      Loading  spaces shall  be  screened around the  perimeter in accordance with Section  30-5.B.4.e, Screening.
    7. 8.
      Exterior Lighting
      Exterior  lighting for loading  areas shall  comply  with the  standards in Section 30-5.E,  Exterior Lighting.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 3.3, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, §§ 4, 5, 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2019-026, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2021-035, § 1, 10/25/2021)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.A.11. Off-Street Circulation

  1. a.
    Fire Lanes
    Where streets or right-of-way provide insufficient access for fire fighting, unobstructed fire lanes with a minimum  width complying  with the  current  adopted version  of the  North Carolina  State Fire Code  shall be provided  adjacent to a structure's primary entrance in accordance with  the  City's  fire  code.   In  no  instance shall  this  standard waive  the requirement for primary drive aisles constructed in accordance with Section  30-5.A.11.e, Primary Drive Aisles, when these drive aisles are required  by this Ordinance.
  2. b.
    Stacking Spaces for Drive-through and Related Uses
    In addition  to meeting the  off-street  parking  standards in Table  30-5.A.4.b,  Minimum Off-Street  Parking  Standards, uses with drive-through facilities and  other  auto-oriented uses where  vehicles queue up to access a service shall provide the minimum number of stacking/standing spaces  established in Table 30-5.A.11.a,  Required Stacking/Standing Spaces, and Figure 30-5.A.11.b, Stacking  Spaces:
Figure 30-5.A.11.b:  Stacking  Spaces
Diagram illustrating stacking spaces
Table 30-5.A.11.B: Required Stacking/Standing Spaces
USE OR ACTIVITY [1]MINIMUM NUMBER OF STACKING/STANDING SPACESMEASURED FROM
Automated teller machine3Teller machine
Automobile repair and service (all types)2 per bayBay entrance
Car wash, automatic3Bay entrance
Car wash, full service4Bay entrance
Car wash, self-service1 per bayBay entrance
Convenience store, with gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Day care center, child and adult3Building entrance
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service4 per laneAgent window
Financial institution, with drive-through service4 per laneTeller window
Gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Nursing home3Building entrance
Personal services with drive-through (e.g., laundry/dry-cleaning establishment,)4 per laneAgent window
Restaurant, with drive-though service5Order box
UnlistedStandards for uses not specifically listed shall be determined by the City Manager based on the standards for comparable uses and on the particular characteristics of the use, or alternatively, on a parking demand study submitted by the applicant.
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
Table 30-5.A.11.B: Required Stacking/Standing Spaces
USE OR ACTIVITY [1]MINIMUM NUMBER OF STACKING/STANDING SPACESMEASURED FROM
Automated teller machine3Teller machine
Automobile repair and service (all types)2 per bayBay entrance
Car wash, automatic3Bay entrance
Car wash, full service4Bay entrance
Car wash, self-service1 per bayBay entrance
Convenience store, with gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Day care center, child and adult3Building entrance
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service4 per laneAgent window
Financial institution, with drive-through service4 per laneTeller window
Gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Nursing home3Building entrance
Personal services with drive-through (e.g., laundry/dry-cleaning establishment,)4 per laneAgent window
Restaurant, with drive-though service5Order box
UnlistedStandards for uses not specifically listed shall be determined by the City Manager based on the standards for comparable uses and on the particular characteristics of the use, or alternatively, on a parking demand study submitted by the applicant.
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
Table 30-5.A.11.B: Required Stacking/Standing Spaces
USE OR ACTIVITY [1]MINIMUM NUMBER OF STACKING/STANDING SPACESMEASURED FROM
Automated teller machine3Teller machine
Automobile repair and service (all types)2 per bayBay entrance
Car wash, automatic3Bay entrance
Car wash, full service4Bay entrance
Car wash, self-service1 per bayBay entrance
Convenience store, with gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Day care center, child and adult3Building entrance
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service4 per laneAgent window
Financial institution, with drive-through service4 per laneTeller window
Gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Nursing home3Building entrance
Personal services with drive-through (e.g., laundry/dry-cleaning establishment,)4 per laneAgent window
Restaurant, with drive-though service5Order box
UnlistedStandards for uses not specifically listed shall be determined by the City Manager based on the standards for comparable uses and on the particular characteristics of the use, or alternatively, on a parking demand study submitted by the applicant.
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
Table 30-5.A.11.B: Required Stacking/Standing Spaces
USE OR ACTIVITY [1]MINIMUM NUMBER OF STACKING/STANDING SPACESMEASURED FROM
Automated teller machine3Teller machine
Automobile repair and service (all types)2 per bayBay entrance
Car wash, automatic3Bay entrance
Car wash, full service4Bay entrance
Car wash, self-service1 per bayBay entrance
Convenience store, with gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Day care center, child and adult3Building entrance
Drug store or pharmacy, with drive-through service4 per laneAgent window
Financial institution, with drive-through service4 per laneTeller window
Gas sales1Each end of the outermost gas pump island
Nursing home3Building entrance
Personal services with drive-through (e.g., laundry/dry-cleaning establishment,)4 per laneAgent window
Restaurant, with drive-though service5Order box
UnlistedStandards for uses not specifically listed shall be determined by the City Manager based on the standards for comparable uses and on the particular characteristics of the use, or alternatively, on a parking demand study submitted by the applicant.
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
  1. c.
    Stacking Lanes for Parking Lot Entrances
    Nonresidential uses shall provide stacking lanes between the edge of the street right-of-way and entrances into off-street parking areas in accordance with the minimum stacking lane distance established in Table 30-5.A.11.C, Stacking Lanes for Parking Lots, and Figure 30-5.A.11.c. Except in the Downtown (DT) district or if the site has two or more driveways.
Figure 30-5.A.11.c:  Parking Lot Entrances
Diagram illustrating parking lot entrances
 Stacking spaced along a parking lot entrance helps prevent vehicle conflicts and increases safety.
Table 30-5.A.11.c: Stacking Lanes for Parking Lots
NUMBER OF OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES [1]MINIMUM STACKING LANE DISTANCE (FEET) [2]
1—4935
50—24945
250—499100
500 or more100 feet + 15 feet for every additional 50 spaces beyond 500
NOTES:[1] Entrances into parking structures may be credited towards the stacking lane distance requirement provided the parking structure entrance is accessed from a development driveway and not a primary drive aisle.[2] Stacking lane distance is measured from the edge of the driveway apron adjacent to the street right-of-way along the centerline of the stacking lane to its intersection with the centerline of the drive aisle through the parking area.
Table 30-5.A.11.c: Stacking Lanes for Parking Lots
NUMBER OF OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES [1]MINIMUM STACKING LANE DISTANCE (FEET) [2]
1—4935
50—24945
250—499100
500 or more100 feet + 15 feet for every additional 50 spaces beyond 500
NOTES:[1] Entrances into parking structures may be credited towards the stacking lane distance requirement provided the parking structure entrance is accessed from a development driveway and not a primary drive aisle.[2] Stacking lane distance is measured from the edge of the driveway apron adjacent to the street right-of-way along the centerline of the stacking lane to its intersection with the centerline of the drive aisle through the parking area.
Table 30-5.A.11.c: Stacking Lanes for Parking Lots
NUMBER OF OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES [1]MINIMUM STACKING LANE DISTANCE (FEET) [2]
1—4935
50—24945
250—499100
500 or more100 feet + 15 feet for every additional 50 spaces beyond 500
NOTES:[1] Entrances into parking structures may be credited towards the stacking lane distance requirement provided the parking structure entrance is accessed from a development driveway and not a primary drive aisle.[2] Stacking lane distance is measured from the edge of the driveway apron adjacent to the street right-of-way along the centerline of the stacking lane to its intersection with the centerline of the drive aisle through the parking area.
Table 30-5.A.11.c: Stacking Lanes for Parking Lots
NUMBER OF OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES [1]MINIMUM STACKING LANE DISTANCE (FEET) [2]
1—4935
50—24945
250—499100
500 or more100 feet + 15 feet for every additional 50 spaces beyond 500
NOTES:[1] Entrances into parking structures may be credited towards the stacking lane distance requirement provided the parking structure entrance is accessed from a development driveway and not a primary drive aisle.[2] Stacking lane distance is measured from the edge of the driveway apron adjacent to the street right-of-way along the centerline of the stacking lane to its intersection with the centerline of the drive aisle through the parking area.
  1. d.
    Medians in Driveway Entrances
    Medians may be provided  within driveway entrances provided:
    1. 1.
      The median is surrounded by valley or other mountable curbing;
    2. 2.
      Planted material within the  median is limited to understory trees, shrubs, and ground cover; and
    3. 3.
      The minimum aisle width is maintained for each travel and turning lane.  The minimum width shall comply with the current adopted version of the North Carolina State Fire Code.
  2. e.
    Primary Drive Aisles
    Primary drive aisles within off-street surface parking lots with 500 or more spaces shall be designed to appear as an extension of the public street network extending from the public right-of-way along the full length of the primary façades of structures being served by the drive (see Figure 30-5.A.11.e, Primary Drive Aisles), and shall meet the following standards:
    1. 1.
      Primary drive aisles shall have  a maximum  cross section of 38 feet to serve two travel lanes and  accommodate parallel  parking  spaces along  both sides of the drive aisle in areas not needed for turning movements;
Figure 30-5.A.11.e: Primary Drive Aisles
Example of primary drive aisles
Primary drive aisles can be configured to appear as an extension of the City street network to promote greater pedestrian orientation and a higher quality of design.
  1.   
    1. 2.
      Primary drive aisles shall be striped  to designate parallel parking spaces, where appropriate, but in no case shall parallel parking spaces be designated within 60 feet of the primary building entrance(s);
    2. 3.
      Sidewalks meeting  or  exceeding  the  City's construction standards  shall  be provided  adjacent to the building's front façade; and
    3. 4.
      Street trees shall  be  provided  along  both  sides of  the  primary  drive  aisle  in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.a, Street Trees, although understory trees may be used adjacent to the building façade within 40 feet of building entrances.

(Ord. No. S2011-013, § 1.8, 11-28-2011; Ord. No. S2012-016, § 3.4, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-018, § 4.2, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2013-026, § 1, 11-18-2013; Ord. No. S2014-020, § 3a, 11-24-2014;Ord. No. S2019-027, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-031, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-057, § 1, 11/25/2019; Ord. No. S2025-017, § 1, 06/23/2025)

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.B.1. Purpose and Intent

It is the purpose of this section to promote and protect the public health, safety, and general welfare by establishing minimum requirements for the provision and maintenance of functionally adequate, attractive screening and buffering of structures, parking areas, driveways, and other facilities and land uses, while providing standards for the protection of existing and new trees and vegetation and their root zones. The intent of this section is to promote this purpose by:

  1. Recognizing the importance of trees to the visual and natural environments in the City;
  2. Protecting and retaining existing tree canopy and specimen trees during and after development;
  3. Ensuring and encouraging the planting, maintenance, restoration and survival of trees, shrubs, and other plants;
  4. Contributing to the protection of community residents and visitors from personal injury and property damage, and the protection of the City from property damage, caused or threatened by the improper planting, maintenance or removal of trees, shrubs or other plants;
  5. Mitigating against erosion and sedimentation;
  6. Reducing stormwater runoff and the costs associated therewith;
  7. Encouraging low impact development techniques like bio-retention and other best management practices for dealing with stormwater;
  8. Preserving and protecting the water table and surface waters;
  9. Restoring soils and land denuded as a result of construction and/or grading;
  10. Increasing the tree canopy to provide shade and moderate the effect of urban heat islands;
  11. Providing incentives for greater use of sustainable development practices like green roofs, use of native plant materials, and techniques to reduce the need for irrigation;
  12. Protecting and enhancing property values and aesthetic qualities;
  13. Providing additional improvements to air quality through the carbon dioxide uptake process provided by trees and landscaping; and
  14. Providing visual screening, where appropriate.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012)

*Editor’s note—Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, adopted September 10, 2012, amended Section B, in its entirety, to read as herein set out in sections 1—8. Prior to inclusion of said ordinance, Section B pertained to similar subject matter. See also the Code Comparative Table.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.B.2. Applicability

  1. a.
    General
    Except where expressly exempted, these standards shall apply to all development in the City except as described in Section 30-7.F for properties two acres or less.
  2. b.
    Review for Compliance
    Review for compliance with the standards of this section shall occur during review of an application for a Clear-Cutting Permit (Section 30-2.C.9), Site Plan (Section 30-2.C.5), Planned Development (Section 30-2.C.3), Subdivision Plan (Section 30-2.C.6.d), Building Permit (Section [@@9372]), or Temporary Use Permit (Section 30-2.C.10), as appropriate. Failure to comply with the standards in this section is a violation of this Ordinance, subject to the remedies and penalties in this section and Article 30-8: Enforcement.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2020-004, § 1, 06/22/2020; Ord. No. S2023-009, § 1, 03/23/2023)

Effective on: 6/22/2020

30-5.B.3. General Requirements

  1. a.
    PreApplication Meeting and Tree Protection Plan
    It is important to identify any characteristics of a site that make it special. Added value to the resulting design may be achieved by identifying and considering these attributes prior to the advancement of the development plans.
    Wooded sites provide distinct aesthetic, economic and environmental significance and value as a natural resource of the City. Existing vegetation plays a critical role in maintaining aesthetics, water quality, minimizing erosion and downstream flooding, and increasing quality of life as well as reducing site development cost to replant and restore a portion of what was unknowingly removed. Critical to the satisfaction of this portion of the UDO is the identification of existing trees as a resource feature.
    1. 1.
      Prior to plan development and submittal, the applicant shall meet with the City and provide the City with a graphic depiction on an aerial map illustrating the existing tree canopy and potential areas for preservation of existing healthy trees with good form. Knowing the location and size of significant trees on the development site facilitates a common understanding of what options and incentives are available to preserve trees and improve the appearance of the proposed development while meeting the development goals of the applicant.
    2. 2.
      The applicant shall also provide information on the location and species of any trees having a DBH of 30 inches or greater which may currently exist on the site. Potential opportunities for tree preservation will be discussed. Tree preservation is to be determined in conjunction with the City's input.
    3. 3.
      Once determined, the applicant shall indicate the location of the tree protection zones on the development plans. Tree protection areas based on the trees' critical root zones shall be noted and drawn to scale on demolition, grading and erosion control, and landscaping plans. The general type, size and nature of the existing trees to be saved and credited toward landscaping requirements shall be included as a table, as well as being graphically illustrated (see Section 30-5.B.6, Tree Preservation and Section 30-5.B.8, Tree Preservation During Construction).
    4. 4.
      Tree save areas must be described by metes and bounds on the recorded plat, individual recorded deeds, and all property association documents for land held in common.
  2. b.
    Landscape Plan
    1. 1.
      To ensure compliance with the standards of this section, a landscape plan demonstrating how landscaping will be planted on a development site shall be included as a part of any development application.
    2. 2.
      In the event of phased development, a landscape plan shall be required for each distinct phase of the development, and shall depict landscaping associated with the particular phase of development.
    3. 3.
      The landscape plan should be prepared by a professional, knowledgeable about plant material and design. Please refer to the City's landscaping guidelines for additional guidance on what is to be included on the landscape plan.
  3. c.
    Coordination with Stormwater Requirements
    When required stormwater management facilities are enhanced as a site amenity they may qualify as a portion of the required open space. Determination of credit shall be at the discretion of the city manager in accordance with the provisions of Section 30-5.C.3.b.6.
  4. d.
    Coordination with Site Lighting
    Coordination is required so that site lighting is located an appropriate distance from trees to minimize future conflict (see Section 30-5.E.5.d).
  5. e.
    Planting Standards
    1. 1.
      Existing Vegetation
      Existing healthy, well-formed canopy and/or understory trees as well as healthy shrubs may be credited toward the requirements of this section, provided the vegetation meets or exceeds the minimum size standards and is protected before and during development of the site and maintained thereafter in a healthy growing condition (see Section 30-5.B.7, Tree Preservation Incentives).
      1. a.
        The property owner must include in a tree survey (see Section 30-5.B.6.d, Tree Survey) all existing trees four-inch caliper or greater proposed to be saved to satisfy a portion of the planting requirements. A tree survey is otherwise not required.
      2. b.
        Only healthy trees free of invasive species that have been protected during the entire development period, beginning prior to the commencement of site work and continuing through to issuance of the certificate of occupancy in accordance with approved tree protection requirements may satisfy these planting requirements.
      3. c.
        Preserved vegetation is to be maintained thereafter in a healthy growing condition free of invasive plant species.
      4. d.
        If the minimum protection standards are not met, or if trees are observed by the City to be injured or threatened, the vegetation may be deemed ineligible for meeting these requirements.
      5. e.
        Where existing vegetation is used in buffer yards, supplemental plantings may be required, if the existing vegetation does not provide the same effect that a planted buffer would after five years of normal growth.
    2. 2.
      New Plantings
      The City shall maintain and make available, a list of recommended plant material hardy to the Fayetteville area and a plant list maintained by PWC for materials suitable for planting under power lines. Plant material not on the list may be approved by the City and the utility provider on a case-by-case basis. In the absence of a list for the City, the list published by the North Carolina Cooperative Extension Service shall serve as the list of recommended trees. Plantings shall comply with the following standards (see Figure 30-5.B.3.e.2, Minimum Planting Standards for New Plantings, below):
      Figure 30-5.B.3.e.2: Minimum Planting Standards for New Plantings
      Diagram illustrating minimum planting standards
      New plantings, and existing vegetation proposed for credit towards the landscape requirements, must comply with the minimum.
      1. a.
        Deciduous canopy trees shall be a minimum of two inches in caliper at the time of planting, as determined in the American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1-2004, as amended, and shall be a minimum of eight feet in height above ground level at the time of planting.
      2. b.
        Understory or ornamental trees shall have a caliper of one and-one-half inches at time of planting, as determined in the American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1-2004, as amended, and shall be a minimum of eight feet in height above ground level at the time of planting.
      3. c.
        Evergreen trees, except Longleaf Pines, shall be a minimum of six feet in height at the time of planting. Longleaf Pines shall be a minimum of three feet in height at time of planting.
      4. d.
        At least 50 percent of the shrubs shall be a minimum five-gallon container size at time of planting. Deciduous shrubs, which are upright in nature shall be a minimum of 24 inches in height at the time of planting, and evergreen shrubs shall be a minimum of 18 inches in height at the time of planting.
      5. e.
        In cases where application of the requirements in this subsection result in a fraction in the number of shrubs to be provided, the minimum number of shrubs or trees to be provided shall be rounded upwards to the next highest whole number.
      6. f.
        All landscape plant materials shall conform to the latest version of the American Standard of Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1, as amended). Plant material shall be of specimen quality or better, true to name and type of species or variety.
      7. g.
        The use of native, drought tolerant vegetation is encouraged to reduce dependency upon irrigation. Fifty percent of all new trees planted shall be native.
      8. h.
        To curtail the spread of disease or insect infestation in a plant species, and to add interest to the landscape, species variety shall be in proportion to the number of trees and shrubs planted. Nothing in this subsection shall be construed so as to prevent the utilization of a larger number of different species than specified in Table 30-5.B.3.e.2.h, Species Variety, below:
Table 30-5.B.3.e.2.h: Species Variety
REQUIRED NUMBER OF TREES OR SHRUBSMINIMUM NUMBER OF SPECIES
1—101
11—202
21—303
31+4
  1.   
    1.   
      1. i.
        All planting materials shall correspond to the City's approved species list, unless alternative materials are proposed as part of an Alternative Landscape Plan (Section 30-5.B.4.f).
  1.   
    1. 3.
      Minimum Planting Area
      Based on arboricultural research, a canopy tree requires an absolute minimum soil volume of 400 to 600 cubic feet for it to be able to approach its normal size at maturity. This equates to 274 square feet of area (measured from back of curb to back of curb), with amended soils 18 to 24 inches in depth. An understory tree may be planted in 180 square feet of area. Any planting area bounded by an impervious surface shall be at least ten feet wide when planted with canopy trees, or seven feet wide when planted with understory trees.
    2. 4.
      Suitable Backfill
      All gravel, concrete and construction debris shall be removed from planting areas to a depth of 18 to 24 inches. Prior to backfill, areas shall be checked to ensure that they drain properly. Areas shall be backfilled with amended soil or topsoil meeting the requirements included in the City's landscaping guidelines, prior to planting.
    3. 5.
      Stabilization
      1. a.
        All landscape planting areas shall be stabilized and maintained with ground covers, mulches, or other approved materials to prevent soil erosion and allow rainwater infiltration.
      2. b.
        Groundcover located within three feet of a building base shall comply with applicable State of North Carolina Fire Codes.
    4. 6.
      Berms
      All berms shall comply with the following design standards:
      1. a.
        The slope of all berms shall not exceed a three-to-one (3:1) ratio (horizontal to vertical), shall have a top width at least one-half the berm height, and a maximum height of eight feet above the toe of the berm.
      2. b.
        All berms, regardless of size, shall be stabilized with a ground cover or other suitable vegetation.
      3. c.
        Berms proposed to be placed along street right-of-way shall be designed and constructed to provide adequate sight distances at intersections and along the street.
      4. d.
        Berms shall not be located within the critical root zone of any existing healthy vegetation designated to be preserved.
    5. 7.
      Limitations on Landscaping Placement
      1. a.
        Within Easements
        1. 1.
          No trees shall be planted within water and sewer easements. Nothing except groundcover and approved shrubs (maximum height of 42") shall be planted or installed within any underground or overhead utility, drainage, or gas easement, without the prior written consent of the utility provider, the City, or as provided for by the applicable easement agreement. Minimum clear separation distances required by the current adopted version of the North Carolina Fire Code shall be maintained for any fire protection system. Access to manholes, meter boxes, and similar features shall be maintained.
        2. 2.
          Where required landscaping material is damaged or removed due to utility activity within an easement, the landowner shall be responsible for replanting all damaged or removed vegetation necessary to ensure required landscaping meets the standards in this Article.
      2. b.
        Near Functional Fire Protection
        Nothing except groundcover shall be planted or installed within three feet of a fire protection system without the prior written consent of the City. Under no circumstances shall plantings violate the State of North Carolina Fire Code.
      3. c.
        Utility-Owned Facilities
        1. 1.
          Nothing except groundcover shall be planted or installed within five feet of an underground meter, without the prior written consent of the utility owner.
        2. 2.
          Nothing except groundcover and approved shrubs shall be planted or installed within ten feet of water and sewer main lines, without the prior written consent of the utility owner.
      4. d.
        Beneath Overhead Utilities
        Canopy trees shall not be planted beneath or adjacent to above ground and/or overhead facilities. Understory trees or other landscaping may be planted beneath or adjacent to above ground and/or overhead utilities with prior consent from the utility owner, easement holder, or as provided for by the applicable easement agreement.
      5. e.
        Change of Use and Expansion
        Any additions or expansions shall meet the requirements of Section 30-7.F, Nonconforming Sites.
      6. f.
        Sight Distance Triangle Protection
        Landscaping shall not obstruct the view of motorists using any street, private driveway, parking aisles, or the approach to any street intersection so as to constitute a traffic hazard and shall be in compliance with the sight triangle visibility standards located in Section 30-5.F.4.c.
    6. 8.
      Time for Installation of Required Landscaping
      1. a.
        Time Limit
        All required landscaping (including mulching and seeding) shall be installed in accordance with the required planting standards set forth in this section prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy unless the City Manager grants an extension to this time limit in accordance with Section 30-5.B.3.e.8.b, Extensions, below.
      2. b.
        Extensions
        1. 1.
          The City Manager may, for good cause shown, grant one or more extensions of up to 90 days each from the date a Certificate of Occupancy is issued to install required landscaping. Circumstances that may warrant an extension include, but are not limited to, the following:
          1. A.
            Unusual environmental conditions, such as drought, ice, or oversaturated soil (deep mud);
          2. B.
            It is not yet the appropriate planting season for the approved plant species;
          3. C.
            Credible evidence that the approved plant species or required plant sizes are not commercially available and cannot be substituted within a reasonable time despite an applicant's diligent effort to secure the required materials; or
          4. D.
            Completion of utility work occurring in a proposed landscaped area is incomplete or delayed.
        2. 2.
          No extension to the time limit shall be granted unless a performance guarantee in accordance with the requirements in Section 30-6.C, Performance and Maintenance Guarantees, is in place to ensure that all required landscaping installation will be completed at a predetermined later date.
      3. c.
        Multi-Phase Development
        Multi-phase development shall only be required to provide the landscaping directly associated with development in the active phase(s).
    7. 9.
      Maintenance of Landscaping Materials
      The owner shall be responsible for the maintenance of all landscape areas not in the public right-of-way. Such areas shall be maintained in accordance with the approved Landscape Plan or Alternative Landscape Plan and shall present a healthy and orderly appearance free from refuse and debris. All plant life shown on an approved Landscape Plan or Alternative Landscape Plan shall be replaced in compliance with the minimum standards of this section, if it dies, is seriously damaged, or removed. This section is not intended to prevent normal, routine maintenance.
      1. a.
        Damage Due to Natural Occurrence
        In the event that any vegetation or physical element functioning to meet the standards of this section is severely damaged due to an unusual weather occurrence or natural catastrophe, or other natural occurrence such as damage by wild or domestic animals, the owner or developer may be required to replant if the landscaping standards are not being met. The owner shall have one growing season to replace or replant. The City Manager shall consider the type and location of the landscape buffer or required vegetation area as well as the propensity for natural revegetation in making a determination on the extent of replanting requirements.
      2. b.
        Protection During Operations
        The owner or developer shall take actions to protect trees and landscaping from unnecessary damage during all facility and site maintenance operations. Plants shall be maintained in a way that does not obstruct sight distances at roadway and drive intersections, obstruct traffic signs or devices, or interfere with the use of sidewalks or pedestrian trails.
      3. c.
        Prohibition Against Severe Tree Pruning
        All required trees (whether canopy or understory) shall be maintained in their characteristic natural shape, and shall not be severely pruned, sheared, topped, or shaped as shrubs. Trees (including, but not limited to Crape Myrtles) that have been severely pruned, sheared, topped, shaped as shrubs, such that they no longer serve the intended buffering or screening function, shall be considered as damaged vegetation in need of replacement in accordance with Section 30-5.B.3.e.9.a, Damage Due to Natural Occurrence, and shall be replaced within one growing season.
      4. d.
        Removal of Invasive Species
        Regular maintenance shall include regular removal of invasive plant species. For purposes of this section, invasive plant species are considered removed if they are no longer living in the tree canopy. Subsequent property owners are required to maintain this condition for compliance with the chapter.
      5. e.
        Natural Death
        The natural death of existing vegetation within any required landscape area does not necessarily constitute a violation and does not require re-vegetation to replace the plant material unless the required landscape area no longer complies with the standards of this section. In no instance shall this provision be construed to prevent re-planting if, in the opinion of the City Manager, the required performance standard of the landscaping is not being met.
    8. 10.
      Monitoring of Compliance with Landscaping Standards
      1. a.
        Inspections Prior to Certificate of Occupancy
        The City Manager shall inspect the site prior to the issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy for the development and such Certificate shall not be issued if the landscaping required under this section is not living or healthy, is not installed in accordance with the approved Landscape Plan or Alternative Landscape Plan and the standards in this section, or is not subject to an extension granted in accordance with Section 30-5.B.3.e.8.b, Extensions.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-017, § 4, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, §§ 3.1—3.6, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2014-004, § 1, 1-13-2014; Ord. No. S2019-028, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-032, 1, 04/23/2019)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.B.4. Landscaping Requirements

  1. a.
    Street Trees
    Street trees shall be required to serve all development in the City in accordance with the following:
    1. 1.
      Where Required
      Except where exempted in (b) below, street trees shall be required along both sides of all streets.
    2. 2.
      Exemptions
      Street trees shall not be required for:
      1. a.
        Agricultural uses in the AR district, except when agricultural land is subdivided for new residential development; or
      2. b.
        Single-family lots, provided each lot includes one or more canopy trees between the dwelling and the right-of-way. Spacing shall be in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.a.5, Maximum On Center Spacing, below. Existing healthy, well-formed trees located within 20 feet of the back of curb may be credited toward the requirement of this section, provided the trees meet the requirements of Section 30-5.B.7.a, Tree Preservation Credits and are adequately protected during construction (see Section 30-5.B.8, Tree Protection During Construction).
    3. 3.
      Location
      1. a.
        Except where authorized by an Alternative Landscape Plan (see Section 30-5.B.4.f), or indicated in the Engineering and Infrastructure Department's approved cross section diagrams for utility installations, all street trees shall be planted between the back of the curb and the sidewalk.
      2. b.
        In cases where street trees cannot be planted between the curb and the sidewalk, applicants shall contact the City Engineering and Infrastructure Department for utility installation cross sections which depict approved street tree locations in the public right-of-way.
      3. c.
        Street trees shall be located to avoid utilities (both overhead and underground), in accordance with the utility's requirements for clearance, unless specific written consent from the utility owner is provided.
    4. 4.
      Configuration
      1. a.
        Street trees shall be canopy trees except beneath overhead utilities or other projections into the public right-of-way, where understory trees shall be used instead.
      2. b.
        In locations directly under overhead utility lines, two understory trees may be substituted for each required canopy tree.
      3. c.
        Within the DT-1 district, other urban areas, or redevelopment areas, street trees may be located within reduced planting strips or tree pits with irrigation and drainage systems or as part of an adopted streetscape master plan. Tree pits may be located adjacent to the back of the curb.
      4. d.
        All trees planted along NCDOT right-of-way shall conform to NCDOT guidelines.
    5. 5.
      Maximum On-Center Spacing
      1. a.
        Understory trees shall be spaced between 15 to 25 feet on center, depending upon the species size at maturity.
      2. b.
        Canopy trees shall be spaced between 25 to 40 feet on center, depending upon the species size at maturity.
      3. c.
        Wherever possible, small and medium trees shall be placed between large trees to accommodate the canopy growth of large trees over time.
      4. d.
        Alternative layout may be considered through the Alternative Landscape Plan procedure in Section 30-5.B.4.f.
  2. b.
    Site and Building Landscaping
    Site and building landscaping material is intended to soften the visual impact of the building base and provide for the even dispersal of trees and other plantings across a development site.
    1. 1.
      Standards
      Except for substations and lift stations, single-family detached dwellings and properties in the Downtown (DT) district, site and building landscaping shall be required for all development, and shall be supplied in the amounts identified in Table 30-5.B.4.b, Required Site Landscaping Plantings, below, and Figure 30-5.B.4.b, Site and Building Landscaping Placement. Site landscaping shall meet the minimum size standards for new planting specified in Section 30-5.B.3.e, Planting Standards.
Table 30-5.B.4.b: Required Site & Landscaping Plantings
TYPE OF USE [1]REQUIRED PLANTINGS PER SITE [2]
Detached single-family residential usesExempt from the requirements of this Section 30-5.4.b, Site & Building Landscaping.
Other household living uses; group living usesFour canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
All other usesTwo canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre, + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[2] At least one-half of the required shrubs shall be of an evergreen variety.
[3] Understory trees may be substituted for up to 50 percent of the required number of shrubs at thesubstitution rate of one understory tree for three shrubs.
Table 30-5.B.4.b: Required Site & Landscaping Plantings
TYPE OF USE [1]REQUIRED PLANTINGS PER SITE [2]
Detached single-family residential usesExempt from the requirements of this Section 30-5.4.b, Site & Building Landscaping.
Other household living uses; group living usesFour canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
All other usesTwo canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre, + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[2] At least one-half of the required shrubs shall be of an evergreen variety.
[3] Understory trees may be substituted for up to 50 percent of the required number of shrubs at thesubstitution rate of one understory tree for three shrubs.
Table 30-5.B.4.b: Required Site & Landscaping Plantings
TYPE OF USE [1]REQUIRED PLANTINGS PER SITE [2]
Detached single-family residential usesExempt from the requirements of this Section 30-5.4.b, Site & Building Landscaping.
Other household living uses; group living usesFour canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
All other usesTwo canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre, + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[2] At least one-half of the required shrubs shall be of an evergreen variety.
[3] Understory trees may be substituted for up to 50 percent of the required number of shrubs at thesubstitution rate of one understory tree for three shrubs.
Table 30-5.B.4.b: Required Site & Landscaping Plantings
TYPE OF USE [1]REQUIRED PLANTINGS PER SITE [2]
Detached single-family residential usesExempt from the requirements of this Section 30-5.4.b, Site & Building Landscaping.
Other household living uses; group living usesFour canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
All other usesTwo canopy trees (including at least one evergreen tree) per acre, + at least one shrub per each five feet of outer building perimeter
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[2] At least one-half of the required shrubs shall be of an evergreen variety.
[3] Understory trees may be substituted for up to 50 percent of the required number of shrubs at thesubstitution rate of one understory tree for three shrubs.
  1.   
    1. 2.
      Location
      Required shrubs shall be planted around the building perimeter, with emphasis placed on building bases visible from the public right-of-way. Required shrubs may be planted within a five-foot planting strip adjacent to the building or up to 15 feet from the building provided there is a sidewalk located between the planting area and the building wall. Fifty percent of the required shrubbery may be dispersed around the site. The linear perimeter footage is exclusive of docks, bays and pedestrian entrances up to 50 percent of the total perimeter linear footage.
Figure 30-5.B.4.b: Site and Building Landscaping Placement
Diagram illustrating site and building landscaping placement
Site landscaping includes foundation plantings and trees dispersed across a development site.
  1. c.
    Vehicular Use Area Landscaping
    All vehicular use areas shall include landscaping, both within the interior of the vehicular use area and around its perimeter (see Figure 30-5.B.4.c, Vehicular Use Area Landscaping), as a means of mitigating the parking area's microclimate and visual impacts.
    1. 1.
      Purpose and Intent
      It is the intent of this section to visually modify the appearance and break the blight created by large expanses of vehicular use areas; filter and reduce the glare of reflected sunlight from parked automobiles onto adjacent properties and the public street right-of-way; separate the public from the ill effects of fumes and dust; and provide shade, noise attenuation, and filtering of the air of particulate and gaseous pollutants.
    2. 2.
      Applicability
      These standards shall apply to all development in the City with on-site vehicular use areas, except single-family detached, and duplex, triplex or quadraplex dwellings on a single lot.
    3. 3.
      Interior Vehicular Use Area Landscaping Standards

      All parking areas with 12 or more spaces shall provide and maintain landscaping areas within the interior of the parking lot in accordance with the standards in this subsection. These standards shall not apply to parking structures or automotive sales or display lots.

Figure 30-5.B.4.c: Vehicular Use Area Landscaping
Diagram illustrating vehicular use area landscaping
  1.   
    1.   
      1. a.
        Landscaped planting areas shall be distributed throughout the parking area for the purpose of heat abatement.
      2. b.
        All rows of interior parking shall be terminated by a tree planted within a landscape island. Perimeter parking detailed in subparagraph c. does not require a landscape tree.
      3. c.
        One tree shall be required for every 12 parking spaces. All vehicular parking spaces must have at least one canopy tree within 60 feet of each parking space, or one understory tree within 30 feet. Trees planted within perimeter vehicular use landscaping strips may be used to satisfy this requirement.
      4. d.
        At least 50 percent of all trees required by this section shall be canopy trees.
      5. e.
        Each planting area shall contain sufficient area and backfill soil to accommodate the root growth of the plant material used as discussed in the General Requirements in Section 30-5.B.3.e.3.
      6. f.
        When a pedestrian pathway median (see Section 30-5.A.11.f, Pedestrian Pathways) is widened to accommodate trees and the minimum planting area referenced in Section 30-5.B.3.e.3 is observed, the adjacent tree islands that would otherwise be required every 12 parking spaces (see Section 30-5.B.4.c.3.c, above), may be eliminated in this area. Other requirements of this section still apply.
      7. g.
        All planting areas shall be protected from vehicle damage by the installation of curbing, wheel stops, or other comparable methods. The size of the planting area, size of plant material at maturity, and placement of plant material shall allow for a two-and-one-half-foot bumper overhang from the face of the curb when wheel stops are not used. This standard shall not prohibit the use of planting areas as stormwater management devices.
      8. h.
        For expansion or renovation projects where the application of these requirements is infeasible or unworkable, the applicant may propose an alternative landscape plan as outlined in Section 30-5.B.4.f, Alternative Landscape Plan.

(Ord. No. S2013-026, § 1, 11-18-2013)

  1.   
    1. 4.
      Perimeter Vehicular Use Area Landscaping Strips
      Vehicular use areas shall be separated and screened from all adjoining properties by a landscape strip.
      1. a.
        Continuous Visual Screen in Non-Residential Areas
        Commercial (non-residential) vehicular use areas shall be separated from adjoining commercial properties with a minimum five foot wide landscape strip. When head-in parking adjacent to the property line includes wheel stops, the minimum width of the landscape strip is reduced to three feet. The landscape strip shall be planted with a continuous visual screen of evergreen shrubs along the property line, with a minimum height of 24 inches at the time of planting. Required sight clearances at driveways and near intersections shall not be subject to this requirement. When a parking lot will be consolidated with an adjacent parcel, the landscaping strip may be eliminated (see Section 30-5.B.4c.4.c, below).
      2. b.
        Adjacent to Off-Street Surface Parking on Other Lots
        Parking lots should be consolidated and circulation systematized when possible with more creative and effective landscaping, pedestrian circulation, and lighting, rather than having a series of smaller-sized parking lots divided by arbitrary lots lines with landscaped buffers. To this end, the vehicular use area landscape strip may be eliminated when the proposed parking lot will be combined with an existing or future adjoining parking lot. A recorded Cross Parking Agreement between the cooperating parties is required to provide non-exclusive access (for vehicles and pedestrians) to driveways, maneuvering areas, parking areas, and so on.
      3. c.
        Credit Towards Property Perimeter Landscape Buffer Requirements
        Perimeter landscape strips associated with a vehicular use area may be credited towards perimeter buffer standards (see Section 30-5.B.4.d, below), provided the minimum applicable buffer standards are met, and provided the vehicular use area perimeter landscaping is within the area to be occupied by the property perimeter landscape buffer.
      4. d.
        Parking Lot Entrance Aisles and Stacking Lanes
        Driveways into parking areas shall include a landscape strip at least ten feet wide along each side of the driveway. At a minimum, the driveway landscape strip shall include one canopy tree for every 25 to 40 linear feet of drive or one understory tree for every 15 to 25 linear feet of drive. A minimum of one shrub shall be planted for every five linear feet of driveway entrance. Plant material may be grouped as an entrance feature rather than planted as a linear border.
    2. 5.
      Street Yard Buffer
      1. a.
        Purpose and Intent
        The purpose of the street yard buffer is to enhance the streetscape and public environment by abating glare and moderating temperatures of impervious areas; filtering air of fumes and dust; providing shade; attenuating noise; and reducing the visual impact of large expanses of pavement through the provision of a visually modifying screen of plants. The intent is to provide at a minimum an opaque buffer at the ground level up to three feet, with open views available through and between taller plant material. Existing vegetation should be used to satisfy these planting requirements where possible.
      2. b.
        Applicability
        A street yard buffer shall be required for all vehicular use areas that are established within 50 feet of any street right-of-way (including controlled access highways) unless separated by an intervening building. When buildings are moved up to the street, the street yard requirement is eliminated.
      3. c.
        Minimum Requirements
        The depth of the street yard varies, based upon the size of the adjacent parking lot as described below:
Table 30-5.B.4.c.5.c: Street Yard Buffer Requirements
Street Yard DepthApplicationMaterials
A mix of species may be used to create visual interest and diversity
5 FeetDowntown (DT-1) Zoning District with < 70 feet of street frontageContinuous evergreen hedge planted with min. 24 inch height above grade at time of planting
10 FeetDowntown (DT-1) Zoning District with > 70 feet of street frontage;Constrained Redevelopment Sites; Automobile Sales or Display LotsContinuous evergreen hedge planted with min. 24 inch height above grade at time of planting + canopy trees spaced 25 to 40 feet apart or understory trees 15 to 25 feet apart, depending upon mature size of species
15 Feet1-2 rows of parking [one bay] or pavement with a depth less than 70 feet35 shrubs per 100 linear feet (75 percent evergreen) + 3 canopy trees and 1 understory tree per 100 linear feet
25 Feet>2 rows of parking [one bay] or pavement with a depth more than 70 feet55 shrubs per 100 linear feet (75 percent evergreen) + 5 canopy trees and 3 understory trees per 100 linear feet
      1. d.
        Alternative Option for Constrained Sites - Garden Walls
        Masonry garden walls may be constructed on constrained sites in lieu of the vegetated street yard buffer (described above in Table 30-5.B.4.c.5.c) as determined by the city manager. DOT approval may also be required. The garden wall option is particularly well-suited in the Downtown and Hospital Overlay Districts as well for redevelopment sites. Such walls shall comply with the design standards established below.
Table 30-5.B.4.c.5.d. Garden Wall Design Standards
WIDTH OF STREET FRONTAGEDESIGN STANDARDS

<70 feet of street frontage

  • Height & Opacity- Opaque at the ground level up to a minimum height of 32 inches; Maximum height of 48 inches. Height above 32 inches may be ornamental or semi-opaque. Pillars and posts may extend up to six inches beyond top of wall. (Adjacent grade to be considered so that screening is achieved.)
  • No supplemental vegetation required.
  • No jogs or offsets required.
  • No setback required from street right-of-way/property line.
  • Column spacing a maximum of every 20 feet and at terminii.
  • If angled or 90 degree parking is adjacent to the wall, must include wheel stops or sufficient space between curb and wall for bumper overhang.

70+ feet of street frontage

  • Height & Opacity- Opaque at the ground level up to a minimum height of 32 inches; Maximum height of 48 inches. Height above 32 inches may be ornamental or semi-opaque. Pillars and posts may extend up to six inches beyond top of wall. (Adjacent grade to be considered so that screening is achieved.)
  • If aligned with building façade, minimum five foot planting strip on the street side of the wall, planted with a variety of low shrubbery.
  • If not aligned with a building façade, minimum three foot planting strip on the street side of the wall with five foot jogs or offsets required every 40 feet, planted with a variety of vegetation including understory trees. Each offset shall have a minimum width of ten feet.
  • Column spacing a maximum of every 20 feet and at terminii.
  • If angled or 90 degree parking is adjacent to the wall, must include wheel stops or sufficient space between curb and wall for bumper overhang.
Figure 30-5.B.4.c.5.d: Garden Wall Example
Example of masonry garden walls
Masonry garden walls may be constructed on constrained sites in lieu of the vegetated street yard buffer described in Table 30-5.B.4.c.5.c.
  1. d.
    Property Perimeter Landscape Buffers
    1. 1.
      Purpose and Intent
      Perimeter landscape buffers are intended to mitigate potential negative effects of contiguous uses in differing zoning districts by protecting and preserving the appearance, character and value of property within the City. The objective is to exclude visual contact, create spatial separation and to minimize any adverse impacts on adjacent properties. Where topographical changes, the size and shape of existing lots of record, or other spatial considerations exist which would make adherence to the basic requirement either impossible or ineffective in meeting the purpose of the buffer yard, alternate buffer yard plans will be considered or may be required.
    2. 2.
      Applicability
      All development shall provide a property perimeter landscape buffer at the edge of the development to separate it from differently-zoned adjacent property in accordance with Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Buffer Types, and Table 30-5.B.4.d.5, Buffer Type Application.
    3. 3.
      Use of Existing Trees
      Existing healthy, well-formed trees located at the property perimeter shall remain undisturbed (except for the removal of dead wood and invasive vines) and may be credited toward the requirement of this section, in accordance with Section 30-5.B.7.a, Tree Preservation Credits. Additional trees and shrubs may be required to bring the natural buffer up to the full perimeter buffer requirements.
    4. 4.
      Types of Buffers
      Table 30-5.B.4.D.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types, describes different buffering options in terms of their function, opacity, width, and planting requirements. Where a particular buffer type is required in Table 30-5.B.4.D.5, Buffer Type Applications, the requirement may be met with the combination of minimum buffer width and minimum screening requirements specified under either Option 1 or Option 2. Trees and shrubs within a 25-foot wide buffer shall be spread in a staggered, off-set pattern to establish a full and opaque buffer. Where an option utilizing a berm or fence is selected, the berm or fence shall comply with the standards of Section 30-5.B.3.e.6, Berms, or Section 30-5.D, Fences and Walls, as appropriate. All exposed areas of soil within the buffer area must be covered with mulch, groundcover vegetation, or grass.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.4: Property Perimeter Buffer Types
BUFFER TYPE AND CONFIGURATIONDESCRIPTIONMINIMUM SCREENING REQUIREMENTS WITHIN PERIMETER BUFFER
OPTION 1: MINIMUM
FEET [1][2]
OPTION 2: MINIMUM WIDTH 10
FEET [1][2]
TYPE A: BASIC
Example of buffer type AThis perimeter buffer functions as a basic edge demarcating individual properties with a slight visual obstruction from the ground to a height of ten feet.Three canopy trees + three understory trees per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per
100 linear feet
TYPE B: AESTHETIC
Example of buffer type BThis perimeter buffer functions as an intermittent visual obstruction from the ground to a height of at least 20 feet and creates the impression eliminating visual contact between uses.Four canopy trees + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + seven understory trees + 35 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE C: SEMI-OPAQUE
Example of buffer type CThis perimeter buffer functions as a semi-opaque screen from the ground to at least a height of six feet.Six canopy trees + seven understory trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 4-foot-high berm or one 4-foot-high solid fence + two canopy trees + eight understory trees + 10 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE D: OPAQUE
Example of buffer type DThis perimeter buffer functions as an opaque screen from the ground to a height of at least six feet. This type of buffer prevents visual contact between uses and creates a strong impression of total separation.Nine canopy trees + ten understory trees + 55 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 6-foot-high solid fence + six canopy trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feet
NOTES:
[1] Any required perimeter buffer width can be reduced to five feet with the provision of a solid masonry wall six feet in height, along with ten shrubs per every 100 linear feet located outside the wall.
[2] Perimeter buffer widths (but not vegetation amounts) may be reduced in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.f, Alternative Landscape Plan.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.4: Property Perimeter Buffer Types
BUFFER TYPE AND CONFIGURATIONDESCRIPTIONMINIMUM SCREENING REQUIREMENTS WITHIN PERIMETER BUFFER
OPTION 1: MINIMUM
FEET [1][2]
OPTION 2: MINIMUM WIDTH 10
FEET [1][2]
TYPE A: BASIC
Example of buffer type AThis perimeter buffer functions as a basic edge demarcating individual properties with a slight visual obstruction from the ground to a height of ten feet.Three canopy trees + three understory trees per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per
100 linear feet
TYPE B: AESTHETIC
Example of buffer type BThis perimeter buffer functions as an intermittent visual obstruction from the ground to a height of at least 20 feet and creates the impression eliminating visual contact between uses.Four canopy trees + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + seven understory trees + 35 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE C: SEMI-OPAQUE
Example of buffer type CThis perimeter buffer functions as a semi-opaque screen from the ground to at least a height of six feet.Six canopy trees + seven understory trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 4-foot-high berm or one 4-foot-high solid fence + two canopy trees + eight understory trees + 10 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE D: OPAQUE
Example of buffer type DThis perimeter buffer functions as an opaque screen from the ground to a height of at least six feet. This type of buffer prevents visual contact between uses and creates a strong impression of total separation.Nine canopy trees + ten understory trees + 55 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 6-foot-high solid fence + six canopy trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feet
NOTES:
[1] Any required perimeter buffer width can be reduced to five feet with the provision of a solid masonry wall six feet in height, along with ten shrubs per every 100 linear feet located outside the wall.
[2] Perimeter buffer widths (but not vegetation amounts) may be reduced in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.f, Alternative Landscape Plan.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.4: Property Perimeter Buffer Types
BUFFER TYPE AND CONFIGURATIONDESCRIPTIONMINIMUM SCREENING REQUIREMENTS WITHIN PERIMETER BUFFER
OPTION 1: MINIMUM
FEET [1][2]
OPTION 2: MINIMUM WIDTH 10
FEET [1][2]
TYPE A: BASIC
Example of buffer type AThis perimeter buffer functions as a basic edge demarcating individual properties with a slight visual obstruction from the ground to a height of ten feet.Three canopy trees + three understory trees per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per
100 linear feet
TYPE B: AESTHETIC
Example of buffer type BThis perimeter buffer functions as an intermittent visual obstruction from the ground to a height of at least 20 feet and creates the impression eliminating visual contact between uses.Four canopy trees + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + seven understory trees + 35 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE C: SEMI-OPAQUE
Example of buffer type CThis perimeter buffer functions as a semi-opaque screen from the ground to at least a height of six feet.Six canopy trees + seven understory trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 4-foot-high berm or one 4-foot-high solid fence + two canopy trees + eight understory trees + 10 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE D: OPAQUE
Example of buffer type DThis perimeter buffer functions as an opaque screen from the ground to a height of at least six feet. This type of buffer prevents visual contact between uses and creates a strong impression of total separation.Nine canopy trees + ten understory trees + 55 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 6-foot-high solid fence + six canopy trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feet
NOTES:
[1] Any required perimeter buffer width can be reduced to five feet with the provision of a solid masonry wall six feet in height, along with ten shrubs per every 100 linear feet located outside the wall.
[2] Perimeter buffer widths (but not vegetation amounts) may be reduced in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.f, Alternative Landscape Plan.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.4: Property Perimeter Buffer Types
BUFFER TYPE AND CONFIGURATIONDESCRIPTIONMINIMUM SCREENING REQUIREMENTS WITHIN PERIMETER BUFFER
OPTION 1: MINIMUM
FEET [1][2]
OPTION 2: MINIMUM WIDTH 10
FEET [1][2]
TYPE A: BASIC
Example of buffer type AThis perimeter buffer functions as a basic edge demarcating individual properties with a slight visual obstruction from the ground to a height of ten feet.Three canopy trees + three understory trees per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per
100 linear feet
TYPE B: AESTHETIC
Example of buffer type BThis perimeter buffer functions as an intermittent visual obstruction from the ground to a height of at least 20 feet and creates the impression eliminating visual contact between uses.Four canopy trees + five understory trees + 15 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne canopy tree + seven understory trees + 35 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE C: SEMI-OPAQUE
Example of buffer type CThis perimeter buffer functions as a semi-opaque screen from the ground to at least a height of six feet.Six canopy trees + seven understory trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 4-foot-high berm or one 4-foot-high solid fence + two canopy trees + eight understory trees + 10 shrubs per 100 linear feet
TYPE D: OPAQUE
Example of buffer type DThis perimeter buffer functions as an opaque screen from the ground to a height of at least six feet. This type of buffer prevents visual contact between uses and creates a strong impression of total separation.Nine canopy trees + ten understory trees + 55 shrubs per 100 linear feetOne 6-foot-high solid fence + six canopy trees + 25 shrubs per 100 linear feet
NOTES:
[1] Any required perimeter buffer width can be reduced to five feet with the provision of a solid masonry wall six feet in height, along with ten shrubs per every 100 linear feet located outside the wall.
[2] Perimeter buffer widths (but not vegetation amounts) may be reduced in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.f, Alternative Landscape Plan.
  1.   
    1. 5.
      Buffer Type Application
      Table 30-5.B.4.d.5, Buffer Type Application, below, specifies the type of perimeter landscape buffer that new development shall provide between it and adjacent property, based on the zoning district of the development site and that of the adjacent property. The buffer type is indicated by a letter corresponding to one of the four buffer types depicted in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.5: Buffer Type Application [1]
A = Type A Buffer
B = Type B Buffer
C = Type C Buffer
D = Type D Buffer
N/A = Not Applicable (No Buffer Required)
ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT SITE [2]ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY
CD
AR
SF-15,
SF-10,
SF-6 OR EXISTING SINGLE-FAMILY DEVELOPMENT
MR-5
MH

OI

UC
NC
MU

DT-2

MACLC
CC
BPLIHI
CD, ARN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
SF-15, SF-10, SF-6N/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MR-5, MH [3]AAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
OI, UC, NC, MU, DT-2BBAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MACDDAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
LC, CCDDCAAN/AN/AN/AN/A
BP, LIDDCBBAAN/AN/A
HIDDDDDBAN/AN/A
NOTES:
[1] Letters in cells correspond to the buffer types depicted in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types.
[2] Development in PD districts is subject to perimeter buffer requirements in the PD district standards. In cases where development is proposed next to an existing PD district having no perimeter buffer, the proposed development shall provide a perimeter buffer that is consistent with the type of buffer required if the adjacent use was in a differing base district appropriate for the type of use.
[3] Mobile home parks shall provide a perimeter buffer around the park in accordance with the standards in Section 30-4.C.2.a.4, Manufactured Home Parks.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.5: Buffer Type Application [1]
A = Type A Buffer
B = Type B Buffer
C = Type C Buffer
D = Type D Buffer
N/A = Not Applicable (No Buffer Required)
ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT SITE [2]ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY
CD
AR
SF-15,
SF-10,
SF-6 OR EXISTING SINGLE-FAMILY DEVELOPMENT
MR-5
MH

OI

UC
NC
MU

DT-2

MACLC
CC
BPLIHI
CD, ARN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
SF-15, SF-10, SF-6N/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MR-5, MH [3]AAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
OI, UC, NC, MU, DT-2BBAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MACDDAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
LC, CCDDCAAN/AN/AN/AN/A
BP, LIDDCBBAAN/AN/A
HIDDDDDBAN/AN/A
NOTES:
[1] Letters in cells correspond to the buffer types depicted in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types.
[2] Development in PD districts is subject to perimeter buffer requirements in the PD district standards. In cases where development is proposed next to an existing PD district having no perimeter buffer, the proposed development shall provide a perimeter buffer that is consistent with the type of buffer required if the adjacent use was in a differing base district appropriate for the type of use.
[3] Mobile home parks shall provide a perimeter buffer around the park in accordance with the standards in Section 30-4.C.2.a.4, Manufactured Home Parks.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.5: Buffer Type Application [1]
A = Type A Buffer
B = Type B Buffer
C = Type C Buffer
D = Type D Buffer
N/A = Not Applicable (No Buffer Required)
ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT SITE [2]ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY
CD
AR
SF-15,
SF-10,
SF-6 OR EXISTING SINGLE-FAMILY DEVELOPMENT
MR-5
MH

OI

UC
NC
MU

DT-2

MACLC
CC
BPLIHI
CD, ARN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
SF-15, SF-10, SF-6N/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MR-5, MH [3]AAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
OI, UC, NC, MU, DT-2BBAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MACDDAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
LC, CCDDCAAN/AN/AN/AN/A
BP, LIDDCBBAAN/AN/A
HIDDDDDBAN/AN/A
NOTES:
[1] Letters in cells correspond to the buffer types depicted in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types.
[2] Development in PD districts is subject to perimeter buffer requirements in the PD district standards. In cases where development is proposed next to an existing PD district having no perimeter buffer, the proposed development shall provide a perimeter buffer that is consistent with the type of buffer required if the adjacent use was in a differing base district appropriate for the type of use.
[3] Mobile home parks shall provide a perimeter buffer around the park in accordance with the standards in Section 30-4.C.2.a.4, Manufactured Home Parks.
Table 30-5.B.4.d.5: Buffer Type Application [1]
A = Type A Buffer
B = Type B Buffer
C = Type C Buffer
D = Type D Buffer
N/A = Not Applicable (No Buffer Required)
ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT SITE [2]ZONING CLASSIFICATION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY
CD
AR
SF-15,
SF-10,
SF-6 OR EXISTING SINGLE-FAMILY DEVELOPMENT
MR-5
MH

OI

UC
NC
MU

DT-2

MACLC
CC
BPLIHI
CD, ARN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
SF-15, SF-10, SF-6N/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MR-5, MH [3]AAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
OI, UC, NC, MU, DT-2BBAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
MACDDAN/AN/AN/AN/AN/AN/A
LC, CCDDCAAN/AN/AN/AN/A
BP, LIDDCBBAAN/AN/A
HIDDDDDBAN/AN/A
NOTES:
[1] Letters in cells correspond to the buffer types depicted in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types.
[2] Development in PD districts is subject to perimeter buffer requirements in the PD district standards. In cases where development is proposed next to an existing PD district having no perimeter buffer, the proposed development shall provide a perimeter buffer that is consistent with the type of buffer required if the adjacent use was in a differing base district appropriate for the type of use.
[3] Mobile home parks shall provide a perimeter buffer around the park in accordance with the standards in Section 30-4.C.2.a.4, Manufactured Home Parks.
  1.   
    1. 6.
      Responsibility for Buffer Installation
      1. a.
        Vacant Parcels
        Where a developing parcel is adjacent to a vacant parcel and a perimeter buffer is required in accordance with this section, the developing parcel may reduce the planting schedule indicated in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types, by one-half.
      2. b.
        Existing Land Uses
        Where a developing parcel is adjacent to an existing use and a perimeter buffer is required in accordance with this section, the developing parcel shall provide the full perimeter buffer required adjacent to the existing use in accordance with Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types, and Table 30-5.B.4.d.5, Buffer Type Application, unless a portion or all of a perimeter buffer that complies with the standards of this section already exists between the lots. Where part of a perimeter buffer exists, but the buffer does not fully comply with the standards of this section, the developing parcel may reduce the planting schedule indicated in Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types, by one-half.
    2. 7.
      Location of Buffers
      Perimeter buffers required by this section shall be located along the outer perimeter of the parcel(s) under development and shall extend to the parcel boundary line. In the case of parcel boundary lines along a public right-of-way, solid fencing in excess of 36 inches, if provided, shall not encroach beyond the building setback line unless part of an approved Alternative Landscape Plan. A perimeter buffer may be located along shared access easements between parcels in nonresidential developments. If a utility or drainage easement is needed along a property line where a buffer is required, the buffer will be repositioned to align with the outer edge of the easement, rather than the property line, in order to accommodate both purposes without conflict. No trees are to be planted within a drainage or utility easement except as allowed on a case by case basis by the appropriate authority.
    3. 8.
      Development within Required Buffers
      1. a.
        Unless permitted in this section, the required buffer shall not contain any development, impervious surfaces, or site features that do not function to meet the standards of this section or that require removal of existing vegetation.
      2. b.
        Sidewalks and trails may be placed in perimeter buffers if all required landscaping is provided and damage to existing vegetation is minimized according to Section 30-5.B.8, Tree Protection During Construction.
      3. c.
        Overhead and underground utilities may cross a perimeter buffer.
      4. d.
        If required landscaping material is damaged or removed due to utility activity, the landowner shall be responsible for replanting all damaged or removed vegetation necessary to ensure the buffer meets the standards in this Article, unless otherwise provided for by the subject easement agreement.
  1. e.
    Screening
    1. 1.
      General Requirements
      Screening shall be required to conceal specific areas of high visual or auditory impact or hazardous areas from both on-site and off-site views (see Figure 30-5.B.4.e, Screening Methods). Such areas shall be screened at all times, unless otherwise specified, regardless of adjacent uses, districts, or other proximate landscaping material.
    2. 2.
      Items to Be Screened
      The following areas shall be screened from off-site views in accordance with this section:
      1. a.
        Large waste receptacles (dumpsters) and refuse collection points (including cardboard recycling containers);
      2. b.
        Loading and service areas;
      3. c.
        Outdoor storage areas (including storage tanks);
      4. d.
        To the extent feasible given access requirements, ground-based utility equipment in excess of 12 cubic feet; and
      5. e.
        Ground level mechanical units, from public streets only.
Figure 30-5.B.4.e: Screening Methods
Diagram illustrating screening methods
Vegetation can serve as an effective visual screen for service areas.
  1.   
    1. 3.
      Screening Methods
      The following items are permitted for use as screening materials. Alternative screening materials that are not listed may be used if it is determined they are comparable to these screening materials.
      1. a.
        Vegetative materials that meet the minimum vegetative screening requirements for a Type D buffer (see Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types) and the size standards of Section 30-5.B.3.e.2, New Plantings;
      2. b.
        An earthen berm that is at least two feet in height, covered with grass, or planted with ground cover landscaping materials consistent with the function of and requirements for a Type D buffer (see Table 30-5.B.4.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types)—provided, however, that a berm shall not be used in the DT district or if it will replace existing trees of six inches in caliper or more;
      3. c.
        A solid fence constructed of treated or rot-resistant wood (such as cypress or redwood), or a plastic or vinyl fence, of a minimum height necessary to fully-screen the object being screened; or
      4. d.
        A masonry wall that is the minimum height necessary to fully-screen the object being screened, and that is constructed of brick, textured concrete masonry units, or stuccoed block.
      5. e.
        Use of chain link fencing with wooden or plastic slats does not qualify as a screen.
  1. f.
    Alternative Landscape Plan
    1. 1.
      General
      Alternative Landscape Plans, materials, or methods may be justified due to natural conditions, such as streams, natural rock formations, topography, and physical conditions related to the site. Lot configuration and utility easements may justify an alternative landscape plan, as well as impractical situations that would result from application of Section 30-5.B, Landscaping and Tree Protection Standards, or when replacing a tree accidentally damaged in accordance with Section 30-5.B.8, Tree Protection During Construction.
    2. 2.
      Preparation
      The alternative landscape plan should be prepared by someone who is knowledgeable about plant material.
    3. 3.
      Allowable Deviations
      With input from the TRC or the City Arborist, the city manager shall approve an Alternative Landscape Plan if it meets the purpose and intent of the landscaping standards in this section. Allowable deviations from the standards of this section include, but are not limited to the following:
      1. a.
        Reduced Planting Rates due to Public Facilities
        An adjustment to planting locations or reduction of up to 20 percent in the type or total number of plant material may be allowed at underground and/or above ground facilities operated and maintained by a utility, unless specific written consent is provided by that utility. An adjustment or reduction may also be allowed where public easements or right-of-way, are located upon or in close proximity to the parcel.
      2. b.
        Reduction in Standards due to Nature of Parcel
        A reduction in the count, spacing, or species diversity standards by up to 20 percent may be allowed where the reduction is desirable in terms of protection of existing natural resources, better consistency with the goals of the comprehensive plan, or a site design that exceeds the quality of what would otherwise result under a strict application of the standards in this Article.
      3. c.
        Redevelopment of Nonconforming Sites
        The installation of required landscaping during redevelopment of existing nonconforming sites shall occur in accordance with Section 30-7.F, Nonconforming Sites.
      4. d.
        Location of Street Trees
        1. 1.
          Deviations in the placement, on-center spacing, or tree type (understory vs. canopy) are allowable from the standards in Section 30-5.B.4.a, Street Trees, when the deviation is consistent with existing street tree placement along the same or adjacent block faces.
        2. 2.
          An applicant may request, or the City may require payment-in-lieu of street trees in cases where a development's frontage is subject to an approved streetscape plan.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-024, § 14, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2013-002, §§ 8, 11, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2013-007, § 1, 5-13-2013; Ord. No. S2013-015, §§ 3.7, 3.8, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2014-021, § 2, 11-24-2014; Ord. No. S2019-029, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-030, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-033, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-034, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-035, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2019-036, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2022-009, §§ 2-5, 05/23/2022; Ord. No. S2022-026, § 1, 09/26/2022; Ord. No. S2026-017, § 1, 05/26/2026)

Effective on: 5/26/2026

30-5.B.5. Public Tree Protection Standards

  1. Purpose
    1. The purpose of this section is to recognize the valuable asset the City has in the trees planted by public entities over the years and to encourage the protection of trees along streets and on City grounds within the City limits, because they are a continuing asset to the sound development of the City.
    2. To accomplish this purpose, this section:
      1. Establishes standard procedures and practices for the treatment of trees on public property, when conditions require that they be pruned or removed, and of trees on private property, when City crews are required to correct or abate certain conditions set out in this section;
      2. Defines those situations in which trees growing on private property may constitute a public nuisance; and
      3. Encourages the planting of trees on public property in conformity with these standards.
    3. This section is not intended to be punitive or to cause hardship to any person who uses care and diligence to protect public trees.
  2. Applicability
    This section pertains to all trees that exist on public lands and within public right-of-way.
  3. Exemptions
    Installation and maintenance activities conducted by utility providers within utility easements, public lands, or public right-of-way shall be exempt from the standards in this section when in conflict with service and/or easement maintenance requirements.
  4. Tree Board
    1. Creation and Establishment;
      There is hereby created and established a City Tree Board. The Joint Appearance Commission members appointed by City Council shall hereby be designated as the City's Tree Board.
    2. Duties and Responsibilities
      1. It shall be the responsibility of the Tree Board to assist in the study, development and preparation of a written plan for the care, replacement, maintenance, and removal or disposition of trees and shrubs in parks, along streets and in other public areas.
      2. The Tree Board, when requested by the City Council, shall consider, investigate, make findings, report and recommend upon any special matter or question coming within the scope of its work.
      3. The City Arborist shall be used as advisor when difficulties arise.
  5. Public Tree Care
    1. The City Manager or PWC shall have the right to plant, prune, maintain and remove trees, plants and shrubs within the right-of-way or bounds of all streets, alleys, lanes, squares, and public grounds, or any that extend into the right-of-way, if it endangers the safety of the public, or if it harbors disease or insects in order to preserve or enhance the beauty of such public places.
    2. Pruning of trees shall be in conformance with ANSI (American National Standards Institute) pruning standards as published by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA).
    3. The City Manager or PWC may remove or cause to be removed by the appropriate agency/contractor, any tree or part thereof which is in an unsafe condition or which by reason of its nature is injurious to sewers, electric power lines, gas lines, water lines, or other public improvements, or is seriously affected with any injurious insect or disease.
  6. Permit Required
    No person shall plant or remove a street tree or other public tree without first obtaining a permit from the City Manager. An encroachment agreement may also be needed for NCDOT maintained roads. No permit shall be required by any public service or City employee during such work in the pursuit of their public service endeavors.
  7. Tree Topping
    It shall be unlawful for any person, firm, or City department to top any street tree, park tree, or other tree on public property. Trees severely damaged by storms or other causes, or certain trees under utility wires or other obstruction where other pruning practices are impractical may be excepted from this section at the determination of the Tree Board.
  8. Clearances over Streets and Walkways
    The City Manager or PWC may, in the interest of public health and safety, prune any tree that overhangs into any street or right-of-way within the City, so that such branches shall not obstruct the light from any street lamp or obstruct the view of any street intersection and so that there shall be a clear space of eight feet above the surface of the walkways, a clear space of 13½ feet above the surface of streets, and a clear space of at least 17 feet above highways. The City and the PWC will notify, in writing or in person, any property owner whose trees will be pruned, no later than 24 hours prior to pruning. Pruning of trees shall be to the standards set forth in by the City Arborist and this Article.
  9. Abuse of Public Trees
    No person shall intentionally damage, cut, carve, transplant, or remove any tree, attach any rope, wire, nails, advertisements, posters, or other contrivance to any public tree, allow any gaseous liquid, or solid substance which is harmful to such trees to contact with them, or set fire or permit any fire to burn when such fire or the heat thereof will injure any portion of any public tree covered under this section.
  10. Protection of Public Trees
    All public trees shall be protected during construction in accordance with the following.
    1. A tree on any street or other publicly owned property whose crown is within five feet of any excavation or construction of any building, structure, or street work, shall be guarded with a substantial fence, frame, or box. The construction tree guard shall be not less than four feet high and eight feet square, or at a distance in feet from the trunk equal to the diameter of the trunk at breast height (DBH) in inches, whichever is greater. All building material, dirt, or other debris shall be kept outside the construction tree guard.
    2. No person shall change natural drainage, excavate any ditches, tunnels, trenches, or lay any drive within a radius of ten feet from any public tree without first obtaining a written permit from the City Manager.
    3. Land-disturbing activities within five feet of a public tree shall incorporate protection for tree root areas in accordance with best practices accepted by the City Manager.
  11. Dead or Diseased Trees
    The City may remove or cause to be removed any dead or diseased tree within the City limits that is declared by the City Arborist to be a public health nuisance pursuant to North Carolina General Statute Section 160A-193. The City will notify in writing the owner of such trees, and removal shall be in accordance with Section 30-8.E.4.b, Notice of Violation. If the owner does not abate the public health nuisance within a reasonable time,the City Manager may proceed without notice to abate the unlawful conduct and charge the actual cost of abatement, which shall be a lien upon the property in accordance with Section 160A-193.
  12. Removal of Stumps
    All stumps of public trees within the public right-of-way shall be removed below the surface of the ground so that the top of the stump shall not project above the surface of the ground.
  13. Interference with Tree Maintenance
    It shall be unlawful for any person to prevent, delay, or interfere with any of the City's representatives or agents, while engaging in and about the planting, cultivating, mulching, pruning, spraying, or removing of any tree within the community forest, as authorized by this section.
  14. Permission and Insurance Required
    It shall be unlawful for any person or firm to engage in the business or occupation of pruning, treating, or removing any publicly-owned treet without first obtaining permission from the City. Permission shall not be required for any PWC, public service, or City employee. The person or firm shall first file evidence of possession of liability insurance in the minimum amounts of $1,000,000.00 for bodily injury or death, and $100,000.00 property damage indemnifying the City or any person injured or damaged resulting from the pursuit of such endeavors as described in this article.
  15. Appeal
    The Zoning Commission shall have the right to review the conduct, acts, and decisions of the Tree Board. Any person may appeal within 30 days from any ruling or order of the Tree Board to the Zoning Commission who may hear the matter and make a final decision in accordance with Section 30-2.C.18, Appeal.
  16. Enforcement of Violations
    The City Manager is hereby authorized to enforce the provisions of this section, and issue appropriate citations in accordance with Article 30-8: Enforcement.
  17. Notice of Violation
    If any person shall violate the provisions of this section, it shall be the duty of the City Manager to give notice of violation to the property owner or to any person in possession of the subject property, in accordance with Article 30-8: Enforcement. The notice shall set forth that an unlawful condition exists thereupon, specify a reasonable time period within which the violation must be abated, and where if the same is not abated, that the owner will be subject to a civil penalty or other enforcement action.
  18. Service of Notice
    The notice required by Section 30-8.E.4.b, Notice of Violation, shall be served upon the owner of the property either personally or by first class mail, followed by delivery confirmation if the first notice is returned within two weeks of the date of mailing. Any such notice may be served by any authorized representative of the Development Services Department or by any authorized police officer of the City.
  19. Civil Penalty
    1. Civil penalties for violations of this Ordinance may be applied in accordance with Section 30-8.F, Remedies and Penalties.
    2. If, as the result of the violation of any provision of this Ordinance, the injury, mutilation or death of a tree, shrub or other plant located on public property is caused, the cost of repair or replacement, based on the appraised dollar value of such tree, shrub or other plant shall be borne by the party in violation. The value of trees and shrubs shall be determined in accordance with the latest revision of Guide for Plant Appraisal, as published by the International Society of Arboriculture.
  20. Emergencies
    In case of emergencies, such as windstorms, ice storms, floods, hurricanes, major interruptions of utility service or other disasters, any requirement of this section, which would hamper private or public work to restore order to the City, shall be waived during the emergency work so as to prevent injury or damage to the public. Within a reasonable time after the emergency, the City Manager shall be notified of the location and nature of any emergency maintenance affecting public trees. This shall not be interpreted to be a general waiver of the intent of this section.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2015-018, § 1, 12-14-2015; Ord. No. S2019-013, 1, 04/23/2019)

Effective on: 12/14/2015

30-5.B.6. Tree Preservation

  1. Purpose and Intent
    The purpose and intent of this section is to:
    1. Recognize the importance of the existing tree canopy and natural features such as native tree groves and stands of hardwood trees;
    2. Recognize the importance of existing trees to the visual and natural environments in the City; and
    3. Protect and retain significant tree masses and specimen trees during and after development;
    4. Establish the criteria for removal of a healthy specimen tree; and
    5. Set out the required mitigation for removal of a healthy specimen tree.
  2. Applicability
    1. General
      All development in the City, except that exempted in accordance with Section 30-5.B.6.b.2, Exemptions (below), shall be required to protect trees in accordance with this section.
    2. Exemptions
      The following development shall be exempt from these standards:
      1. Land within the Downtown (DT) district;
      2. Existing single-family detached residential dwellings except for trees planted to fulfill the street tree requirements of Section 30-5.B.4.a; and
      3. Installation and maintenance activities conducted by utility providers within utility easements, public lands, or public right-of-way.
  3. Review for Compliance
    Review for compliance with the standards of  this section shall occur as part of  an application for a Clear-Cutting Permit (Section 30-2.C.9), Site Plan (Section 30-2.C.5), Planned Development (Section 30-2.C.3), or Subdivision Plan (Section 30-2.C.6), as appropriate.
  4. Tree Survey
    Generally a tree survey is only required to illustrate the location, species, caliper, and condition of existing trees on the development site which the developer is proposing to save and for which he/she shall receive landscaping or open space credit (see Section 30-5.B.7, Tree Preservation Incentives and Section 30-5.C.4, Bonuses and Incentives); however, a tree survey is required for the purposes of documenting any tree having a caliper of 30 inches or greater. This information is used by the city manager in determining the exact location and extent of the required tree protection zone.
  5. Specimen Trees Defined; Provisions for Removal
    1. Specimen trees defined.
      Any healthy tree with a caliper measurement meeting or exceeding 30 inches shall be considered to be a specimen tree unless exempted under Section 30-5.B.7.a.2.
    2. Provisions for removal.
      Removal of specimen trees, while strongly discouraged, may sometimes be necessary due to the location of a tree or trees on a site or the size of the site. Applicants desiring to remove specimen tree(s) shall present compelling site design arguments for such removal, such as lot size, building placement, driveway and other vehicular use area layout, and similar considerations or constraints to justify removal. Applicants shall familiarize themselves with the incentives for preserving specimen trees in Section 30-5.C.4, Bonuses and Incentives. If justified by site design considerations or constraints and the incentives for preservation are deemed insufficient by the applicant, specimen trees may be removed upon payment of $50.00 per caliper inch of the removed tree(s) into the City's tree fund.
  6. Champion  Big Trees
    No tree listed in the North Carolina Big Trees List, the American Forest Association's Champion Tree list or any tree that would measure 80 percent of the points of a tree on the North Carolina Big Trees List shall be pruned or removed without prior permission from the City Arborist.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, §§ 3.9—3.12, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2019-051, § 1, 09/23/2019)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.B.7. Tree Preservation Incentives

  1. Tree Preservation Credits
    The preservation of specimen trees and other existing trees within the site and at the property perimeter is strongly encouraged. As an incentive to encourage the preservation of as many trees as practical on a development site, credit towards the minimum landscaping requirements may be applied to all existing trees in good health and condition which are retained as long as the intent and applicable standards of this section are fully met. Credits shall be granted in accordance with the following standards:
    1. Qualifying Attributes
      Preserved vegetation must be in good health and condition, and must be protected as described in Section 30-5.B.8, Tree Protection During Construction.
    2. Exempted Trees
      The following trees, regardless of their size, shall be exempted from the requirements in this section.
      1. Southern Yellow Pine (to exclude Longleaf Pine);
      2. Bradford Pear;
      3. Mulberry; and
      4. Silver Maple.
Table 30-5.B.7.a: Existing Tree Credits
SIZE OF EXISTING TREENUMBER OF TREES TO BE CREDITED
Five-inch up to (but not including) 12-inch caliper1
12-inch up to (but not including) 18-inch caliper2
18-inch up to (but not including) 24-inch caliper3
24-inch up to (but not including) 30-inch caliper4
30 or greater caliper inches5
    1. Tree Death
      If a preserved tree dies within 24 months of the completion of the landscape project, it must be replaced with the total number of trees which were credited to the existing tree, and the size of the new tree must comply with the size requirements for new trees as established in this section.
  1. Credit Toward Open Space
    If specimen trees or groves of three or more trees over four-inch caliper are preserved and protected during development of the site (beyond those credited toward landscaping requirements), credit may be applied toward the required open space acreage by calculating the area of the critical root zone circumference and multiplying that square footage by three, deriving a 300 percent credit. (See also Section 30-5.C.4, Bonuses and Incentives.)
  2. Reduction in the Minimum  Number of Required Parking Spaces
    Up to a five percent reduction in the number of off-street parking spaces required on a development site shall be allowed if the reduction in the amount of required pavement will preserve the root zones of existing healthy specimen trees. The amount of reduction can be determined only after taking into consideration any unique site conditions and the impact of the reduction on parking needs for the use, and must be agreed upon by both the applicant and the City Manager. Alternative paving materials (see Section 30-5.A.8.i, Alternative Materials) may be required by the City Manager in cases where required parking areas encroach upon critical root zones.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-002, § 11, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2013-015, §§ 3.13—3.15, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2019-006, 1, 04/23/2019)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.B.8. Tree Protection during Construction

  1. a.
    Responsibility for Compliance
    No grading or other land-disturbing activity shall occur on a site with existing trees, until protective barriers are installed by the owner or his/her representative, except in cases where no trees are being preserved. All protective barriers must be maintained throughout site and building construction. Failure to comply with the standards in this section is a violation of this Ordinance, subject to the remedies and penalties in this section and Article 30-8: Enforcement.
  2. b.
    Critical  Root Zone
    Critical to the tree's survival is protection of the critical root zone. The critical root zone is the minimum area beneath a tree that must be left undisturbed in order to preserve a sufficient root mass to give a tree a reasonable chance of survival. The critical root zone is generally 18 to 24 inches deep and typically represented by a concentric circle centering on the tree trunk with a radius of at least one foot for every inch of trunk diameter taken at four and one-half feet above grade (DBH). Approximately 50 percent of a tree's root system is in the top 12 inches of soil with 90—95 percent of the root system within the top three feet. For example, a ten-inch diameter tree requires a protective barrier with a minimum ten-foot radius. Proposed buildings shall not be located within ten feet of the critical root zone of any existing tree proposed to be preserved.
Figure  30-5.B.8.b:  Critical  Root  Zone and  Minimum Tree Protection Fencing
Diagram illustrating critical root zone and minimum tree protection fencing
  1. c.
    Tree Protection Fencing
    Without protection, trees will be damaged and killed by construction activity; however, such damage is not immediately evident. The protective fencing indicates the areas that are off limits to any land disturbing activity, and storage of equipment, building material, soil, and other debris.
    1. 1.
      When and Where Required
      All trees designated for preservation must be protected by barrier before demolition, grading, or any other land disturbing activity begins. Protective barriers shall be installed when the critical root zone of any trees to be preserved are within 50 feet of any proposed grading or construction activity.
    2. 2.
      Illustrated on Plans
      Tree protection areas based on the trees' critical root zones shall be noted and drawn to scale on demolition plans, grading and erosion control plans, and landscaping plans. Demolition plans shall include a detail of the tree barrier fencing to be erected and a note that site clearing is not to commence until tree protection barriers are in place and have been inspected by the City. Construction areas shall be located outside of tree protection areas, as noted by limit of construction barriers. Any proposed change of  grade within a required tree protection zone must be avoided, but when absolutely necessary, shall be clearly conveyed on the plans. Any anticipated disturbance to the tree protection zone must be approved prior to construction, otherwise the tree will not qualify as preserved and penalties will ensue. Additionally, all tree save areas must be described by metes and bounds on the recorded plat, individual recorded deeds, and all property association documents for land held in common.
    3. 3.
      Type of Fencing and Noticing
      All fencing required by this section shall be a minimum of four feet high, visible, and of durable construction with signage indicating "Keep Out." Protective barriers shall consist of either:
      1. a.
        A fence which is at least four feet high and constructed in a post and rail configuration, using two by four rails; or
      2. b.
        A fence with two by four posts placed a maximum distance of ten feet apart covered with four foot orange polyethylene laminar safety fencing.
    4. 4.
      Inspection
      All tree protection measures may be subject to inspection. Failure to have tree protection measures in place prior to the start of demolition and land clearing activity is a violation of this Article. Protective tree barriers shall be maintained until after the final site inspection.
  2. d.
    Encroachments into Tree Protection Zones
    No credit will be allowed for any tree proposed to be retained, if there is any encroachment within the tree protection zone, except as noted herein. For the purpose of this section, an encroachment is defined as any change in the natural grade, construction of impervious surfaces, trenching or excavation, storage of equipment, chemicals, materials or earth and the temporary or permanent parking or circulation of vehicles or equipment. Encroachments into tree protection zones shall occur only when no other alternative exists. If such an encroachment is anticipated, a written request must be made to the City Manager for allowance of encroachment. Request must detail preventative measures to be taken.
    1. 1.
      Soil Compaction
      Where compaction might occur due to construction traffic or materials delivery through a tree protection zone, the area must first be mulched with a minimum four-inch layer of wood chips. Equipment or materials storage shall not be allowed within a tree save area.
    2. 2.
      Fill
      No fill shall be placed within a tree protection zone without appropriate horticultural measures to allow air and water to reach the roots.
    3. 3.
      Paving Limitations
      Construction of sidewalks or permeable parking or driveway access points may encroach into tree protection zones, so long as such areas are approved by the City Manager and the following conditions are met:
      1. a.
        No more than ten percent of the protected ground area (including any additional landscape planting area) may be covered by sidewalks, up to 20 percent of this area may be covered by permeable parking areas or driveway access points or a combination of sidewalks and permeable parking or driveway access areas;
      2. b.
        Sidewalks shall be raised to avoid root damage; private sidewalks may be constructed with asphalt if a concrete or brick sidewalk would damage the tree's roots; and
      3. c.
        Permeable paving shall provide water and gaseous exchange to the tree roots, and the existing grade shall not be lowered or raised, except that the finished paved surface may be an average of six inches above the existing grade.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 4.0, 9-10-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.C.1. Purpose and Intent

The purpose of this section is to:

  1. Establish the standards under which residential, nonresidential, and mixed-use development shall dedicate a portion of the development area as open space;
  2. Describe the procedure for determining the composition of open space dedication. Innovative combinations of land dedication and actual development of public recreation facilities may be proposed for consideration; and
  3. Set out the minimum ownership and maintenance standards for open space dedication.

(Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.2, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, § 4.2, 7-22-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.C.2. Applicability

  1. The provisions of this section shall apply to development of all land in the City subject to a Subdivision Plan (Section 30-2.C.6), Planned Development (Section 30-2.C.3), Site Plan (Section 30-2.C.5), or Building Permit (Section [@@9372]), as appropriate except that conservation subdivisions are exempt from these open space standards, but remain subject to the conservation area standards of Section 30-6.D, Conservation Subdivisions. Additionally, development in the Downtown (DT) district and new residential development of three or fewer dwelling units shall be exempt from these standards. The term development shall include redevelopment sites subject to the provisions in Article 30-7, Nonconformities.
  2. All development in the City subject to these standards shall provide open space dedication in accordance with Table 30-5.C.3, Required Open Space Dedication.
  3. The exact composition of the open space dedication will vary from site to site based upon the proposed use and context of the parcel.

(Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.3, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, § 4.3, 7-22-2013)

*Editor’s note—Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.1, adopted September 10, 2012, amended the title of Section C to read as herein set out. Prior to inclusion of said ordinance, Section C was titled, "Open Space Set-Asides." See also the Code Comparative Table.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.C.3. Open Space Standards

All areas proposed for dedication as open space shall meet the following standards:

  1. a.
    Amount of Open Space Required
    Development shall provide at least the minimum amounts of open space identified in Table 30-5.C.3, Required Open Space Dedication, below:
Table 30-5.C.3: Required Open Space Dedication
DEVELOPMENT TYPE AND/OR SIZEMINIMUM OPEN SPACE AREA (AS PERCENTAGE OF DEVELOPMENTSITE AREA)
HLO ZONING DISTRICT NOT WITHIN DOWNTOWN (DT)[1]ALL OTHER ZONING DISTRICTS
One acre or lessNoneNone
Redevelopment sites less than five acres [2]5%5%
Redevelopment corridor sites five acres or greater [3]5%7.5%*
Unimproved sites greater than one acre to 10 acres [4]5%10%*
Unimproved sites greater than 10 acres [4]5%15%*
Residential sites greater than one acre to five acres5%10%**
Residential sites greater than five acres to 20 acres5%15%**
Residential sites greater than 20 acres5%20%**
All allowed uses in the CD district50%
*A minimum of 5% open space shall be provided on-site of which 50 percent must be usable.
**A minimum of 10% open space shall be provided on-site of which 50 percent must be usable.
Residential development greater than one acre and less than three acres may seek payment-in -lieu of a portion of the required on-site open space through the special use process.

(Ord. S2013-023, 10/28/2013)

  1. b.
    Nature of Open Space to be Dedicated
    1. 1.
      Trees Required
      Open space areas shall be planted with a minimum of 24 trees per acre unless otherwise specified or as approved by city manager (exceptions may include sports fields, areas with urban amenities, etc.) Composition of the Open Space may include a variety of features and facilities as described below:
    2. 2.
      Usability of Dedicated Land
      At least 50 percent of the dedicated land is to be usable for active or passive recreational facilities and shall be planned and improved with those facilities which support such use. Development plans shall include details of these facilities.

      Facilities may include, but are not limited to, tennis courts, swimming pools, clubhouses, athletic fields, basketball courts, play grounds, open play areas, community gardens, roof gardens, green roofs, sidewalks, multi-use trails, picnic facilities, and urban amenities such as plazas and fountains. If in question, the usability of the dedicated land shall be at the determination of the city manager.
Figure 30-5.C.3.b.2: Open Space Configuration
Before and after example of open space configuration
Wherever possible, open space dedications should continue or expand existing open space resources.
  1.   
    1. 3.
      Size and Location
      1. a.
        The open space dedication should generally be concentrated in a single tract of land that encompasses the open space and its associated improvement, if any, regardless of whether the development is occurring in phases or sections. Exceptions may be provided at the discretion of the city manager based upon a determination that multiple or smaller tracts better serve the development or the interests of the City.
      2. b.
        Residential open space should generally be centrally located and within ¼ mile of 80 percent of the lots or units. The city manager may require that trail easements or open space be dedicated on the periphery of the development in order to allow enlargement of future trail facilities or public parks when deemed to be in the best interest of the City's current and/or long-range parks and recreation plans (see Figure 30-5.C.3.b.2, Open Space Configuration).
  1.   
    1. 4.
      Access
      Access shall be free, easy, and convenient to and from the open space area.
      1. a.

        In residential areas, the access shall be provided by means of streets and sidewalks, walkways, or trail, with access right-of-way being a minimum width of 20 feet shown on the Site Plan or Subdivision Plan.

      2. b.

        All publicly dedicated open space areas shall have access by way of a public street. Dedicated areas that do not have frontage on a public street but are adjacent to existing or proposed public open space with access are exempt from this requirement, but may be required to provide pedestrian/bicycle access from the adjacent neighborhood.

    2. 5.

      Conservation Features

      Figure 30-5.C.3.b.7: Stormwater Amenities
      Example of stormwater amenities
       Stormwater management devices configured as a site amenity may be credited towards open space requirements.

      Conservation features such as the following may be counted toward the open space requirement:

      1. a.
        The 100-year floodplain;
      2. b.
        Wetlands under the jurisdiction of the Army Corps of Engineers or the State of North Carolina;
      3. c.

        Non-jurisdictional wetlands not under the jurisdiction of the Army Corps of Engineers or the State of North Carolina;

      4. d.

        Wildlife corridors or habitat utilized by endangered or threatened species;

      5. e.

        Tree protection zones associated with the preservation of significant trees;

      6. f.

        Natural fields and meadows;

      7. g.
        Prime agricultural lands that remain in agricultural use;
      8. h.
        Scenic corridors and views;
      9. i.
        Historic, archeological, and cultural resources; and/or
      10. j.
        Areas that could serve to extend existing public facilities, such as greenways, trails, parks or recreation areas.
    3. 6.
      Open Water Areas
      No more than 50 percent of the total open space dedication may be comprised of open water (lakes, natural ponds, streams, rivers, etc.).
    4. 7.
      Stormwater Management Devices
      1. a.
        Up to 100 percent of land area occupied by stormwater management devices (including retention ponds, fully vegetated detention basins, and other bio-retention devices, but not pervious pavement or underground storage devices) may be counted toward the total open space dedication requirement in accordance with Section 30-5.C.4, Bonuses and Incentives.
      2. b.
        A living green roof may be installed and maintained to satisfy all or a portion of the open space dedication. The owner may be required to submit an annual inspection and maintenance report as outlined in the City's landscaping guidelines.
  1. c.
    Not Counted as Open Space
    The following areas shall not be counted as open space dedication:
    1. 1.
      Remnants of land having no significance to the design of the site;
    2. 2.
      Private yards not subject to an open space or conservation easement;
    3. 3.

      Public street rights-of-way or private street easements, including sidewalks located within those rights-of-way or easements. Exceptions may be provided at the discretion of the city manager for rights-of-way accommodating multi-use trails;

    4. 4.
      Parking areas and driveways;
    5. 5.

      Land covered by structures not designated for recreational use; and

    6. 6.
      Designated outdoor storage areas.
  2. d.
    Provision in Multi-Phase Developments
    Multi-phase development shall preserve open space in phases, so that the first phase of development does not contain 100 percent of the open space acreage allotted for the entire development, but does contain, at a minimum, its pro rata share of the total acreage. One hundred percent may be provided in the initial phase if the open space is central to the overall Site Plan and configured such that all phases will have reasonable access to the open space facilities.
  3. e.
    Maintenance of Open Space Dedicated Areas
    The owner of the land shall be responsible for maintenance of all open space dedicated areas. Failure to maintain open space areas or other community facilities in accordance with the approved Final Plat (Section 30-2.C.6.e) or Site Plan (Section 30-2.C.5) shall be a violation of this Ordinance subject to the remedies and penalties in Article 30-8: Enforcement.

(Ord. No. S2012-007, § 4, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.4, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-024, § 15, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, § 4.4, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2019-058, § 1, 11/25/2019; Ord. No. S2019-059, §§ 1, 2, 11/25/2019)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.C.4. Bonuses and Incentives

The amount of land required to be designated for open space dedication may be reduced by use of any of the following bonuses and incentives:

  1. Saving specimen trees - 300 percent bonus for critical root zone circumference.
  2. Saving groves of three or more existing trees over four-inch in caliper - up to 300 percent bonus for critical root zone circumference depending on tree form and health.
  3. Stormwater BMPs count 100 percent if designed as amenity and include trees around pond; minimum tree planting is 36 trees per acre and 3:1 maximum slope.
  4. Stormwater BMPs count 50 percent if designed as amenity or planted with trees around pond; minimum tree planting is 36 trees per acre and 3:1 maximum slope.
  5. Undisturbed uplands adjacent to streams and wetlands count 200 percent if a minimum of 30 feet in width; such areas shall be augmented as necessary to a minimum of 36 trees per acre.
  6. Required property perimeter buffer areas count 100 percent if 30 feet or more in width.
  7. Open space developed with urban amenities count 200 percent; NOTE: For the purpose of this section, "urban amenities" are pedestrian-oriented site features such as sidewalk cafes, outdoor waiting areas, courtyards, plazas, etc.
  8. Fifty percent reduction in open space on nonresidential or mixed-use developments with the primary building (with floor area ratio greater than 0.15) located proximate to the street or corner right-of-way and when parking located to side or rear.
  9. If public parks or public recreational facilities are constructed consistent with a plan acceptable to the City within the development, the open space acreage may be reduced in proportion to the value of the improvements made by the applicant, as determined by the city manager.
  10. If the land proposed for designation as open space adjoins or is otherwise immediately accessible and connected to public open space, the acreage may be reduced by up to a maximum of 25 percent of the total.
  11. If substantial active recreational facilities (e.g., a pool and clubhouse) are provided to serve the residents of the development, the open space acreage may be reduced in proportion to the value of the improvements made by the applicant up to a maximum of 50 percent of the total required acreage as determined by the city manager.

(Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.5, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, § 4.5, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2021-037, §§ 1, 2, 10/25/2021)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.C.5. Density Bonus Available

A density bonus over and above the density otherwise allowed may be approved by the City Manager provided that the petitioner increase the percentage of the total project area to be dedicated to common open space. This bonus may be granted only if specifically requested by the petitioner. Any such bonus shall consist of a one percent increase in allowable density for every one percent of land area devoted to common open space in addition to the ten percent required herein. The increase in density shall be achieved through administrative adjustment to lot area and lot width to allow clustering. In no event shall the bonus exceed 20 percent of the otherwise allowable density.

(Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.5, 9-10-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.C.6. Determining Ownership of Open Space Dedication or Payment-in-Lieu

The city manager shall review all proposals concerning open space dedication with consideration given for relevant park plans adopted by the City and shall decide whether a payment-in-lieu of dedication or whether one of the following ownership options for dedicated acreage is acceptable:

  1. Ownership Options
    The open space dedication shall be clearly conveyed on the Site Plan, or the Final Plat, through recorded easement or separate tract, as appropriate.
    1. Retained on Private Lots
      All required open space dedicated areas to be retained under private ownership on an individual building lot shall be maintained through the use of a recorded easement prohibiting future development of the open space except in accordance with this section. Exceptions may be provided at the discretion of the city manager, depending upon the type and acreage of the designated open space.
      Such open space dedication shall be clearly marked on the Site Plan, or the Subdivision Plan and Final Plat, as appropriate. Exceptions may be provided at the discretion of the city manager based upon a determination that multiple or smaller tracts better serve the development or the interests of the City.
    2. Homeowners or Property  Owners Association
      Developments having over 20 lots, shall designate open space dedicated areas as a separate tract on the Subdivision Plan and Final Recorded Plat, to be held in joint or common ownership, through a recognized homeowners or property owners association, established in accordance with the following:
      1. The landowner shall submit documents for the creation of the homeowners or property owners association to the City for review and approval, including the association's bylaws, all documents governing ownership, maintenance, and use restrictions for the open space dedication, and a legal description of open space dedication areas.
      2. The landowner shall agree that the association shall be established by the landowner or applicant and shall be operating (with financial subsidization by the owner or applicant, if necessary) before issuance of the first Building Permit.
      3. Membership in the association shall be automatic (mandatory) for all purchasers of land, dwelling units, or structures in the development, and their successors in title.
      4. The association shall be responsible for liability insurance and local taxes on common open space owned by it. Any fees levied by the association that remain unpaid will become a lien on the individual property in accordance with procedures established under the dedication or organization document. The covenants and easements shall also prohibit future development of any common open space, for other than open space or recreational purposes, and shall provide for continued maintenance of any common open space and recreational facilities.
    3. Nonprofit Organization
      The landowners may convey open space to a nonprofit organization such as a land trust or land conservancy for management and maintenance if the City is provided adequate assurance the dedication will be properly managed and maintained.
    4. Public Dedication  and Conveyance
      The landowners may convey open space dedication to the City for public use, maintenance and management. This option requires the consent of  the city manager to accept the open space area for public use.
  2. Timing
    The process to dedicate open space acreage or pay a fee-in-lieu for a portion of the open space requirements must be completed prior to the issuance of the Final Site Plan or Subdivision Plan approval. All open space improvements and facilities must be completed no later than the date on which certificates of occupancy are issued for the first 50 percent of the total number of dwelling units to be constructed within the project area.
  3. Voluntary Payment-In-Lieu
    1. Procedure for Approval
      1. The payment of such fees in-lieu shall be reviewed and approved as part of the Site Plan (Section 30-2.C.5), or Final Plat (Section 30-2.C.6.e), as appropriate. Any developer desiring to make such in-lieu fee payment shall attach a formal written request to the city manager.
      2. Upon receipt of the application, the city manager shall review the request and decide if it is in the best interest of the community to require dedication of open space or accept a payment-inlieu based on the standards in Section 30-5.C.3, Open Space Standards.
      3. Appeals of the decision of the city manager or the Technical Review Committee on the provision of open space dedication shall be decided by the City Council in accordance with Section 30-2.C.18, Appeal.
    2. Amount  of Payment
      1. The payment-in-lieu shall be calculated based upon the square footage of land required for dedication, consistent with the requirements of Table 30-5.C.3, Required Open Space Dedication. The land value factor contained in the fee schedule adopted annually by the City Council will be applied to the land area required for dedication to arrive at the payment-in-lieu amount.
      2. For developments and subdivisions containing more than 20 residential units, the payment-in-lieu option may only be used for up to 50 percent of the open space requirements in order to ensure that these larger projects provide on-site open space for their residents.
    3. Use of Funds
      Funds collected shall be maintained in a separate account and shall be used only for the acquisition or development of open space, greenway, trails, park, and recreation areas and/or to implement features of the Parks and Recreation Master Plan of the City of Fayetteville. Where practical, the collected fees for each project shall be designated for specific parks and recreation acquisitions and/or enhancements by the City Manager.

(Ord. No. S2012-017, § 5.6, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, § 4.6, 7-22-2013)

Note—Formerly § 30-5.C.3.f.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.1. Purpose and Intent

The purpose and intent of this section is to regulate the location, height, and appearance of fences and walls to maintain visual harmony within neighborhoods and throughout the City, protect adjacent properties from the indiscriminate placement and unsightliness of fences and walls, and ensure the safety, security, and privacy of properties.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.2. Applicability

  1. The provisions of this section shall apply to all construction, substantial reconstruction, or replacement of  fences  or walls  not  required  for support of  a  principal  or accessory structure, or any other linear barrier intended to delineate different portions  of a lot; however, garden walls as described in Section 30-5.B.4.c.5.d are exempt from these requirements.
  2. Temporary fences for construction sites  or a similar purpose are  exempted from these standards, but shall comply with the requirements of the State Building Code adopted by the City, and the standards of Section  30-4.E,  Temporary Use Standards.
  3. Bona fide farming and related agricultural uses for properties within the State’s present-use program must meet the standards of Section 30-5.D along any property line or public right of way but are allowed barbed wire and electric fencing typical of farm operations, up to five feet in height, when such fencing is placed inside a perimeter fence.
  4. In  the  event   of  any  inconsistency between  the  provisions  of  this  section and  any screening standard in Section  30-5.B.4.e, Screening, the screening standards shall govern.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 12.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2014-004, § 8, 1-13-2014; Ord. No. S2014-021, § 1a, 11-24-2014.)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.3. Locational Requirements for Fences and Walls

  1. a.
    General
    1. 1.
      Fences or walls shall be located outside of the public right-of-way, and  may not exceed 30 inches in height if located within a required  sight triangle.
    2. 2.
      Fences and walls are permitted on the property line between two or more parcels of land held in private ownership.
    3. 3.
      Fences and walls may be located within any required  yard.
  2. b.
    In Easements or Around Fire Protection Facilities
    Fences which cannot easily be removed, or that prevent access, shall be prohibited within utility easements or around fire protection facilities, and the City shall not be responsible for damage to, or the repair  or replacement of, fences that must  be removed to access such   easements or  facilities.  Any  fencing  shall  also  meet   the  minimum  separation distance required  by the current  adopted version  of the North Carolina  Fire Code.
  3. c.
    Blocking Natural Drainage Flow
    No fence or wall shall be installed so as to block or divert a natural  drainage flow on to or off  of  any  other  land  unless subject to  an  approved stormwater management  plan. Nothing in this section shall be construed to prevent the installation of temporary fencing to protect  existing trees, limit sedimentation, or control erosion.
  4. d.
    Within  Buffers
    1. 1.
      Fences and walls shall be installed  so as not to disturb or damage existing vegetation or plant material installed to meet the requirements of this code,  to the maximum extent  practicable. If removed, plant material installed to meet the requirements of this Code shall be replaced.  The perimeter fencing or wall for a single  development shall be of a uniform style that complies with the standards of this section.
    2. 2.
      Fences or walls used to meet buffer requirements and placed so that the required plant material is interior to the fences or walls shall be solid with a minimum of three horizontal elements and two vertical elements if made of wood or a minimum of two vertical and horizontal elements if of masonry construction.  Alternately, a professionally installed “green wall” may be used provided the vegetation is placed to allow maintenance and full wall coverage by the vegetation is achieved within 24 months after installation (also see Section 30-5.B.4.c.5.d Garden Walls).  Figure 30-5.D.3.d shows examples of these fences and walls.  Chain link with slats or screens, shadow box or other partially open fences are not allowed.
Figure 30-5.D.3.d:  Examples of Detailing Required for Perimeter Buffer Fences
Example 1

Example 2

Example 3
  1. e.
    Around Gated Communities
    Fencing or walls inconsistent with the standards herein necessary to establish a gated single-family community may only be permitted subject to a Special Use Permit  (see Section  30-2.C.7).
  2. f.
    [RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE]
  3. g.
    Fences Around Swimming Pools
    All fences/walls/barriers for in-ground and above-ground swimming pools shall be in accordance with the requirements of the State Building Code.

(Ord. No. S2014-021, § 1b, 11-24-2014; Ord. No. S2019-004, 1, 04/23/2019)

Effective on: 11/24/2014

30-5.D.4. Height Requirements for Fences and Walls

  1. a.
    General
    Fences and walls shall meet the standards in Table 30-5.D.4, Maximum Fence and Wall Height and Minimum Setback, except as provided in Section 30-5.D.5 Exemptions:
Table 30-5.D.4: Maximum Fence and Wall Height and Minimum Setback
FENCE OR WALL TYPE [1][6]MAXIMUM HEIGHT BY LOCATION [1], [3]MINIMUM SETBACK [7]
 IN FRONT AND CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET) [4]IN INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN SIGHT TRIANGLESIN FRONT, INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET)
NOTES:
  1. 1.
    Measurement of Height:  Fence and wall height shall be measured taking into account the purpose for the fence or wall.  For example, a buffer fence erected on the top of a retaining wall shall have its height measured from the adjoining property, not the base of the retaining wall.  Similarly, a fence or wall erected as a buffer between the property being developed at a lower elevation from the property being buffered shall have its height measured from the property being buffered, not the lower property being developed.  Fences erected for security purposes shall have that purpose taken into account when determining how they are measured.  Nothing herein, however, shall allow or require the erection of a buffer fence or wall taller than twelve feet as measured from the lower property side, unless erected on a retaining wall.  Safety fencing required by the North Carolina building code is not regulated by these height provisions.
  2. 2.
    Only allowed as part of an approved tennis court, athletic field, or similar recreational amenity.
  3. 3.
    Reserved for future use.
  4. 4.
    Single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings on through lots shall be considered as having two front yards except as follows:
    1. ▪
       Where the lot adjoins a road with four or more lanes, the frontage adjoining this road may be considered a corner side yard with regard to fence height and setback
    2. ▪
       Where the fence or wall is part of a development perimeter.
  5. 5.
    For single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings, the following fence and wall materials are allowed for fences erected in the front yard:
    1. a.
      Wrought iron or similar open-style metal fence (for these fences, the front yard height may be increased to five feet);  
    2. b.
      Picket, shadow box or other partially open fences (50% or more open); or  
    3. c.
      Solid fences or walls (less than 50% open) containing a minimum of three horizontal elements and two vertical elements if made of wood or a minimum of two vertical and horizontal elements if of masonry construction.  
    4. d.
      Chain link or other wire fences with or without slats or screens are not allowed.
  6. 6.
    For all properties having road frontage, a garden wall (Sec. 30-5.B.4(c)(5) d.) may be substituted for a fence or wall allowed in this section.
  7. 7.
    Where property lines extend into the right-of-way, the setback for fences and walls in front and corner side yards shall be measured from the edge of the sidewalk (if any) or 10 feet from the edge of the pavement, as applicable.
    8. For development other than single-family, wrought iron or similar open-style fence, the height may be increased to five feet.
Fence or wall serving individual single-family (attached or detached)  and two- to four-family dwellings [5]4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
630 inches00 for a  fence or wall 36” or less in height.  For others, the lesser of 5 feet or in line with corner side of dwelling
Fence or wall serving other individual development4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
6010
Chain link fence serving other development46

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Fence or wall serving a development perimeter66

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Screening fence or wall in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.e, ScreeningMinimum height necessary to achieve screening function up to 8 feet or as approved through site plan reviewAs approved through site plan review
Recreational fencing [2]N/AN/AAs approved through site plan review
Table 30-5.D.4: Maximum Fence and Wall Height and Minimum Setback
FENCE OR WALL TYPE [1][6]MAXIMUM HEIGHT BY LOCATION [1], [3]MINIMUM SETBACK [7]
 IN FRONT AND CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET) [4]IN INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN SIGHT TRIANGLESIN FRONT, INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET)
NOTES:
  1. 1.
    Measurement of Height:  Fence and wall height shall be measured taking into account the purpose for the fence or wall.  For example, a buffer fence erected on the top of a retaining wall shall have its height measured from the adjoining property, not the base of the retaining wall.  Similarly, a fence or wall erected as a buffer between the property being developed at a lower elevation from the property being buffered shall have its height measured from the property being buffered, not the lower property being developed.  Fences erected for security purposes shall have that purpose taken into account when determining how they are measured.  Nothing herein, however, shall allow or require the erection of a buffer fence or wall taller than twelve feet as measured from the lower property side, unless erected on a retaining wall.  Safety fencing required by the North Carolina building code is not regulated by these height provisions.
  2. 2.
    Only allowed as part of an approved tennis court, athletic field, or similar recreational amenity.
  3. 3.
    Reserved for future use.
  4. 4.
    Single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings on through lots shall be considered as having two front yards except as follows:
    1. ▪
       Where the lot adjoins a road with four or more lanes, the frontage adjoining this road may be considered a corner side yard with regard to fence height and setback
    2. ▪
       Where the fence or wall is part of a development perimeter.
  5. 5.
    For single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings, the following fence and wall materials are allowed for fences erected in the front yard:
    1. a.
      Wrought iron or similar open-style metal fence (for these fences, the front yard height may be increased to five feet);  
    2. b.
      Picket, shadow box or other partially open fences (50% or more open); or  
    3. c.
      Solid fences or walls (less than 50% open) containing a minimum of three horizontal elements and two vertical elements if made of wood or a minimum of two vertical and horizontal elements if of masonry construction.  
    4. d.
      Chain link or other wire fences with or without slats or screens are not allowed.
  6. 6.
    For all properties having road frontage, a garden wall (Sec. 30-5.B.4(c)(5) d.) may be substituted for a fence or wall allowed in this section.
  7. 7.
    Where property lines extend into the right-of-way, the setback for fences and walls in front and corner side yards shall be measured from the edge of the sidewalk (if any) or 10 feet from the edge of the pavement, as applicable.
    8. For development other than single-family, wrought iron or similar open-style fence, the height may be increased to five feet.
Fence or wall serving individual single-family (attached or detached)  and two- to four-family dwellings [5]4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
630 inches00 for a  fence or wall 36” or less in height.  For others, the lesser of 5 feet or in line with corner side of dwelling
Fence or wall serving other individual development4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
6010
Chain link fence serving other development46

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Fence or wall serving a development perimeter66

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Screening fence or wall in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.e, ScreeningMinimum height necessary to achieve screening function up to 8 feet or as approved through site plan reviewAs approved through site plan review
Recreational fencing [2]N/AN/AAs approved through site plan review
Table 30-5.D.4: Maximum Fence and Wall Height and Minimum Setback
FENCE OR WALL TYPE [1][6]MAXIMUM HEIGHT BY LOCATION [1], [3]MINIMUM SETBACK [7]
 IN FRONT AND CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET) [4]IN INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN SIGHT TRIANGLESIN FRONT, INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET)
NOTES:
  1. 1.
    Measurement of Height:  Fence and wall height shall be measured taking into account the purpose for the fence or wall.  For example, a buffer fence erected on the top of a retaining wall shall have its height measured from the adjoining property, not the base of the retaining wall.  Similarly, a fence or wall erected as a buffer between the property being developed at a lower elevation from the property being buffered shall have its height measured from the property being buffered, not the lower property being developed.  Fences erected for security purposes shall have that purpose taken into account when determining how they are measured.  Nothing herein, however, shall allow or require the erection of a buffer fence or wall taller than twelve feet as measured from the lower property side, unless erected on a retaining wall.  Safety fencing required by the North Carolina building code is not regulated by these height provisions.
  2. 2.
    Only allowed as part of an approved tennis court, athletic field, or similar recreational amenity.
  3. 3.
    Reserved for future use.
  4. 4.
    Single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings on through lots shall be considered as having two front yards except as follows:
    1. ▪
       Where the lot adjoins a road with four or more lanes, the frontage adjoining this road may be considered a corner side yard with regard to fence height and setback
    2. ▪
       Where the fence or wall is part of a development perimeter.
  5. 5.
    For single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings, the following fence and wall materials are allowed for fences erected in the front yard:
    1. a.
      Wrought iron or similar open-style metal fence (for these fences, the front yard height may be increased to five feet);  
    2. b.
      Picket, shadow box or other partially open fences (50% or more open); or  
    3. c.
      Solid fences or walls (less than 50% open) containing a minimum of three horizontal elements and two vertical elements if made of wood or a minimum of two vertical and horizontal elements if of masonry construction.  
    4. d.
      Chain link or other wire fences with or without slats or screens are not allowed.
  6. 6.
    For all properties having road frontage, a garden wall (Sec. 30-5.B.4(c)(5) d.) may be substituted for a fence or wall allowed in this section.
  7. 7.
    Where property lines extend into the right-of-way, the setback for fences and walls in front and corner side yards shall be measured from the edge of the sidewalk (if any) or 10 feet from the edge of the pavement, as applicable.
    8. For development other than single-family, wrought iron or similar open-style fence, the height may be increased to five feet.
Fence or wall serving individual single-family (attached or detached)  and two- to four-family dwellings [5]4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
630 inches00 for a  fence or wall 36” or less in height.  For others, the lesser of 5 feet or in line with corner side of dwelling
Fence or wall serving other individual development4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
6010
Chain link fence serving other development46

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Fence or wall serving a development perimeter66

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Screening fence or wall in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.e, ScreeningMinimum height necessary to achieve screening function up to 8 feet or as approved through site plan reviewAs approved through site plan review
Recreational fencing [2]N/AN/AAs approved through site plan review
Table 30-5.D.4: Maximum Fence and Wall Height and Minimum Setback
FENCE OR WALL TYPE [1][6]MAXIMUM HEIGHT BY LOCATION [1], [3]MINIMUM SETBACK [7]
 IN FRONT AND CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET) [4]IN INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN SIGHT TRIANGLESIN FRONT, INTERIOR SIDE AND REAR YARDS (FEET)IN CORNER SIDE YARDS (FEET)
NOTES:
  1. 1.
    Measurement of Height:  Fence and wall height shall be measured taking into account the purpose for the fence or wall.  For example, a buffer fence erected on the top of a retaining wall shall have its height measured from the adjoining property, not the base of the retaining wall.  Similarly, a fence or wall erected as a buffer between the property being developed at a lower elevation from the property being buffered shall have its height measured from the property being buffered, not the lower property being developed.  Fences erected for security purposes shall have that purpose taken into account when determining how they are measured.  Nothing herein, however, shall allow or require the erection of a buffer fence or wall taller than twelve feet as measured from the lower property side, unless erected on a retaining wall.  Safety fencing required by the North Carolina building code is not regulated by these height provisions.
  2. 2.
    Only allowed as part of an approved tennis court, athletic field, or similar recreational amenity.
  3. 3.
    Reserved for future use.
  4. 4.
    Single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings on through lots shall be considered as having two front yards except as follows:
    1. ▪
       Where the lot adjoins a road with four or more lanes, the frontage adjoining this road may be considered a corner side yard with regard to fence height and setback
    2. ▪
       Where the fence or wall is part of a development perimeter.
  5. 5.
    For single-family (attached or detached) and two- to four-family dwellings, the following fence and wall materials are allowed for fences erected in the front yard:
    1. a.
      Wrought iron or similar open-style metal fence (for these fences, the front yard height may be increased to five feet);  
    2. b.
      Picket, shadow box or other partially open fences (50% or more open); or  
    3. c.
      Solid fences or walls (less than 50% open) containing a minimum of three horizontal elements and two vertical elements if made of wood or a minimum of two vertical and horizontal elements if of masonry construction.  
    4. d.
      Chain link or other wire fences with or without slats or screens are not allowed.
  6. 6.
    For all properties having road frontage, a garden wall (Sec. 30-5.B.4(c)(5) d.) may be substituted for a fence or wall allowed in this section.
  7. 7.
    Where property lines extend into the right-of-way, the setback for fences and walls in front and corner side yards shall be measured from the edge of the sidewalk (if any) or 10 feet from the edge of the pavement, as applicable.
    8. For development other than single-family, wrought iron or similar open-style fence, the height may be increased to five feet.
Fence or wall serving individual single-family (attached or detached)  and two- to four-family dwellings [5]4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
630 inches00 for a  fence or wall 36” or less in height.  For others, the lesser of 5 feet or in line with corner side of dwelling
Fence or wall serving other individual development4 Front yard;
6 Corner side yard
6010
Chain link fence serving other development46

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Fence or wall serving a development perimeter66

0 interior and side

10 front

10
Screening fence or wall in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.e, ScreeningMinimum height necessary to achieve screening function up to 8 feet or as approved through site plan reviewAs approved through site plan review
Recreational fencing [2]N/AN/AAs approved through site plan review
  1. b.
    Exemption for Safety
    Major utilities, wireless  communication towers, government facilities,  non-residential uses located within the Light Industrial (LI) & Heavy Industrial (HI) Districts, and  other  public safety uses shall be allowed to increase maximum fence heights to eight feet in front, side, and rear yards,  unless further increased through an approved Security Plan (see Section 30-5.D.5  Exemptions).

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 5.1, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-002, § 3, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2014-021, § 1c, 11-24-2014; Ord. S2015-008, § 2, 8-10-2015; Ord. No. S2019-019, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2020-009, § 1, 09/28/2020; Ord. No. S2026-021, § 1, 06/22/2026)

Effective on: 6/22/2026

30-5.D.5. Exemptions

  1. a.
    Security Plan:
    An owner or tenant or a representative of an agency responsible to or for a government facility, park  and  open  area, public safety,  or other  use  where  sensitive, dangerous, or military-related  activities take place  may submit a site Security  Plan to the City for consideration. A Security Plan may propose fences or walls taller than those permitted by this subsection, the use of barbed or concertina wire atop a fence or wall, or "K-4" fencing. The  City Manager shall  approve or approve with conditions, the  Security  Plan  and  its proposed exemption of fences or walls from the standards of this subsection, upon finding that:
    1. 1.
      The condition,  location,  or use  of the land, or the history of activity in the area, indicates the land or any materials stored or used on it are in significantly greater danger of  theft  or damage than  surrounding land,  or represent a  significant hazard to public safety  without a taller fence or the use  of barbed or concertina wire atop a fence or wall; and
    2. 2.
      The proposed taller fences or wall or use  of barbed or concertina wire will not have  a  significant  adverse effect  on  the  security,  functioning,  appearance,  or value of adjacent lands  or the surrounding area as a whole.
  2. b.
    Monitored Electrified Fences:
    The construction and use  of monitored  electrified fences shall be permitted in the LI and HI industrial  districts  and  may  be  approved through  a  Special Use  Permit  for electric security  around permitted outdoor  storage or warehouse-type activity in the CC district provided  the following standards are met:
    1. 1.
      Electrification
      The energizer for electric fences must be driven by a commercial storage battery not to exceed 12 V DC. Additionally, the electric  charge produced by the fence upon contact shall not exceed the energizer characteristics set forth in paragraph 22.108  and  depicted in Figure  102 of the International Electro  Technical  Commission  (IEC) Standard No. 60335-2-76.
    2. 2.
      Perimeter fence or wall
      No electric fence shall be installed or used unless it is completely surrounded by a nonelectrical fence or wall that is not less than six feet in height. When wrought iron or similar open-style metal fence is utilized, nonelectrified fencing in the front yard setback may be increased to six feet in height when installed in conjunction with an approved electrified fence. Otherwise, the nonelectrical fence or wall shall not exceed the maximum height allowed in the underlying zoning district. In no case shall the electrical fence be taller than two feet higher than the nonelectrical fence.
    3. 3.
      Location
      Electric  fences  shall  be  restricted in location  to the  same areas where other fences are  allowed  in the  underlying zoning district.
    4. 4.
      Warning signs
      Electric fences shall be clearly identified with warning  signs  that are  spaced 60 feet apart.  Such  signs  shall not exceed one square foot in area.
    5. 5.
      Accessibility
      If required  by the Fire Department, a Knox box shall be required  and installed to support emergency access to properties contained within electric fences.
    6. 6.
      Monitoring
      Electric fences shall be equipped with a monitoring alarm system activated simultaneously with the electrification  of the fence.
    7. 7.
      Hold harmless/indemnification agreement
      The owner of the electric fence and/or  the owner of the property  on which such fence is located shall provide the City with a hold harmless/indemnification agreement in a form satisfactory to the City Attorney prior to installation  of the electric fence.
    8. 8.
      When  allowed as a Special Use  in the CC district, a monitored  electrified fence shall be limited to enclosing permitted outdoor  storage areas or warehouse type uses or upon determination of site-specific characteristics, such  as compatibility with adjacent uses, preponderance of criminal activity, site design issues such as isolated location  or easy access to building entry,  or criminally-targeted uses involving indoor  storage of  chemicals, pharmaceuticals, and  similar materials that require  the specialized protection of an electric fence. All other standards in this section shall be met.

(Ord. No. S2012-023, § 1, 10-8-2012; Ord. No. S2023-012, §§ 1, 2, 03/23/2023)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.6. Perimeter Fences and Walls Abutting Rights-of-Way

Fences or walls forming a perimeter around multiple buildings in a development and located within 15 feet of a street or public right-of-way shall:

  1. a.
    Be of a uniform style;
  2. b.
    Be  constructed of  brick,  stone, concrete, covered with stucco or similar  finish,  vinyl, vertical wooden board,  wrought iron, aluminum,  or other customary material;
  3. c.
    Be located at least  ten feet outside the public right-of-way;
  4. d.
    Include breaks, offsets,  access points, decorative columns, or other design details  in the wall plane  at least  every  100  feet  as illustrated  in Figure  30-5.D.6,  Required Fencing Offsets;  and
  5. e.
    Comply with the requirements of Section  30-5.B.4.e, Screening.
Figure 30-5.D.6: Required Fencing Offsets
Example of required fencing offsets
Off-sets and other features help enhance the appearance of fences or walls adjacent to public streets.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 12.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2014-021, § 1d, 11-24-2014)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.7. Visibility Clearance

Fences and walls shall not exceed a maximum height of 30 inches when located within required sight triangles or areas needed for visibility.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.8. Prohibited Fences

  1. Barbed Wire, Concertina Wire, and Aboveground Electrified Fences
    In all zoning districts, fences using barbed or concertina wire and aboveground electrified fences shall be prohibited unless allowed consistent with standards in Section 30-5.D.5 or through  an  approved Security  Plan  (see Section  30-5.D.5,  Exemptions). Underground electric fences designed for control of domestic animals are allowed.
  2. Debris, Junk, Rolled Plastic, Sheet Metal,  Plywood, or Other Waste Materials
    Fences or walls  made of  debris,  junk, rolled  plastic,  sheet metal,  plywood,  or waste materials are  prohibited  in all zoning  districts unless such  materials have  been recycled and  reprocessed, for marketing to the general public, as building materials designed to resemble new  building materials (e.g.,  picket  fencing  made from recycled plastic  and fiber).

(Ord. No. S2012-023, § 2, 10-8-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.9. Appearance

  1. a.
    Customary Materials
    Fences and walls shall be constructed of any combination of treated wood posts and planks, rot-resistant wood (such as cypress or redwood), wrought iron, decorative metal materials, chain link, brick, stone, masonry materials, or products designed to resemble these materials. Where wood, masonry, or other opaque materials are specified for particular types of screening or buffering fences or walls, all other fence materials are prohibited.
  2. b.
    Finished Side to Outside
    Wherever a fence or wall is installed, if one side of the fence or wall appears more "finished" than the other (e.g., one side has visible support framing and the other does not), then the more "finished" side of the fence shall face the perimeter of the lot rather than the interior of the lot.  Where practical difficulties exist with regard to future maintenance of the fence and/or aesthetic issues are minimal, such as when a fence on one property is installed in close proximity to an existing fence on another property or if the fence being installed is a significant distance away from any adjoining property or properties, the city manager may waive or modify this requirement and may impose conditions for such waiver or modification.
    Figure 30-5.D.9.b: Fence Appearance
    Example of fence appearance
    In cases where a fence is visible from a public street, supports or internal bracing should face the interior of the site.
  3. c.
    Compatibility of Materials along a Single Lot Side
    All fencing or wall segments located along a single lot side shall be composed of a uniform style and colors compatible with other parts of the fence and with the associated buildings.
  4. d.
    Landscape Screening
    1. 1.
      As a means of softening the appearance of fencing and walls visible from public streets, all fences and walls exceeding four feet in height, if located within 15 feet of a public right-of-way, shall be supplemented with landscape screening in accordance with the following standards.
      1. a.
        Landscaping Required
        1. 1.
          Landscaping consistent with the 10 foot street yard depth standards noted in Table 30-5.B.4.c.5, Street Yard Buffer Requirements, shall be installed between the fence or wall and the public right-of-way. 
        2. 2.
          Where fences are installed that are less than 25 percent opaque above 48 inches, the required trees may be reduced by one-half.
        3. 3.
          Exemption:  For single-family and two- to four-family dwellings, front yard fences of any length and corner side yard fences less than 100 feet in length that otherwise meet the other requirements contained in this Section 30-5.D are exempt from this landscaping requirement.  If longer than 100 feet, fences must be landscaped or use the detailing required for buffer fences on the outside.
      2. b.
        Substitution of Understory Trees
        One understory or ornamental tree may be substituted for every three evergreen shrubs provided that the tree meets the size standards of Section 30-5.B.3.e, Planting Standards.
      3. c.
        Integration with Other Required Landscaping
        Required landscape screening for fences or walls may be integrated into the landscaping required for vehicular use area screening or perimeter buffers, provided the standards in each section are maintained.
      4. d.
        Setback from Right-of-Way
        Fences and walls subject to the standards of this subsection shall be located no closer than five feet from the edge of the public right-of-way to ensure adequate room for required landscape screening.
    2. 2.
      Fences and walls located along interior side lot lines shall be exempt from these landscape screening requirements.
  5. e.
    Maintenance Required
    All fences and walls and associated landscaping shall be maintained in good repair and in a safe and attractive condition, including but not limited to, the replacement of missing, decayed, or broken structural and decorative elements. All fences and walls shall receive regular structural maintenance to prevent and address sagging and weathering of surfaces visible from the public right-of-way. Any deteriorated, damaged, or decayed fence materials shall be promptly repaired, and any fence or wall post or section that leans more than ten degrees from vertical shall be promptly repaired to correct that condition.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 5.2, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2014-021, § 1e-1f, 11-24-2014)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.D.10. Retaining walls

Retaining walls in excess of eight feet in height shall be faced with natural or artificial stone, brick, form-liner art or patterns, or vegetation in order to avoid a stark appearance. Foreground landscaping or attached vegetative screening of retaining walls or retaining wall sections over six feet in height and closer than 35 feet to a public or private street shall also be required in accordance with the following standards. Foreground landscaping or attached vegetative screening in accordance with the following standards shall also be required for any retaining walls or retaining wall sections over 12 feet in height regardless of location relative to a public or private street. Attached vegetative screening shall consist of stainless steel or other approved vine supports structurally integrated into the wall to support vine planting from the approved species list for such applications. Foreground landscaping or attached vegetative screening may be considered part of any required buffer, as applicable. Retaining walls 12 feet or less in height shall be exempted from the foreground landscaping or attached vegetative screening requirements if faced with natural or artificial stone.

Figure 30-5.D.10: Example of Vegetative Screening
Vegetative screening example

Terracing of retaining walls is allowed and encouraged, provided that no single retaining wall shall exceed 20 feet in height and each successive wall shall be set back at least five feet from the face of the lower wall. The application of foreground landscaping or attached vegetative screening shall be based on the cumulative height of the terraced walls except that a one level reduction in required landscaping from the following table shall be allowed.

Table 30-5.D.5: Required Retaining Wall Landscaping
RETAINING WALL HEIGHTREQUIRED FOREGROUND LANDSCAPING OR VEGETATIVE SCREENING (EITHER/OR)
MINIMUM REQUIRED FOREGROUND LANDSCAPINGMINIMUM REQUIRED ATTACHED VEGETATIVE SCREENING
>6—10 feet5-foot wide planting strip at wall base with 3 gallon-sized shrubs planted 5 feet on center5-foot wide planting strip at wall base with attached vegetative screening supports covering 50% of wall face and plantings consisting of 2 gallon-sized vines planted 3 feet on center
>10—20 feet5-foot wide planting strip at wall base with 3 gallon-sized shrubs planted 5 feet on center plus 1 small maturing tree for every 30 linear feet5-foot wide planting strip at wall base with attached vegetative screening supports covering 50% of wall face and plantings consisting of 2 gallon-sized vines planted 3 feet on center
>20—30 feet8-foot wide planting strip at wall base with 3 gallon-sized shrubs planted 5 feet on center plus 1 small maturing tree for every 30 linear feet5-foot wide planting strip at wall base with attached vegetative screening supports covering 60% of wall face and plantings consisting of 2 gallon-sized vines planted 3 feet on center
>30 feet10-foot wide planting strip at wall base with 3 gallon-sized shrubs planted 5 feet on center plus 1 large maturing tree for every 40 linear feet5 foot wide planting strip at wall base with attached vegetative screening supports covering 75% of wall face and plantings consisting of 2 gallon-sized vines planted 3 feet on center

(Ord. No. S2014-021, §1g, 11-24-2014.)

Effective on: 11/24/2014

30-5.D.11. Nonconforming Fences

Nonconforming fences and walls existing on November 1, 2014 may be maintained in accordance with subsection 30-5.D.9.e. above.   Such nonconforming fences and walls, if damaged or destroyed beyond fifty percent (50%) of their value, shall be brought into compliance with the provisions of this Section unless, in the determination of the city manager, the affected property owner(s) would be inequitably affected, such as damage to a portion of a fence or wall erected along the edge of several lots where compliance with height, setback, design or landscaping standards would subject the owner(s) to significant impacts not shared by similarly-situated or neighboring properties, such as loss of usable lot area.

Effective on: 11/24/2014

30-5.E.1. Purpose

The purpose of this section is to regulate light trespass to ensure the safety of motorists and pedestrians, to minimize any health and environmental impacts from high levels of artificial light at night, and to ensure lighting does not adversely affect land uses on adjacent properties or uses dependent upon dark skies. More specifically, this section is intended to:

  1. Regulate lighting to assure that excessive light spillage and glare are not directed at adjacent properties, neighboring areas, and motorists;
  2. Ensure that all site lighting is designed and installed to maintain adequate lighting levels on site while limiting negative lighting impacts on adjacent lands and upward reflection or visibility that reduces dark sky conditions; and
  3. Provide security for persons and land.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.2. Applicability

  1. General
    The provisions of this section shall apply to all development in the City unless exempted in accordance with Section 30-5.E.3, Exemptions.
  2. Time of Compliance
    A lighting  plan  shall  be  submitted with an  application   for  a  Site  Plan  (see  Section 30-2.C.5),  Subdivision Plan  (see Section   30-2.C.6.d), Building  Permit  (see  Section [@@9372]), or Temporary Permit (see Section  30-2.C.10), as appropriate.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.3. Exemptions

The following is exempted from the exterior lighting standards of this section:

  1. Existing athletic field lighting (but shall comply with Section 30-5.E.8);
  2. City-owned, -operated, or -maintained street lights located within a street right-of-way or other easement granted to the City; and
  3. Lighting and fixtures approved as part of a Certificate of Appropriateness (see Section 30-2.C.8).

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.4. General Standards for Exterior Lighting

  1. Hours of Illumination
    Public and institutional uses, commercial uses, and industrial uses (see Table 30-4.A, Use Table) that are  adjacent to existing residential development or vacant land in residential districts shall turn off all exterior lighting—except lighting necessary for security  or emergency purposes—by 10:00 p.m. or within one hour of closing, whichever occurs first. For the purposes of this subsection, lighting "necessary for security or emergency purposes" shall be construed to mean the minimum amount  of exterior lighting necessary to  illuminate  possible points of entry or exit into a  structure, to  illuminate  exterior walkways,  or to illuminate  outdoor  storage areas. Such  lighting may  be  activated by motion sensor devices.
  2. Illumination Direction
    In all districts, lighting shall be directed downward. In addition, upwardly-directed  lighting shall  not  be  used to illuminate  structures, except for lighting for the  American  flag or low-wattage architectural lighting approved during Site Plan review.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.5. Design Standards for Exterior Lighting

All exterior lighting shall meet the following standards:

  1. a.
    Maximum Lighting Height
    1. 1.
      Except for athletic fields or performance areas, the height of outdoor lighting, whether mounted on poles, walls, or by other means, shall be no greater than 20 feet in residential districts and OI, NC, MU, and DT districts, and no greater than 30 feet in UC, MAC, LC, CC, BP and industrial districts.
    2. 2.
      Wherever possible, illumination of outdoor seating areas, building entrances, and walkways shall be accomplished by use of ground mounted fixtures not more than eight feet in height.
  2. b.
    Shielding
    1. 1.
      Exterior
      Light fixtures in excess of 40 watts or 600 lumens shall use full cut-off lenses or hoods to prevent glare or spillover from the project site onto adjacent lands and streets.
    2. 2.
      Canopies
      No light source in a canopy structure shall extend downward further than the lowest edge of the canopy ceiling.
    3. 3.
      Awnings
      Awnings or canopies used for building accents over doors, windows, etc., shall not be internally illuminated (i.e., from underneath or behind the awning) unless the awning material is entirely opaque (see Figure 30-5.E.5.b, Awning Illumination).
Figure 30-5.E.5.b.3: Awning Illumination
Do's and don'ts of awning illumination
Awnings may not be internally illuminated, unless the awning material is entirely opaque.
  1. c.
    Maximum Illumination Levels
    All outdoor lighting and indoor lighting visible from outside shall be designed and located so that the maximum illumination measured in foot-candles at ground level at a property line shall not exceed the standards in Table 30-5.E.5, Maximum Illumination Levels. Cut-off lighting shall be designed to direct light downward (e.g., shoe box style).
Table 30-5.E.5.C: Maximum Illumination Levels
TYPE OF USE [1]MAXIMUM ILLUMINATION AT PROPERTY LINE (FOOTCANDLES)
Residential or Public and Institutional Use0.5
Commercial Use [2]2.5
Industrial Use2.5
Parking  lots [3]2.5
NOTES:
[1] See Table 30-4.A, Use Table.
[2] Includes mixed-use developments.
[3] The minimum illumination level at the property  line shall be 0.2 foot-candle.
Figure 30-5.E.5.c: Maximum Illumination Levels
Diagram illustrating maximum illumination levels
Exterior lighting should be configured to avoid significant light trespass on adjacent lands.
  1. d.
    Coordination with Tree  Locations
    Site lighting must be designed to consider proposed tree locations. The location and size of parking lot islands is based on requirements in Section  30-5.B.4.c, Vehicular Use Area Landscaping. Site lighting must be located no closer than 15 feet from the trunk of a canopy tree and five feet from the trunk of an understory tree.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 6.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-024, § 21, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2019-037, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2026-018, § 1, 05/26/2026)

Effective on: 5/26/2026

30-5.E.6. Wall Pack Lights

Wall packs on buildings may be used at entrances to a building to light unsafe areas. They are not intended to draw attention to the building or provide general building or site lighting. Wall packs on the exterior of the building shall be fully shielded (e.g., true cut-off type bulb or light source not visible from off-site) to direct the light vertically downward and be of low wattage (preferably 100 watts or lower). Wall pack light sources visible from any location off the site are prohibited.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.7. Exemptions for a Security Plan

Government facilities, parks and open areas, public safety, and other uses (see Table 30-4.A, Use Table) where sensitive or dangerous materials are stored may submit to the City Manager a Security Plan proposing exterior lighting that deviates from the standards in this subsection. The City Manager shall approve, or approve with conditions, the Security Plan and its proposed deviation from the standards of this subsection, upon finding that:

  1. The proposed deviation from the standards is necessary for the adequate protection of the public;
  2. The condition, location, or use of the land, or the history of activity in the area, indicates the land or any materials stored or used on it are in significantly greater danger of theft or damage, or members of the public are at greater risk for harm than on surrounding land; and
  3. The proposed deviation from the standards is the minimum required, and will not have a significant adverse effect on neighboring lands.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.8. Illumination of Athletic Fields and Performance Areas

Lighting of athletic fields and performance areas shall comply with the following standards:

  1. Glare Control Package
    All lighting fixtures shall be equipped with an existing glare control package (e.g., louvers, shields, or similar devices) and aimed  so that their beams are directed and fall within the primary playing or performance area.
  2. Hours of Operation
    The hours of operation for the lighting system for any game or event  shall not continue more than 30 minutes after the end of the game or event.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.E.9.. Reserved

Editor's Note--Ord. No. S2025-018, 06/23/2025 repealed § 30-5.E.9. Formerly, such section pertained to Sign Lighting.

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.F.1. Purpose and Intent

The purpose for this section is to establish the community form standards for development in the City. More specifically, this section is intended to:

  1. Support street development as an integral component of community design;
  2. Provide safe, efficient, and convenient vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian access and circulation patterns within and between developments;
  3. Incorporate design features to enhance the visual quality of the streetscape;
  4. Foster a pedestrian-friendly distribution of land uses and street network;
  5. Assure safe access to and from streets by emergency vehicles; and
  6. Reduce interference with through traffic by other vehicles, bicycles, or pedestrians entering, leaving, and crossing streets.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 7.1, 9-10-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.2. Applicability

  1. Unless exempted in accordance with Section 30-5.F.3, Exemptions, or except where otherwise expressly stated, the standards in this section apply to all development on lots in the City, as well as to all street right-of-way.
  2. Compliance with these standards, to the maximum extent practicable, shall also apply to redevelopment of an existing structure, building, or use when it is expanded, enlarged, or otherwise increased in intensity in an amount equivalent to or beyond 50 percent.
  3. In the event of conflict or overlap with the standards in this section and the standards in Article 30-6: Subdivisions, the standards in Article 30-6 shall control.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.3. Exemptions

  1. Development limited to a single lot shall be exempted from the following standards in this section except as may be required based on a traffic impact analysis or related analysis consistent with Section 30-5.M:
    1. Section 30-5.F.4, Streets;
    2. Section 30-5.F.5, Block Design; and
    3. Section 30-5.F.6, Development Entry Points;
  2. Lots within the Conservation (CD) district are exempted from the requirements in this section.

(Ord. No. S2013-014, § 6a, 7-22-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.4. Streets

Streets in the City shall comply with the standards for public infrastructure in Article 30-6: Subdivisions, and the following:

  1. a.
    Street Design
    1. 1.
      Conformity to Existing Maps or Plans
      The street layout shall conform to the arrangement, width, and location of proposed streets on any officially adopted highway or transportation plan or map. In areas where such plans were not completed, the streets shall be designed and located in accordance with:
      1. a.
        Existing and proposed streets;
      2. b.
        Existing topography;
      3. c.
        Natural features such as streams and stands of mature hardwood trees;
      4. d.
        Public convenience and safety;
      5. e.
        The proposed use of land to be served by streets; and
      6. f.
        NCDOT Official Transportation Plan requirements for right-of-way reservation and/or dedication.
    2. 2.
      Tracts or Sites Over Five Acres in Size
      Development, to the maximum extent practicable, shall be arranged so as to allow for the opening of future streets and, and where relevant, logical resubdivision.
    3. 3.
      New Street Grades
      Street grades for new streets, to the maximum extent practicable, shall be established to avoid excessive removal of vegetation or mass grading.
    4. 4.
      Continuation of Adjacent Streets
      Proposed street layouts shall be coordinated with the existing street system in surrounding areas. Existing streets shall, to the maximum extent practicable, be extended to provide access to adjacent subdivisions and to provide for additional points of ingress and egress.
    5. 5.
      Connection with State Streets
      Permits authorizing connection to any existing street or roadway shall be submitted to the City prior to any construction on the street or roadway.
    6. 6.
      Design Speed
      Streets located within: the DT-1 district; the DT-2 district, except for Grove, Rowan, Ramsey, and Green Streets; and local streets within residential neighborhoods shall be designed with a maximum design speed of 25 miles per hour.
    7. 7.
      Private Streets
      Except for the ability to locate vehicular gates in accordance with Section 30-5.F.4.a.10, Vehicular Gates, private streets shall be built to the same standard as public streets, in accordance with the following:
      1. a.
        In General
        1. 1.
          Private streets will be permitted to serve as access within developments with individual dwelling unit ownership; however, reservation of corridors for thoroughfares and utilities may be required if such are indicated on official plans as adopted by the City Council. Private streets may be used in residential development to provide for security and privacy.
        2. 2.
          The common area that comprises private streets shall be sized with a width consistent with City's right-of-way standards for the traffic service classification the street is designed for. Private street areas shall be a part of the common area and shall be owned and maintained by the homeowners' association. Setbacks required for the zoning district in which the development is located shall be measured from the margin of the common area that is the proxy for a private street right-of-way or street easement.
        3. 3.
          Private streets shall be shown on a Final Plat as private right-of-way.
        4. 4.
          In residential development, a right-of-way shall be designated and shown as a private street on the Final Plat.
      2. b.
        Maintenance
        All subdivisions and residential development with private streets in which land is intended to be sold shall establish a homeowners' association for maintenance of such streets. The homeowners' documents shall provide for adequate enforcement and funding to insure maintenance, and the documents shall be approved as to form by the City Attorney as part of the development permit approval procedure. In development retained under single ownership where units or lots will be for rental purposes only, maintenance of private streets shall be provided by the owner (along with open space or other facilities for the purpose of common use).
      3. c.
        Access to Government Agency
        In any development where private streets are provided, a Final Plat shall be prepared for City approval and recorded with the Cumberland County Register of Deeds, which identifies all private streets. The Final Plat shall include a note indicating that any governmental agency, personnel, or equipment shall be granted perpetual access over any private streets, to accomplish or fulfill any service or function for which the agency is responsible. In addition, any agency or organization designated by a governmental agency to perform a designated function shall also retain the same access granted to any governmental agency. It shall be indicated on the Final Plat that any agency exercising its access rights shall have the same rights and only such liabilities as it would have on any public lands, right-of-way, or easements.
      4. d.
        Certification of Construction
        Upon completion of construction of private streets and related facilities, including drainage systems, the developer shall provide for an inspection of all such facilities by a registered professional designated for such approvals, who shall provide in writing a statement that all private streets and related facilities are constructed in accordance with the requirement of this section and the approved plans. Such statement shall be affixed with the seal of the registered professional and be submitted to the City Manager and approved prior to the recording of a Final Plat. Certification of water and sewer systems shall also be sealed by a registered engineer.
      5. e.
        Signage
        Any traffic control devices may differ in material, but not in size, shape, color, or any other way from the requirements of uniform devices in the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices as defined in North Carolina General Statutes Section 136-30(d).
      6. f.
        Disclosures
        1. 1.
          Every Subdivision Plan approved as provided for in this subsection for residential development containing private streets shall contain the following statement:

          "Street right-of-way shown on this plat are for private use, have not been accepted for maintenance by the Fayetteville City Council, and are to be maintained by _____________(in the case where a homeowners' association owns the streets, homeowners' association shall be typed in the blank; in the case where lots are deeded to the center of the private street, the term "lot owner" shall be typed in the blank)."
        2. 2.
          Every Final Plat including private streets shall contain the following statement:

          "Every deed conveying a lot shown on the plat approved under the provisions of this chapter shall contain the following statement: "The street upon which the property described herein abuts is a private street, the cost of maintenance which shall be borne by either the grantee herein or a homeowners' association as set forth in any restrictive covenants applicable to this conveyance and recorded in Book _____________, Page _____________, of the Cumberland County Registry, which shall be a covenant to run with the land."
        3. 3.
          Any declaration of conditions and/or restrictive covenants required to be recorded by this section shall contain provisions setting forth the ownership, and responsibility for maintenance of any private streets within the property subject to such declaration of conditions and restrictive covenants.
    8. 8.
      On-Street Parking
      1. a.
        Streets within the DT-1 or DT-2 district shall, to the maximum extent practicable, incorporate on-street parking,
      2. b.
        Except for alleys, arterials, and collectors, all streets in other districts served by curb and gutter in the City are encouraged to provide on-street parking on at least one side.
      3. c.
        Except where approved by the City in advance, all on-street parking shall be parallel to the curb.
    9. 9.
      Underground Utilities

All utility providers (e.g., cable, telephone, gas, electric, water and sewer, etc.) installing service lines for their respective utilities in the public right-of-way are required to adhere to the standards and procedures of the City Engineering and Infrastructure Department for design, coordination and communication. The intent is to maximize the potential for co-location in trenches and to standardize the design of utilities.

  1. 10.
    Vehicular Gates
    1. a.
      For the purposes of preserving access to public and private lands by citizens, utility companies, and emergency service providers, vehicular gates, barriers, or other devices intended to obstruct vehicular traffic along a public street right-of-way shall be prohibited.
    2. b.
      Vehicular gates are allowed on private streets provided the gate is equipped with City-approved devices that allow emergency services to gain access to the street and meets all requirements set forth in the current adopted version of the North Carolina Fire Code.
  2. 11.
    Minimum Street Width
    Street widths shall be minimized to the maximum extent practicable, but in all instances shall comply with applicable City standards in Table 30-6.A.4.a, Street Right-of-Way Widths.
  3. 12.
    Sight Distance Triangles
    1. a.
      No object (including signs) shall interfere with visibility within the sight distance triangle of an intersection of streets (assuming eye level of 40 inches or less from a distance of 20 feet from the edge of the pavement).
    2. b.
      Sight triangles of 20 feet by 20 feet as measured from the intersection of right-of-way lines shall be preserved at all intersections (see Figure 30-5.F.4.a.12, Sight Distance Triangles).
    3. c.
      Additional sight triangles of ten feet by 70 feet shall be provided for access onto thoroughfare streets.
    4. d.
      Sight distance triangles shall be noted on the Subdivision Plan and Final Plats, as appropriate.

 

Editor's Note 6/28/2017:  Corrected numbering of this section required inserting Sections 30-5.F.4.b and 30-5.F.4.c and reserving them for future use to avoid incorrect references in numerous parts of the Code. 

b.  Reserved for future use.

c.  Reserved for future use.

 

Figure 30-5.F.4.a.12: Sight Distance Triangles
Diagram illustrating sight distance triangles
Buildings, fences, walls, vegetation, and other elements may not obstruct sight distances at street intersections.

 

  1. d.
    Cul-de-Sac and Street Stubs
    1. 1.
      Street Stubs shall be allowed only on a temporary basis to serve a phase or portion of a subdivision. Street stubs longer than 150 linear feet shall include a paved hammerhead turnaround or cul-de-sac that meets the city's minimum standards and shall be located within the dedicated right-of-way or easement. In the event that a final plat (See Section 30-2.C.6.e, Final Plat) for the phase or portion of a subdivision served by a temporary street stub is submitted for approval or recording, the Final Plan shall include a notation that the street is temporary, and that additional modifications to the street will occur when the adjacent area is developed. Final Plat submissions must also fulfill the requirements as set forth in Section 30-6.B.6, Final Plat and all other applicable sections.
    2. 2.
      Except where allowed as part of a Special Use Permit (see Section 30-2.C.7, Special Use Permit), cul-de-sac streets shall not extend for more than 800 feet as measured from the center of the cul-de-sac turn around to the nearest right-of way boundary of the adjoining street right-of-way intersection.
    3. 3.
      Culs-de-sac in single-family residential areas shall include a paved turn-around having a minimum radius of 37 feet from the center to the back of curb. Within multi-family residential areas or commercial areas a minimum radius of 45 feet shall be provided.
    4. 4.
      In no case shall a cul-de-sac serve more than 25 lots in a development.
  2. e.
    Alleys
    1. 1.
      Alleys meeting the City's minimum standards shall be provided along the rear property lines of lots intended for new detached residential, attached residential, and condominium dwellings when such lots:
      1. a.
        Are part of a block face with an average lot width of 50 feet or less; or
      2. b.
        Front a collector or arterial street (regardless of the average lot width).
    2. Zero lot line development of five or fewer dwellings in neighborhoods where alleys do not exist are exempted from the requirements of this subsection.
  1.   
    1. 2.
      Lots served by alleys in accordance with this subsection shall access garages or off-street parking areas from the alley, as opposed to a street.
    2. 3.
      Lots served by alleys in accordance with this subsection shall not have driveways in front or corner side yard areas.
    3. 4.
      Alleys shall not be dead-end streets, and shall only intersect with streets.
    4. 5.
      Alleys shall not include pavement widths of less than 14 feet or more than 16 feet.
    5. 6.
      Alleys with a pavement width exceeding 14 feet shall:
      1. a.
        Include a curb cut, driveway apron, and sidewalk crossing at the intersection with a street configured to appear as a driveway; or
      2. b.
        Be screened by primary or accessory structures or trees located to minimize views down the alley corridor from adjacent streets.
  1. f.
    Internal Street Connectivity
    1. 1.
      Minimum Connectivity Index Score Required
      Except in the AR and DT-1 or DT-2 districts, all development shall achieve an internal street connectivity score in accordance with Table 30-5.F.4.f, Minimum Street Connectivity Index:
Figure 30-5.F.4.f.2: Street Connectivity Index
Diagram illustrating street connectivity index
New internal streets should connect with each other and external streets as necessary to meet the minimum index score.
Table 30-5.F.4.f: Minimum Street Connectivity Index
DISTRICT WHERE DEVELOPMENT IS PROPOSEDMINIMUM CONNECTIVITY INDEX SCORE
SF-15, SF-10, BP, LI, HI1.40
SF-6, MH, PD-EC1.50
MR-5, OI, NC, LC, MU, CC, PD-R, PD-TN1.60
  1.   
    1. 2.
      Connectivity Index Score Calculation
      1. a.
        The connectivity index for a development is calculated by dividing its links by its nodes. Figure 30-5.F.4.f.2, Street Connectivity Index, provides an example of how to calculate the connectivity index. Nodes (stars) exist at street intersections and cul-de-sac heads within the development. Links (circles) are stretches of road that connect nodes. Street stub-outs are considered as links, but temporary dead-end streets internal to a development or alleys are not counted as links. One link beyond every node that exists in the development and provides access to the street system outside the development shall be included in the index calculation. In the diagram, there are 36 links (circles) and 21 nodes (stars); therefore the connectivity index is 1.71 (36/21 = 1.71).
      2. b.
        Mid-block pedestrian access, required in accordance with Section 30-5.F.5.c, Mid-Block Access, will also be considered as a connection for the purposes of calculating the connectivity index.
    2. 3.
      Reduction in Minimum Index Score
      The minimum connectivity index score may be reduced if the owner/developer demonstrates it is impossible to achieve due to topographic conditions, natural features, existing road configurations, or adjacent existing development patterns.
    3. 4.
      Pedestrian Connections Required
      Figure 30-5.F.4.f.4: Pedestrian Connections
      Diagram illustrating pedestrian connections
      Connecting cul-de-sac heads with the greater sidewalk/trail network increases pedestrian connectivity.
      1. a.
        A right-of-way 20 feet wide for pedestrian/ bicycle access between a cul-de-sac head or street turnaround and the sidewalk system of the closest adjacent street or pedestrian pathway (as shown in Figure 30-5.F.4.f.4, Pedestrian Connections) shall be required whenever the city manager determines a proposed cul-de-sac or street turnaround:
        1. 1.
          Is in close proximity with significant pedestrian generators or destinations such as schools, parks, trails, employment centers, or similar features; or
        2. 2.
          Creates an unreasonable impediment to pedestrian circulation.
      2. b.
        This pedestrian connection shall count as a connection for the purpose of calculating the connectivity index.
      3. c.
        A pedestrian/bicycle access shall not be required between a new subdivision and a street within an adjacent residential subdivision platted more than 12 months prior thereto.
  1. g.
    External Street Connectivity
    1. 1.
      Purpose
      These external street connectivity standards are proposed to ensure the establishment and continuation of a logical, interconnected street network in the City.
    2. 2.
      General Requirements
      1. a.
        The arrangement of streets in a development shall provide for the alignment and continuation of existing or proposed streets into adjoining lands.
      2. b.
        When required by the Technical Review Committee, street rights-of-way shall be extended to or along adjoining property boundaries such that a roadway connection or street stub shall be provided for development where practicable and feasible in each direction (north, south, east, and west) for development which abuts vacant lands.
    3. 3.
      Review Criteria
      The Technical Review Committee shall base its decision regarding the type, location, and configuration of required new street connections on the following criteria:
      1. a.
        The Site Plan or Subdivision Plan's consistency with subdivision access standards in Table 30-5.F.6;
      2. b.
        The impact on travel distance and response time for emergency service providers resulting from new street connections;
      3. c.
        The need for and potential to disperse traffic and reduce congestion at intersections from new street connections;
      4. d.
        The ability to reduce travel time for residents from the inclusion of new street connections;
      5. e.
        The potential of a new street connection to reduce negative impacts on air quality (by reducing vehicles miles travelled or driving time);
      6. f.
        The potential impact on existing development patterns, compatibility, or safety from new street connections; and
      7. g.
        The potential impact on natural areas or natural features from new street connections.
    4. In no instance shall a new street connection result in a reclassification of an existing street to a new street classification higher than a collector street, nor shall a new street connection be approved if it results in a reduction in existing level of service by two categories or more for any existing street or intersection serving the new development.
  1.   
    1. 4.
      Notification of Connected Streets
      1. a.
        At all locations where streets terminate with no street connection, but a future connection is planned or accommodated, a sign shall be installed at the location with the words "FUTURE ROAD CONNECTION" to inform property owners.
      2. b.
        The Final Plat (see Section 30-2.C.6.e, Final Plat) shall identify all stub streets and include a notation that all street stubs are intended for connection with future streets on adjoining undeveloped property. (Also see Section 30-6.A.4.a Public Streets and Alleys.)
  1. h.
    Traffic Calming Measures
    Figure 30-5.F.4.h: Traffic Calming Measures
    Example of traffic calming measures
    Traffic calming devices are features that can be included within the right-of-way to slow traffic, and provide safer crossing for pedestrians. From top: bike entry path, elevated crosswalk, chicane, roundabout.
    1. 1.
      Minimal street widths, short block lengths, on-street parking, controlled intersections, roundabouts, and other traffic calming measures are encouraged on all local, and sub-collector streets, provided they do not interfere with emergency vehicle access.
    2. 2.
      In cases where residential development is organized around a grid street network, measures to interrupt or terminate long, linear street segments of over 800 linear feet shall be employed, to the maximum extent practicable. Such measures shall include, but shall not be limited to:
      1. a.
        Stop signs at street intersections;
      2. b.
        Round-abouts, or traffic circles;
      3. c.
        Curvilinear street segments to slow traffic and interrupt monotonous streetscapes;
      4. d.
        Roadway striping to limit vehicular cartway widths or accommodate bike lanes; and
      5. e.
        Speed tables or elevated pedestrian street crossings.
    3. 3.
      Sidewalk bulb-outs are discouraged on streets less than 28 feet wide, but are encouraged on wider streets as a traffic calming device and to reduce crossing distance for pedestrians, where practicable.

(Ord. No. S2011-008, §§ 2.1, 2.2, 7-25-2011; Ord. No. S2011-013, §§ 1.8, 12.2, 11-28-2011; Ord. No. S2012-001, § 7, 1-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-024, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2018-018, 6-25-2018; Ord. No. S2019-052, § 1, 09/23/2019; Ord. No. S2022-009, §§ 6-8, 05/23/2022)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.5. Block Design

  1. Block Length
    1. Block lengths shall be longer than 200 feet.
    2. Average block length shall be 800 feet or less and no individual block length shall exceed 1,200 linear feet. However, the TRC may allow deviations from these block length standards in cases where:
      1. Environmental or topographic constraints exist;
      2. If a site has an irregular shape;
      3. If a longer block will reduce the number of railroad grade or major stream crossings; or
      4. Where longer blocks will result in less traffic through residential subdivisions from adjoining businesses or areas.
  2. Block Width
    To the maximum extent practicable, the width of any block shall be sufficient to permit at least two tiers of lots of appropriate depth for the zoning district exclusive of any public alleys, watercourses, or other right-of-way located outside platted lots.
  3. Mid-Block Access
    In cases where a block length exceeds 800 feet, sidewalks or multi-use paths shall be provided mid-block to connect parallel sidewalks on the long side of the block. A mid-block connector is not required when usable open space is within 1,500 feet of all lots in the development (See 30-5.C.3.b.2, Usability of Dedicated Land).

(Ord. S2013-022, 10-28-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.6. Development Entry Points

  1. Unless exempted in accordance with subsection (c) below, all developments shall provide access from the development to the street system outside the development in accordance with Table 30-5.F.6, Required Access:
Table 30-5.F.6: Required Access
DEVELOPMENT TYPE MINIMUM NUMBER OF ACCESS POINTS
RESIDENTIAL USE TYPES (# OF UNITS)
80 or fewer 1
81—160 2
161 + 3
ALL OTHER USE TYPES (TOTAL ACRES)
Less than 5 acres 1
5—20 acres 2
more than 20 acres 2 + 1 per every additional 20 acres
  1. Nothing in this section shall limit the total number of streets providing access to the street system outside a development, or exempt a development from meeting all applicable external street connectivity standards.
  2. Development shall be exempted from these standards if it is demonstrated the following conditions apply:
    1. No other street access points can be located due to existing lot configurations, absence of connecting streets, environmental, or topographic constraints;
    2. NCDOT will not authorize the required number of entrances; or
    3. Alternative access can be provided in a manner acceptable to the City that is supported by a transportation impact analysis.

(Ord. No. S2012-001, § 8, 1-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-008, § 5, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2013-014, § 6b, 7-22-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.7. Access to Lots

  1. No Direct Access to Arterial Streets
    Driveways serving individual lots shall not have direct access onto arterial streets, unless no alternative means of access (such as alleys or parallel access streets) exists, and it is unreasonable or impractical to require an alternative means of access.
  2. Limited Access to Collector Streets
    Unless no alternative means of access exists, such as alleys or parallel access streets, and it is unreasonable or impractical to require an alternative means of access, direct driveway access to collector streets shall be limited to lots containing multi-family dwellings, commercial, institutional, and industrial uses (see Table 30-4.A, Use Table). When direct driveway access to a collector street is allowed, driveway separation of 150 linear feet or more per street side shall be maintained.
  3. Review of Curb Cuts Required
    New curb cuts or access to individual lots shall be reviewed and approved by the City Manager prior to issuance of a Building Permit in accordance with Section [@@9372], Building Permit.
  4. Parking Lot Cross-Access
    New development shall comply with the parking lot cross-access standards in Section 30-5.A.3.f, Parking Lot Cross-Access.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.F.8. Maximum Driveway Width

  1. Maximum driveway width for the first 12 feet of driveway, as measured from the street pavement edge, shall be limited in accordance with the following maximum driveway width standards, unless the city manager determines a greater width is required because of projected traffic volumes:
    1. Single-family attached, detached, and two- to four-family residential: 16 feet for a single car garage, and 24 feet for a two or more car garage;
    2. Multi-family residential: 24 feet;
    3. Mixed-use development: 28 feet; and
    4. All other nonresidential uses: 36 feet.
  2. Driveways serving multi-family and nonresidential uses shall maintain a 20-foot-wide corridor that is free from signage, tree branches, or other "non-breakaway" structures greater than 36 inches in height for the purpose of maintaining clear emergency vehicle access. In all cases, driveways shall be designed and constructed in conformance with the current adopted version of the North Carolina Fire Code.

 

(Ord. No. S2014-015, § 6, 8-11-2014; Ord. No. S2019-041, 1, 08/26/2019)

Effective on: 8/11/2014

30-5.F.9. Sidewalks

  1. Location
    Sidewalks shall be required on both sides of all streets, except:
    1. On lots or sites engaged in active agricultural uses in the AR district (in these instances, no sidewalks are required);
    2. In residential subdivisions where the average lot size is greater than 35,000 square feet in area (in these instances, sidewalks are required on one side of the street);
    3. Along alleys;
    4. On frontages adjacent to NCDOT full control access roadways; and
    5. When an in-lieu fee consistent with the City's fee schedule is determined to be appropriate by the City.
  2. Configuration
    1. Except within the DT-1 district, sidewalks shall be at least five feet wide, and may be required to match the width of a connecting sidewalk that exceeds five feet in width;
    2. Sidewalks in the DT-1 district shall be at least eight feet wide, or wider depending upon sidewalk widths on adjacent properties or as established in an adopted plan or streetscape design for that area;
    3. Sidewalks shall be constructed of concrete, brick, textured pavers or a combination of these materials, consistent with an approved Site Plan, or with the established sidewalk patterns in the general area of the development;
    4. Except where brick or pavers are used, all public sidewalks shall maintain a brushed concrete finish for safety;
    5. Sidewalks shall be raised above the adjacent street level;
    6. Pedestrian street crossings at all intersections may be raised above the adjacent street level as a traffic-calming measure. Mid-block pedestrian crossings shall be raised above the pavement, and shall be a different material, or be striped for safety;
    7. Sidewalks shall connect with existing or planned sidewalks at property boundaries;
    8. New nonresidential, mixed-use, and multi-family development shall provide at least one on-site improved connection between the development and the adjacent public sidewalk system (planned or existing); and
    9. Multi-family development shall provide sidewalks as required by applicable State and Federal law.
  3. Payment-In-Lieu
    In accordance with procedures and appeals specified in Article 30-6.A.3.e, Payment In Lieu of Sidewalks, an applicant or developer may request the ability to provide payment-in-lieu for all or a portion of the required sidewalks when the following situations exist. The City Manager may approve or disapprove the request and may require a comparable amount of on-site pedestrian or multi-purpose facilities elsewhere on site instead of approving an in-lieu payment. Fees received in accordance with this subsection shall be used only for the development of new sidewalks and multi-use paths.
    1. The street is designated as a state highway or route subject to widening or improvement in the foreseeable future;
    2. The street is planned for improvement in accordance with the City’s transportation plan(s);
    3. Alternative on-site pedestrian facilities, such as trails, greenway, or multiuse paths, are adequate; or
    4. The right-of-way, developing lot, or lot abutting a proposed sidewalk is not suitable for sidewalks due to floodplains, wetlands, riparian buffers, required tree canopy retention areas, slopes exceeding 25 percent, or other unique site conditions.

(Ord. No. S2012-007, § 5, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2014-007 § 1 & 2, 2-10-2014; Ord. No. S2019-042, 1, 08/26/2019; Ord. No. S2022-009, § 9, 05/23/2022​​)

Effective on: 2/10/2014

30-5.F.10. Reserved*

*Editor’s note—Ord. No. S2012-016, § 7.2, adopted September 10, 2012, repealed Section 10, in its entirety, which pertained to street trees. See also the Code Comparative Table.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.G.1. Purpose

These single-family design standards are intended to protect and preserve the quality and character of single-family residential areas in the City. More specifically, the purposes of this section are to:

  1. Encourage distinctive, well-designed single-family detached residential development as a strategy for investing in the City's future;
  2. Promote human-scale design and foster the pedestrian environment within single-family detached residential areas;
  3. Reinforce the unique attributes found in different single-family detached areas of the City; and
  4. Protect and enhance property values.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.G.2. Applicability

  1. General
    Unless exempted in accordance with subsection (b) below, these standards shall apply to all new single-family detached and attached residential development in the City.
  2. Exemptions
    Single-family detached and attached residential development located within the DT-1 and HLO districts shall be exempted from these standards.
  3. Time of Review
    Review for compliance with these standards shall occur at the time of Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5), Planned Development (see Section 30-2.C.3), Subdivision Plan (see Section 30-2.6.d), or Building Permit (see Section [@@9372]), as appropriate.

(Ord. No. S2022-009, § 10, 05/23/2022)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.G.3. Design Standards

  1. Building Orientation
    1. To Streets
      All single-family detached dwelling shall be oriented so that the primary entrance faces the street. In the case of corner lots, the primary entrance shall face the street from which the dwelling derives its street address.
    2. Fronting Open Space
      1. Except for single-family detached or attached development in a subdivision approved prior to July 1, 2011, or proposed as part of a zero lot line development of three acres or less, at least ten percent of all single-family lots shall front upon or abut an open space dedicated area when part of a single-family detached or attached development.
      2. As an alternative to subsection (a) above, a developer may propose access to open space facilities within or adjacent to a development via a right-of-way 20 feet wide that is reasonably accessible to all residents in a development.
  2. Garage Standards
    1. Applicability
      The standards in this section shall apply to new attached and detached street-facing and side-loaded garages and car ports located on lots smaller than one acre in area and within 50 feet of the street right-of-way fronting a dwelling.
    2. Maximum Size
      1. Detached garages and car ports shall not exceed 30 percent of the dwelling's total floor area.
      2. A street-facing garage door(s) or carport opening shall not exceed 40 percent of the total front façade area of the dwelling.
  3. Roof Projections

All roof vents, pipes, antennas, satellite dishes, and other roof penetrations and equipment (except chimneys) shall be located on the rear elevations to the maximum extent practicable, or be otherwise configured to have a minimal visual impact as seen from the street.

(Ord. No. S2012-017, § 6, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2013-015, § 5.0, 7-22-2013; Ord. No. S2016-003,  §2, 4-25-2016; Ord. No. S2019-053, § 1, 09/23/2019)

Effective on: 4/25/2016

30-5.H.1. Purpose

These multi-family design standards are intended to:

  1. Establish a minimum level of design quality for three- to four-family residential, attached residential, and multi-family development to foster sustained value and stability within developments and neighborhoods; and
  2. Promote greater compatibility between three- to four-family residential, attached residential, and multi-family development and other allowable uses in the City through standards addressing building size and appearance, as well as off-street parking.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.H.2. Applicability

  1. The standards in this section shall apply to all three- to four-family residential, attached residential, and multi-family development in the City, but not individual residential units located on floors above a nonresidential use (e.g., residential units located on the second floor above commercial development).
  2. In addition, these standards shall apply to any three- to four-family residential, attached residential, or multi-family dwellings existing on July 1, 2011 if any expansion or alteration exceeds 50 percent of the building's assessed value at the time of expansion or alteration.
  3. These standards shall not apply to multi-family development consisting of single-family attached structures (townhouses).
  4. Three- to four-family residential structures in SF-15, SF-10, or SF-6 districts shall first meet the standards in Section 30-4.C.2.a.2 Dwellings, Two- to Four-Family. 

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.H.3. Time of Review

Review for compliance with these standards shall occur at the time of Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5), Planned Development (see Section 30-2.C.3), Subdivision Plan (see Section 30-2.C.6.d), or Building Permit (see Section 30-2.C.12), as appropriate.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.H.4. Multi-Family Design Standards

All three- to four-family residential, attached residential, and multi-family development subject to this section shall comply with the following standards:

  1. a.
    Building Orientation/ Articulation
    1. 1.
      All residential buildings shall be oriented and constructed so that the façade(s) in view from a public/private right-of-way shall contain substantially the same building articulation, features and elements that are used on the façade which compromises the primary entrance to the building.
    2. 2.
      Residential buildings located within the interior of a multi-building development that are not primarily in view from a public/private right-of-way are exempted from these building orientation/articulation standards.
    3. 3.
      It is desirable for buildings to be located proximate to the street right-of-way to frame the street edge, with off-street parking located to the side or rear. Therefore, when buildings are located proximate to the street (or corner), the front (and corner side) setback may be reduced as noted, within the MR-5 zoning district.
  2. b.
    Building Size
    1. 1.
      Individual building footprints shall not exceed a maximum of 20,000 square feet. Except when an existing hotel building is being converted into apartments.
    2. 2.
      The maximum length of any façade of an attached residential or multi-family structure shall be 220 linear feet, regardless of the number of units. For the purposes of this subsection, a change in building façade direction, or bend of 30º or greater in the façade line of the building, such that no subsequent façade line is parallel to the initial façade line, shall terminate the façade length measurement. Except when an existing hotel building is being converted into apartments.
    3. 3.
      No more than eight side-by-side townhouse units shall be attached in any one façade.
  3. c.
    Building Façades
    1. 1.
      Building façades of three- to four-family residential, attached residential, or and multi-family development facing the street shall incorporate wall offsets, in the form of projections or recesses in the façade plane, a minimum of every 30 feet of the building wall.
    2. 2.
      Wall offsets shall have a minimum depth of two feet.
    3. 3.
      Façades fronting the street shall provide a minimum of four of the following design features:
      1. a.
        One or more dormer windows or cupolas;
      2. b.
        A recessed entrance;
      3. c.
        A covered porch;
      4. d.
        Pillars, posts, or pilasters;
      5. e.
        One or more bay windows with a minimum 12-inch projection from the façade plane;
      6. f.
        Eaves with a minimum six-inch projection from the façade plane;
      7. g.
        A parapet wall with an articulated design, which entails design variation rather than a simple rectilinear form;
      8. h.
        Multiple windows with a minimum four-inch-wide trim; or
      9. i.
        Brick façade extending to the eaves.
  4. d.
    Garage Standards
    1. 1.
      When visible from the public right-of-way, garages serving three- to four-family residential, and attached residential uses shall be located on the side or behind the rear façades of such buildings. As an alternative minimum, a Type B, Property Perimeter Landscape Buffer (in accordance with Section 30-5.B.4.d) shall be provided and maintained to meet this requirement.
    2. 2.
      Garages serving multi-family buildings shall be located to the side or rear of such buildings, or be structured parking.
    3. 3.
      The exterior materials, design features, and roof form of garages shall be compatible with the building it serves.
  5. e.
    Parking Location
    Figure 30-5.H.4.e: Multi-family Parking Location
    Diagram illustrating multi-family parking location
    Multi-family development should locate surface parking lots away from street frontages.
    1. 1.
      No off-street surface parking lot associated with a three- to four-family residential, attached residential, or multi-family development shall be located between the structure and the street fronting the development, unless a landscape buffer is provided in accordance with Section .c.5, Street Yard Buffer.
    2. 2.
      Off-street surface parking located beside a building shall not occupy more than 25 percent of the parcel's right-of-way frontage. Associated driving areas shall be included as part of such off-street surface parking (see Figure 30-5.H.4.e, Multi-family Parking Location).
  6. f.
    Roof Form
    1. 1.
      Three- to four-family residential, attached residential, and multi-family structures shall incorporate roof pitches not less than 3:12; however, alternative roof forms or pitches may be allowed for small roof sections over porches, entryways, or similar features.
    2. 2.
      All roof vents, pipes, antennas, satellite dishes, and other roof penetrations and equipment (except chimneys) shall be located on the rear elevations or otherwise be configured, to the degree practicable, to have a minimal visual impact as seen from the street.
  7. g.
    Outdoor Activity Areas
    Outdoor activity areas, porches, decks, vending areas, and other similar site attributes and upper story balconies shall comply with Section 30-5.K.3, Transitional Standards - Facades, when adjacent to single-family detached dwellings.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 8.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-018, § 5.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2013-018, § 1a, 9-9-2013; Ord. No. S2016-003, §3, 4-25-2016; Ord. No. S2022-013, § 1, 05/23/2022)

Effective on: 4/25/2016

30-5.I.1. Purpose

These design standards are intended to identify the City's goals and expectations for commercial, office, and mixed-use development quality as a means of establishing greater predictability during the development review process. More specifically, the purposes of this section are to:

  1. Encourage establishment of a strong sense of place with vibrant commercial, office, and mixed-use development in key areas of the City;
  2. Encourage a more pedestrian-friendly environment through attention to human-scale design and site features;
  3. Foster greater compatibility between adjacent residential and nonresidential development; and
  4. Limit the impacts of automobile-oriented development in commercial, office, and mixed-use areas.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.I.2. Applicability

  1. General
    Unless exempted in accordance with Section 30-5.I.2.b, Exemptions, the standards in this section shall apply to all commercial, mixed-use, and office development.
  2. Exemptions
    Large retail structures subject to the standards in Section 30-5.J, Large Retail Design Standards, shall be exempt from these standards.
  3. Timing of Review
    Review for compliance with these standards shall occur at the time of Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5), Planned Development (see Section 30-2.C.3), Subdivision Plan (see Section 30-2.C.6.d), or Building Permit (see Section[@@9372]), as appropriate.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.I.3. Design Standards

All commercial, office, and mixed-use development subject to this section shall comply with the following standards:

  1. a.
    Building Orientation
    1. 1.
      Fronting Streets
      1. a.
        It is desirable for buildings to be located proximate to the street right-of-way to frame the street (or corner) edge, and it is desirable for off-street parking to be located to the side or rear of the buildings. To encourage and accommodate the location of buildings and parking in this manner, front (and corner side) setbacks may be reduced as noted, within the OI, LC, and CC zoning districts.
        1. 1.
          In DT-1 and DT-2, buildings shall be oriented towards (facing) and located approximate to the street right-of-way to frame the street (or corner) edge. See Sections 3-3.E.10 Downtown 1 (DT-1) District and 30-3.E.11, Downtown 2 (DT-2) District.
      2. b.
        In those cases where a vehicular use area is located between the structure and the street fronting the development, a vegetated buffer in accordance with Table 30-5.B.4.c.5, Street Yard Buffer Requirements, shall be provided as a screen to the vehicular use area.
      3. c.
        The façade of all buildings in view from a street, shall contain substantially the same building articulation, features and elements that are used on the façade which comprises the primary entrance to the building.
      4. d.
        In addition, service facilities and operations shall be oriented away from public view or screened to the extent practicable.
    2. 2.
      Multi-Building Development
      1. a.
        Development comprised of multiple buildings totaling 75,000 square feet or more shall be configured with two or more of the following design elements:
        1. 1.
          Site configuration as a series of smaller "blocks" defined by buildings fronting on-site streets and internal vehicle access ways, utilizing pedestrian oriented design such as walkways, or other circulation routes and multi-modal transportation access/ waiting areas when appropriate;
        2. 2.
          Corner buildings designed to front both sides of an adjacent street intersection or entry point to the development in an "L" configuration;
        3. 3.
          Buildings facing each other across a relatively narrow vehicular access area with pedestrian amenities in a "main street" character;
        4. 4.
          Buildings framing and enclosing at least three sides of parking areas, public spaces, or other site amenities; or
        5. 5.
          Buildings framing and enclosing outdoor dining or gathering spaces for pedestrians between buildings.
      2. b.
        The primary entrances of buildings shall be oriented towards a street along the perimeter of a development, towards streets interior to the development, or towards open space areas.
  2. b.
    Outparcel Development
    Figure 30-5.I.3.b: Outparcel Development
    Diagram illustrating outparcel development
    Outbuildings should define street edges, avoid uniform spacing, and provide pedestrian gathering areas.
    1. 1.
      To the maximum extent practicable, outparcels and their buildings shall be clustered in order to define street edges, entry points, and spaces for gathering or seating between buildings.
    2. 2.
      The even dispersal of outparcel sites consisting of widely-spaced, single, functionally unrelated buildings on lots of similar street frontage widths is prohibited (see Figure 30-5.I.3.b, Outparcel Development).
    3. 3.
      Spaces between buildings on outparcels shall be configured with small scale pedestrian amenities such as plazas, seating areas, pedestrian connections, and gathering spaces.
    4. 4.
      Auto-oriented businesses with drive-through facilities should be located on the edge of a given cluster of multiple buildings.
  3. c.
    Building Façades
    1. 1.
      Design Features
      Front building façades shall provide a minimum of three of the following six design features (a—f):
      1. a.
        Façades of 60 feet in width or wider shall incorporate wall offsets of at least one-foot in depth a minimum of every 40 feet. Each offset shall have a minimum width of ten feet;
      2. b.
        Façade color changes following the same dimensional standards as the offset standards in (a) above;
      3. c.
        Pilasters having a minimum depth of eight inches, a minimum width of eight inches, and a minimum height of 80 percent of the façade's height;
      4. d.
        Roofline changes, coupled with correspondingly aligned wall offset façade material changes, including changes in the roof planes or changes in the height of a parapet wall (such as extending the top of pilasters above the top of the parapet wall); or
      5. e.
        Glazing of at least 30 percent of the width of street level frontage with visibly permeable windows or doorways.
      6. f.
        Buildings may include a recognizable base, middle, and top configured in accordance with one of the following options for the building's base and one of the following options for the building's top (see Figure 30-5.I.3.c, Base, Middle, and Top):
        1. 1.
          Building Base
          Figure 30-5.I.3.c: Base, Middle, and Top
          Example of base, middle and top
          1. A.
            Thicker walls, ledges, or sills;
          2. B.
            Integrally-textured materials such as stone or other masonry;
          3. C.
            Integrally-colored and patterned materials such as smooth-finished stone or tile; or
          4. D.
            Lighter or darker colored materials, mullions, or panels;
        2. 2.
          Building Top
          1. A.
            Three-dimensional cornice treatments with integrally- textured materials such as stone of other masonry or differently colored materials;
          2. B.
            Sloping roof with overhangs and brackets;
          3. C.
            Stepped parapets; or
          4. D.
            Aligned openings and articulations.
    2. 2.
      Side Façades
      Street-facing side façades shall be configured with three of the same façade details as provided on the front façade.
    3. 3.
      Outbuildings
      Outbuildings located in front of other buildings within the same development shall include a consistent level of architectural detail on all four sides of the building as well as exterior materials and colors that are compatible with the primary building in the development.
  4. d.
    Roofs
    1. 1.
      Structures with a flat roof shall include parapet walls with a decorative three-dimensional cornice.
    2. 2.
      All rooftop equipment shall be screened from view from all streets.
  5. e.
    Off-Street Parking Location in Certain Zoning Districts
    1. 1.
      Downtown (DT-1 and DT-2) and PD-TN Zoning Districts
      Commercial, office, and mixed-use development in the DT-1 and DT-2 and PD-TN districts shall be configured to locate all required surface off-street parking to the side or rear of the building. In the DT-1 and DT-2 districts, parking on the side of the building shall not exceed 50% of the total parking provided. Parking shall not be located between the building and the principal street or right-of-way that it fronts, except on Grove, Ramsey, and Rowan Streets.
    2. 2.
      Neighborhood Commercial District
      Single-story commercial, office, and mixed-use development in the NC districts shall be configured to locate all surface off-street parking to the side or rear of the building. Buildings of two or more stories may locate up to two rows of off-street surface parking between the primary building entrance and the street it faces, when a vegetated buffer in accordance with Table 30-5.B.4.C.5 is provided.
  6. f.
    Loading, Storage, and Service Areas
    1. 1.
      Loading, service, and equipment areas shall be located in a manner that minimizes their visibility from off-site areas, to the maximum extent practicable.
    2. 2.
      Outdoor storage areas shall be fully screened from adjacent streets and single-family development.
    3. 3.
      Loading, service, and equipment areas that are associated with an outparcel building shall be screened through the use of structural elements and similar materials attached to and integrated with the building.
  7. g.
    Auto-Oriented Uses
    Automobile-oriented uses or facilities include but are not limited to gas pumps, drive-throughs, pick-up windows, or other accessory uses intended for access while inside a vehicle. In no instance shall an auto-oriented feature be located between a building and the principal street it fronts unless approved by the city manager.
  8. h.
    Display Windows for Vacant Commercial Establishments in DT-1 and DT-2 Downtown

Successful downtowns and dense urban areas depend on a lively, positive pedestrian experience; management of vacant ground floor display space is a significant component of that experience.  Whether or not a vacant commercial space is registered pursuant to this section, if any commercial space within the DT downtown zoning district has been unoccupied for more than thirty (30) consecutive days at the time this section becomes effective or any time thereafter, then the property owner or designated representative shall immediately construct and/or install at least one of the following types of displays on or inside all ground-floor windows that face sidewalks, streets, alleys, or public open spaces.

Prior to installation, the Planning and Code Enforcement Director or his or her designee shall review a plan prepared by the applicant to assure that the plan will adequately comply with one or more of the following:

  1. 1.
    Faux window dressings containing goods or services with the visual characteristics of a vibrant business using background panels or other methods to screen views of the unoccupied space from the street and sidewalk.
  2. 2.
    Works of art, including paintings, sculptures or other examples of fine arts, or other displays of cultural, historical, or educational value, utilizing colorful and vibrant materials and using background panels or other methods to screen views of the unoccupied space from the street and sidewalk.
  3. 3.
    Paintings applied directly to the window surface featuring visually appealing, colorful, vibrant scenes, shapes, or images shall be visible on all street and sidewalk areas.
  4. 4.
    Artwork or other materials provided by the Downtown Alliance specifically for this purpose.
  5. 5.
    Other measures consistent with these examples, if approved in writing by the Planning and Code Enforcement Director or his or her designee, in his/her discretion.  Displays should cover 50% of the window.  If the display does not cover the entire window, the unoccupied (or vacant) space should be screened to obscure it. 

(Ord. No. S2012-001, § 9, 1-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-007, § 2, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-008, §§ 1, 6, 4-23-2012; Ord. No. S2012-016, §§ 9.1, 9.2, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-018, § 6.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 2, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2016-002, § 2, 4-11-2016; Ord. No. S2019-043, § 1, 08/26/2019; Ord. No. S2019-044, § 1, 08/26/2019; Ord. No. S2019-054, § 1, 09/23/2019; Ord. No. S2022-009, §§ 11--13, 05/23/2022)

Effective on: 4/11/2016

30-5.I.4. Vacancy

All commercial, office, and mixed-use development shall be subject to the vacancy standards for large retail development in Section 30-5.J.2.c.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.I.5 Administrative Adjustment

To further design excellence and creativity within the community, and to encourage a design creativity, the City Manager may allow minor changes in the design standards listed in this section in accordance with the procedure and requirements in Section 30-2.C.16 Administrative Adjustment, if the spirit and intent of this section continues to be adhered in the overall development design.

(Ord. No. S2018-019; §1, 6-25-2018)

Effective on: 6/25/2018

30-5.J.1. Intent

The intent of this section is to encourage visual design interest and a pedestrian site design for large-retail buildings. These structures shall be designed to reduce the massive scale and uniform, monolithic appearances. Building design shall also promote a safe and comfortable pedestrian-oriented site with a mixture of uses and sizes of structures. Careful attention to local community design issues will also ensure a greater likelihood of reuse of the structure for subsequent tenants.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.2. Applicability

The following retail development is subject to the requirements of this section in addition to complying with all other Ordinance requirements:

  1. In General
    New construction equal to or exceeding 75,000 gross square feet of single plate ground floor and serving a single tenant as a stand-alone retail structure, or as part of a multi-tenant shopping center, or a single plate ground floor structure serving multi-tenants equal to or exceeding 150,000 gross square feet. For the purposes of this section, accessory leased spaces without their own exterior public entrance and within the primary store, do not count as multiple tenants.
  2. Out Parcels
    Pad sites and out parcels with structures that are associated with the primary development and which are included in the original Subdivision Plan and/ or Master Plan of the overall development. Due to the typically smaller scale of pad sites, the City Manager may deviate from the prescribed façade treatments if the overall design of the structure(s) on all of its publicly visible sides, remains compatible and comparable to the principle structure.
  3. Vacancy
    Abandoned buildings and blighted sites cause negative visual and fiscal concerns for the community. Therefore in order to minimize these instances upon the community, and in addition to this and other applicable codes and ordinances, the following shall apply to the property owner or property manager for vacated building(s) or development reviewed under this section:
    1. Exterior Surfaces
      All exterior surfaces, including but not limited to, doors, door and window frames, cornices, porches and trim shall be maintained in good repair. Exterior wood surfaces, other than decay resistant materials, shall be protected from the elements and decay by painting or other protective coverage or treatment. Peeling, flaking and chipped paint shall be eliminated and surfaces repaired. All siding and masonry joints shall be maintained weather resistant and watertight.
    2. Exterior Walls
      Exterior walls of buildings shall be maintained free from holes, breaks, loose or rotting materials, and graffiti; and shall be maintained weatherproof and properly surface coated as needed to prevent deterioration.
    3. Roofs
      Roofs of buildings shall be maintained so that they are structurally sound and in a safe and weather tight condition with no defects, which might admit rain or cause dampness in the interior portions of a building. All portions, additions, or sections of a roof including, but not limited to, the fascia, eave, soffit sheathing, rafter tail, barge rafter, vent screening, gutter, downspout, roof jack, lead or metal flashing, shall be complete with all trim strips, moldings, brackets, braces and supports attached or fastened in accordance with common building practices.
    4. Windows
      All glass areas, including those in windows and doors shall be fully supplied and maintained in accordance with the approved plan(s), or covered with smooth surface boards that are painted to coordinate with the building.
    5. Grounds
      1. All landscaped areas as defined in the approved plan(s) shall be well-maintained and kept free of trash, old building material, junk, unlicensed or inoperative vehicles, and other such material and equipment which, by its appearance, location or use, makes it incompatible with the principle use or other uses in the immediate neighborhood. Grass and other general ground cover shall be maintained in a neat and orderly manner, and kept trimmed to a height of no more than eight inches.
      2. All driveway, parking, loading and outside storage areas shall be maintained in accordance with the approved plan(s); and
      3. All appurtenances shall be maintained in a safe, working order, in good appearance, and free of graffiti.
    6. Storage
      1. No outside storage is permitted on a vacant site; and
      2. No outdoor sales, such as new or used cars, or mobile carwashes, shall be allowed on a vacant site unless approved in advance by the City Manager.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.3. Administrative Adjustment

To further design excellence and creativity within the community, and to encourage a design tailored to the community, applicants for large-scale retail development proposals shall maximize the overall design of the site and structure(s). The City Manager may allow minor changes in the design standards listed in this section in accordance with the procedure and requirements in Section 30-2.C.16, Administrative Adjustment, if the spirit and intent of this section continues to be adhered in the overall development design.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.4. Design Standards

Except where modified by an Administrative Adjustment (Section 30-2.C.16), large retail development shall comply with all the following design standards:

  1. Materials
    1. Pre-fabricated metal building façades are prohibited. Corrugated metal, unfinished smooth face concrete block or tilt-up concrete panels, pre-fabricated steel panels, and vinyl siding may not be used unless approved by the City Manager as complimentary to the overall design of the development.
    2. Predominant exterior building materials may include wood, brick, limestone, granite, other native stone, or tinted, textured concrete masonry units, or stucco or other similar materials. Unfinished block material at the rear of buildings shall be allowed if it is facing the same type of materials on the adjoining property and is not visible from any public street.
  2. Landscaping
    Landscaping requirements included in this section are in addition to the requirements of Section 30-5.B, Landscaping and Tree Protection. To compliment the large scale of the structure(s) and parking areas, the following shall be included:
    1. Trees planted under this section shall be a minimum of 2.0 caliper and specimen quality as certified by the American Standard of Nursery Stock (ASNS), except that at least 20 percent of the required trees shall be a minimum of 4.0 caliper. Park grade trees are prohibited.
    2. Vehicular use area landscaping shall be provided in accordance with the standards in Section 30-5.B.4.c, Vehicular Use Area Landscaping.
  3. Overhead Utilities
    If the site development or a street widening or relocation associated with the development involves the relocation of existing overhead utilities, all existing utility and electrical lines (30,000 volts or less and located on the site and/or along the site's perimeter and within the public right-of-way) shall be placed underground. In circumstances when the utility company determines that the undergrounding will be detrimental to the overall safety and/or reliability of the circuit, this requirement shall be waived. For multiple frontage sites that are not corner lots, the City Manager, in consultation with PWC or another utility provider, may allow for the retention of the existing overhead lines in whole or in part, based upon circuit reliability and safety, and/ or the frontage's length, topography, and/or visibility, or excessive cost.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 10.1, 9-10-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.5. Façade Treatments

  1. a.
    General Standards
    Figure 30-5.J.5.a.1: Façade Treatments
    Diagram illustrating façade treatments
    Large retail buildings are required to include façade offsets to break up the building wall mass.
    1. 1.
      Façades greater than 100 feet in linear length shall be articulated with recesses or projections or awning and windows, which total at least 25 percent of that façade. Recesses or projections shall be a minimum of two percent of the length of that façade. No uninterrupted length of any façade shall exceed 75 horizontal feet (see Figure 30-5.J.5.a.1, Façade Treatments).
    2. 2.
      Ground floor façades that face public streets or public ways shall have arcades, display windows, entry areas, awnings and other such design features along no less than 60 percent of that front façade designated as front and 40 percent for area designated as side or rear. This requirement includes the façade of the building that functions as the rear, yet faces a street.
  2. b.
    Required Façade Features
    All façades shall have at least five of the following 11 design features. If either of the public art options are selected, each would count as meeting two design features (see Figure 30-5.J.5.b, Large Retail façades). The city manager may allow for minor deviations to the full requirement of each chosen item if the applicant can adequately demonstrate that the overall intent and spirit of this section continues to be adhered to an overall development design:
    1. 1.
      Have more than two exterior contrasting colors and more than three exterior or texture changes for primary façade materials.
    2. 2.
      Have building face offsets, such as plasters, columns and/or reveals, or other decorative elements (minimum 12-inch offset that are parallel to the front lot line from the primary surface of the façade, or in the case of reveals, three-quarters of an inch deep into the façade).
    3. 3.
      Covered pedestrian walkway with a minimum of depth of eight feet across the entire front façade of the structure.
    4. 4.
      Clear glass window display area that covers at least 20 percent of one façade, or 30 percent of two façades which front areas intended for public view or provide spandrel or tinted glass areas for a minimum of 40 percent of the length of façades which front areas intended for public view.
Figure 30-5.J.5.b: Large Retail Facades
Diagram illustrating large retail facades
The facades of large-retail buildings must include design features to break up the building’s mass and scale.
  1.   
    1. 5.
      Atrium skylight(s), with a minimum depth of 20 feet, that visually enhances the exterior architectural style and design of the front entrance, façade, and roof area.
    2. 6.
      Forty percent of the length of façades taller than 25 feet and intended for public view to provide a second story appearance through the use of fenestration. The second story effect may also be achieved by alluding to second story fenestration through the use of brick detailing arches, dark spandrel windows, or other acceptable architectural treatments.
    3. 7.
      Provide fabric or metal sloped awnings over fenestration or decorative façade materials for a minimum of 40 percent of the length of façades which areas are intended for public view.
    4. 8.
      Integral planters or walls constructed parallel to the face of the building and incorporating living landscaped areas and/or places for sitting. Such areas shall be a minimum of two-feet-wide and 19 inches high for sitting, and five-feet-wide for a planter and cover at least 30 percent of that façade.
    5. 9.
      A pedestrian plaza, which incorporates gathering and sitting opportunities adjacent to the main entrance or on the front façade equivalent to two percent of the gross square footage of that building. Such an area shall include a seating area with benches or tables and chairs at a minimum rate of one seat per 15,000 gross square feet, and shall include at least one of the following features:
      1. a.
        Kiosk(s);
      2. b.
        Outdoor playground area;
      3. c.
        Water feature;
      4. d.
        Gazebo; or
      5. e.
        Clock tower or other such focal feature and amenity that enhances the public space.
    6. Plazas shall provide on grade planting flush with plaza paving for a minimum of ten percent of the paved plaza area adjacent to the primary façades intended for public view. Planted areas shall be provided in accordance with the soil volume standards in Section 30-5.B.3.e.3, Minimum Planting Area with no less than one tree for each 40 feet of building façade.
  1.   
    1. 10.
      Public Art on the Building
      To further create an individual identity to the community, artistic detailing such as tile work, murals sculptures, and similar features, which are integrated into the design of the structure, are encouraged, subject to review and recommendation by the City's Public Art Commission. If tile work or murals, or similar detailing on the building is used, it must cover at least 20 percent of that façade, which is not devoted to the entrance area(s). In-lieu of installation of public art directly by the developer, the developer may elect and is encouraged to have a local arts organization coordinate the selection, placement, and installation of the public art as required in this subsection. As an additional alternative, the developer may elect to contribute the required funds to an account administered by the City for public art to be installed on or off site at the City's discretion.
      1. a.
        New development shall allocate at least one percent of the construction cost, as determined by the value of the building permit, to purchase and install public art for the building(s). For buildings valued in excess of $5,000,000.00, the required one percent contribution shall be calculated on the first $5,000,000.00 in value, with the required contribution from any value in excess of $5,000,000.00 at the rate of one-half percent.
      2. b.
        Calculation of the construction cost shall be verified by the Development Services Department.
      3. c.
        The following expenses may be included in the public art allocation:
        1. 1.
          The artwork itself, including the artist's fee for design, structural engineering and fabrication;
        2. 2.
          Transportation and installation of the work at the site;
        3. 3.
          Identification plaques; and
        4. 4.
          Mountings, anchorages, containment, pedestals, bases or other materials necessary for the installation of the artwork.
      4. d.
        The following expenses shall be excluded for the public art allocation:
        1. 1.
          The cost of locating the artist;
        2. 2.
          Architect and landscape architect fees;
        3. 3.
          Land costs;
        4. 4.
          Landscaping, utility connections and fees associated with activating the artwork; and
        5. 5.
          Publicity, public relations, photographs, or dedication ceremonies.
    2. 11.
      Public Art on the Site
      To further create an individual identity, artistic detailing shall be integrated into the design of the site. In addition to sculpture, innovative locations for public art, locations such as at the architectural entrance to the site are encouraged. In-lieu of installation of public art directly by the developer, the developer may elect and is encouraged to have a local arts organization coordinate the selection, placement and installation of the public art as required in this subsection:
      1. a.
        One percent of the construction cost, as determined by the value of the building permit for the subject property shall be allocated and used to purchase and install public art for the site.
      2. b.
        Calculation of the construction cost shall be verified by Development Services Department.
      3. c.
        Expenses may be included in the public art allocation.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 10.2, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, § 16, 11-13-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.6. Roofs

Roof design shall incorporate the following design features:

  1. Flat roof designs shall be constructed with parapets to screen HVAC and other roof mounted mechanical equipment from the public right-of-way or public parking. Such parapets shall not exceed one-third of the height of the supporting wall and shall be constructed with a three-dimensional cornice treatment;
  2. Membrane roofing material is prohibited when visible from the public right-of-way or public parking. Roofing materials shall be tile, slate, asphalt or metal; and
  3. All sloped roof designs must use at least one of the following design features;
    1. Three or more roof slope planes; or
    2. Overhanging eaves or canopy projections; which extend no fewer than two feet past the supporting walls.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.7. Entrances

Each retail establishment shall have a clearly defined and highly visible customer entrance or portal, which incorporates the following design features:

  1. A pedestrian plaza configured in one of the following ways:
    1. Single tenants occupying more than 50,000 square feet shall provide for a plaza area of at least 20 feet in depth immediately in front of their entrance(s). It is encouraged that this area be large enough to include one or more planters with enough soil volume to support trees (see Section 30-5.B.3.e.3, Minimum Planting Area);
    2. Single tenants occupying more than 20,000 square feet shall provide for a plaza area of at least ten feet in depth, immediately in front of their entrance(s); or
    3. Single tenants of less than 20,000 square feet shall provide a plaza area of at least eight feet in depth, immediately in front their entrance(s).
  2. With the exception of interior malls, multiple and separate stores located in the same structure shall have at least one exterior customer entrance. For the purposes of this subsection, accessory uses within the primary stores are not required to comply.
  3. Diagonal parking on both sides of the travel lane along the front façade of the structure(s) shall be encouraged to create a "main street" type atmosphere.
  4. Each single tenant portal shall use at least three of the following design features. These design features shall be in addition to those required above:
    1. Canopies, porticos, arcades and/or outdoor patios;
    2. Raised or peaked cornice parapets over the entrance;
    3. Architectural or artistic details such as tile work and moldings that are integrated into the design of the entrance; or
    4. Integral planters or walls that incorporate living landscaped areas and places for sitting that are built perpendicular to the façade and frame the entrance. Such areas shall be a minimum of two feet deep and 19 inches high for sitting and 20 feet wide for a planter.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 10.3, 9-10-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.8. Parking and Circulation

The parking lot design and pedestrian circulation routes shall provide a safe, convenient, and efficient access for vehicles, pedestrians and bicyclists. Pedestrian circulation via internal public sidewalks shall be encouraged. The placement of structures shall enhance and promote pedestrian circulation on the site.

  1. Artistic detailing and paving patterns are encouraged in pedestrian walkways, plazas, and gathering areas.
  2. No more than six double-loaded bays may be located between the front façade and the abutting street. The City Manager can alter this provision for unusually configured sites if the design meets the intent.
  3. At a minimum, one internal continuous sidewalk of at least five feet wide (clear) shall be provided from the public street to the entrance(s). In addition, five feet wide walkways shall connect focal points of pedestrian activity, such as transit stops, street crossings or store entry points, and shall feature adjoining landscaped areas to provide a separated and pedestrian friendly access route for no less than 50 percent of their overall length.
  4. All internal pedestrian walkways shall be physically separated from the drive lanes. Additionally all sidewalks and crosswalks shall be visually distinct from the driving surface.
  5. Sidewalks, at least eight feet in width shall be provided along any façade featuring a customer entrance, and along any façade abutting public parking areas. At all times, such sidewalks shall maintain a clear pedestrian passage equal to the width of the sidewalk. Additionally, such sidewalks shall connect all customer entrances and to other internal sidewalks, and shall be located an average of at least three feet from the façade of the building to provide planting beds for living foundation landscaping, except where features such as covered walkways, arcades or entryways are part of the façade. Such live foundation landscaped areas shall be a minimum average of six feet wide, and shall be a minimum of 15 feet in overall length.
  6. An off- or on-street transit stop for customers and employees shall be provided when the site is located on an established or planned transit route.
  7. Where applicable, pedestrian and recreational paths, and vehicular linkages shall be made with adjoining properties.
  8. Bike racks shall be provided within 50 feet to entrances.
  9. Overnight parking of RV's, mobile homes, and other vehicles providing transient residency is prohibited.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 10.4, 9-10-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.9. Outdoor Storage, Trash Collection, Utility, and Loading Areas

These areas, due to their visual and noise impacts onto adjacent properties and visitors to the site, shall be screened, recessed, or enclosed:

  1. No area for outdoor storage, trash collection or compaction, loading, or other such uses shall be located within 20 feet of any public street, public sidewalk, or internal pedestrian walkway.
  2. If shopping carts are used outside the building, outdoor shopping-cart storage areas shall be provided in the parking lot, and adjacent to the buildings if they are not available at the entrance.
  3. Loading docks, truck parking, outdoors storage, utility meters, HVAC equipment, trash dumpsters, trash compaction, and other such service functions shall be incorporated into the overall design of the structure and landscaping so that the visual and acoustic impacts of these functions are fully contained and out of the view from general passersby. Screening materials shall be the same as those used on the structure to avoid visual detection of the service function on and off site.
  4. Only previously designated and approved areas for the parking or storage of trucks, trailers, or containers as accessory outdoor storage shall be permitted. Such areas are prohibited, on any portion of a walkway, drive aisle, parking or landscaped area.
  5. Garbage receptacles shall be provided as part of the parking lot design. Receptacles shall be designed to integrate into the overall design and color scheme of the development. There shall be a minimum of one garbage receptacle per 20 parking spaces. Garbage receptacles shall be maintained so as not to become a nuisance.
  6. Transformers shall be integrated into the overall design of the site and shall be heavily screened with living landscaping and/or enclosures to minimize their visual impact.
  7. When not in conflict with the standards herein, meter locations are subject to the approval of the relevant operating utility.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.10. Outdoor Sales

Permanent and seasonal outdoor sales areas shall be incorporated into the design of the building and site if used. Additionally, only previously designated and approved permanent or seasonal outdoor sales areas shall be permitted.

  1. Non-enclosed areas for the sale and storage of seasonal inventories shall be permanently defined and separated with walls or fences. Walls and roofs shall conform to the standards in this subsection.
  2. If anti-theft devices for the area(s) are provided, they shall be identified on the Site Plan.
  3. No outdoor display or sales area shall encroach onto any portion of a walkway, drive aisle, parking, or landscaped area.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.J.11. Canopies

Gasoline canopies, car washes, and other accessory functions located in separate structures on the same subject site shall be complimentary to the overall design of the site and of the primary structure.

  1. a.
    Materials, colors and designs, including roof design, shall conform with and compliment the predominant materials and colors of the main structure.
  2. b.
    Shall be illuminated with flush mounted, flat lens light fixtures for all under the canopy fueling areas.

(Ord. No. S2025-019, 06/23/2025)

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.J.12. Exterior Lighting Standards

All exterior lighting shall be designed, located, installed, and directed in such a manner as to prevent objectionable light at and across the property lines to prevent glare at any location on or off the property, and shall meet the following standards:

  1. a.
    Be no more than two and one-half foot-candle level at the property line exempting abutting streets if currently lighted;
  2. b.
    Be of a white light, such as metal halide, incandescent, LED, or a lamp with color rendering index above 70;
  3. c.
    Be a full cut-off style fixture for all parking area lighting;
  4. d.
    Be a full cut-off or shielded type fixture (non-shielded wall pack style fixtures are not acceptable) for all building lighting for security or aesthetics;
  5. e.
    Floodlighting is discouraged; however, if used, it shall be shielded to prevent the following:
    1. 1.
      Glare for pedestrians or drivers;
    2. 2.
      Light trespass beyond the property line; and
    3. 3.
      Light above a 90-degree horizontal plane.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.K.1. Purpose

These transitional standards are used to provide a proper transition and compatibility between single-family detached development and other more intense development. More specifically, it is the intent of these standards to:

  1. Provide effective transitions between single-family detached and more intense uses;
  2. Provide effective transitions between single-family attached and multi-family development and more intense uses;
  3. Protect the character of existing single-family detached development from negative impacts resulting from more intense adjacent forms of development;
  4. Limit the excessive consumption of available land though the utilization of large vegetated buffers in favor of development form and design treatments;
  5. Limit interruptions in vehicular and pedestrian connections created by efforts to segregate uses; and
  6. Establish or maintain vibrant pedestrian-oriented areas where differing uses can operate in close proximity to one another.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.K.2. Applicability

  1. General
    Unless exempted in accordance with Section 30-5.K.2.b, Exemptions, these transitional standards shall apply to the following forms of development:
    1. Commercial, industrial, mixed-use, attached residential, and multi-family developments located on land adjacent to or across a local street or alley from existing single-family detached residential development.
    2. Commercial, industrial, and mixed-use development located on land adjacent to or across a local street or alley from existing attached residential or multi-family development.
    3. Commercial, industrial, mixed-use, attached residential, and multi-family development existing on July 1, 2011 located on land adjacent to or across a local street or alley from existing single-family detached residential development if any expansion or alteration exceeds 50 percent of the building's assessed value at the time of expansion or alteration.
    4. Commercial, industrial, or mixed-use development existing on July 1, 2011 located on land adjacent to or across a local street or alley from existing attached residential or multi-family development if any expansion or alteration exceeds 50 percent of the building's assessed value at the time of expansion or alteration.
  2. Exemptions
    The following development is exempt from these standards:
    1. Commercial, industrial, mixed-use, attached residential and multi-family developments located on lots across a four-or-more-lane street, sub-collector, collector, or arterial street from single-family detached residential development;
    2. Commercial, industrial, and mixed-use development located on lots across a four-or-more-lane street, sub-collector, collector, or arterial street from attached residential or multi-family development; and
    3. Interior lots in a zero lot line development.
  3. Conflict
    In the case of conflict between these standards and other design standards in this article, the transitional standards in this section shall control.
  4. Timing of Review
    Review for compliance with these standards shall occur at the time of Site Plan (see Section 30-2.C.5), Planned Development (see Section 30-2.C.3), Subdivision Plan (see Section 30-2.C.6.d), or Building Permit (see Section [@@9372]), as appropriate.

(Ord. No. S2019-045, § 1, 08/26/2019; Ord. No. S2019-046, § 1, 08/26/2019)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.K.3. Transitional Standards

All commercial, industrial, mixed-use, attached residential and multi-family development subject to this section shall comply with the following standards:

  1. a.
    Use-Specific Buffering, Separation, or Special Use Permit Requirements
    1. 1.
      The following uses or features shall maintain a Type D buffer and a 75 foot separation from single family lots in addition to complying with all the standards of this section. Any reduction in separation or in buffer standards shall require approval of a Special Use Permit in accordance with the procedures and standards in Section 30-2.C.7, Special Use Permit, to allow consideration of the impact and possible mitigation of traffic, light, noise or other negative impacts on adjacent single family lots.
      1. a.
        Drive-throughs;
      2. b.
        Public address systems;
      3. c.
        Outdoor storage;
      4. d.
        Uses providing delivery services via automobile or truck in commercial for hire vehicles over 6,000 pounds; and
      5. e.
        Outdoor activity areas, eating establishments, entertainment uses, bars, nightclubs, or cocktail lounges.

         

  2. b.
    Building Façades
    Figure 30-5.K.3.b, Building Façades in Transitional Areas
    Diagram illustrating building façades in transitional areas
    Nonresidential development should look like storefronts in single-family areas.

    Buildings shall:
    1. 1.
      Use a similar roof type to adjacent residential development in terms of slope and arrangement to prevent abrupt changes in roof form;
    2. 2.
      Façades greater than 80 feet in length facing residential development, shall be configured to appear as a series of discrete storefronts with no single storefront occupying more than 50 percent of the total façade width, unless a buffer is otherwise required adjacent to the residential development (see Figure 30-5.K.3.b, Building Façades in Transitional Areas);
    3. 3.
      Use exterior colors that are compatible with nearby residential development;
    4. 4.
      Use similarly sized and patterned architectural features such as windows, doors, awnings, arcades, pilasters, cornices, wall offsets, building materials, and other building articulations found on adjacent residential development unless a buffer is otherwise required adjacent to the residential development; and
    5. 5.
      Figure 30-5.K.3.c: Building Height
      Illustration describing building height
      Building heights should be reduced next to lower intensity development.
      Orient upper story porches, balconies, and other exterior site features such as vending machines away from adjacent single-family detached dwellings to the maximum extent practicable to prevent direct views into yards of single-family dwellings on adjacent lots. When a facade of the structure is located adjacent to a single-family dwelling and the required perimeter buffer is provided, these features must be at least 50 feet from the property line; when less than the required buffer is provided, they must be at least 75 feet from the property line.
    6. 6.
      Outdoor activity areas, porches, decks, and other similar site attributes intended for gatherings or frequent use by more than a few patrons or residents at any given time shall be at least 50 feet from adjacent single-family detached lots and screened with a Type D perimeter landscape buffer (see Table 30-5.B.5.d.4, Property Perimeter Buffer Types).
  3. c.
    Building Height
    1. 1.
      Buildings shall maintain a maximum height of 40 feet within 50 feet of a lot line shared with existing single-family detached dwellings (see Figure 30-5.K.3.c, Building Height).
    2. 2.
      Buildings over three stories in height shall be broken up into modules or wings with the smaller and shorter portions of the structure located adjacent to residential development.
  4. d.
    Site Design
    Multi-building developments on one or more lots, shall be configured to establish a continuum of use intensity where uses of moderate intensity are sited between high-intensity uses and low-intensity uses (e.g., office uses between retail and detached residential), as they relate to adjacent residential development.
  5. e.
    Off-Street Parking Areas
    Figure 30-5.K.3.e: Parking in Transitional Areas
    Illustration describing parking in transitional areas
    The numbers in the diagram show the priority listing of preferred parking location.
    1. 1.
      The total amount of off-street parking shall comply with the required minimum specified in Table 30-5.A.4.b. Minimum Off-Street Parking Requirements except as approved through an Alternative Parking Plan (See Section 30-5.A.8.) that demonstrates an addition or reduction will not have an adverse impact on the adjacent residential development.
    2. 2.
      When required, off-street parking shall be established in one of the following locations (listed in priority order) (see Figure 30-5.K.3.e, Parking in Transitional Areas):
      1. a.
        Adjacent to off-street parking lots serving nonresidential uses on abutting lots;
      2. b.
        Adjacent to lot lines abutting nonresidential development;
      3. c.
        Adjacent to lot lines abutting mixed-use development;
      4. d.
        On a lot's corner side;
      5. e.
        Behind the building;
      6. f.
        In front of the building; or
      7. g.
        Adjacent to lot lines abutting single-family detached dwellings.
    3. 3.
      Parking structure façades adjacent to single-family detached development shall not be configured to appear as solid building walls, to soften their visual impact.
    4. 4.
      Off-street surface parking areas located adjacent to single-family detached residential development shall be screened by a Type D perimeter buffer (see Section 30-5.B.4.d, Property Perimeter Landscape Buffers).
  6. f.
    Loading and Refuse Areas
    Loading, service, and refuse areas shall be:
    1. 1.
      Screened from view of single-family detached dwellings using materials that are the same as, or of equal quality to, the materials used for the principal building; and
    2. 2.
      Incorporated into the overall design of the building and landscape so that the visual and acoustic impacts of these functions are fully contained and out of view from adjacent properties and public streets.
  7. g.
    Exterior Lighting
    Exterior lighting shall:
    1. 1.
      Maintain maximum illumination values of 1.75 footcandles or less at lot lines adjacent to existing single-family detached dwellings;
    2. 2.
      Have a maximum height of 20 feet; and
    3. 3.
      Be configured so that the source of illumination is not visible from public street right-of-way or adjacent property.
  8. h.
    Signage Standards
    1. 1.
      Signs on lots subject to these standards shall be limited to wall signs and ground signs of less than five feet in maximum height.
    2. 2.
      Within 50 feet of residential lot lines, the maximum sign copy area for freestanding, ground, and wall signs shall be reduced by 25 percent on lots subject to these standards.
    3. 3.
      Signage within 20 feet of a lot line shared with a single-family detached dwelling shall be limited to directional or incidental signage.
  9. i.
    Open Space Set-Aside Configuration
    Required open space set-asides of a more passive nature such as tree save or mitigation area, trails, or smaller seating and garden areas, shall be located between a proposed development and adjacent single-family detached dwelling, to the maximum extent practicable.
  10. j.
    Operational Standards
    Uses subject to these transitional design standards shall:
    1. 1.
      Prohibit outdoor dining or other outdoor activities after 9:00 p.m. on weeknights and 11:00 p.m. on weekends;
    2. 2.
      Prohibit trash collection or other service functions to only between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 7:00 p.m.; and
    3. 3.
      Extinguish amplified music, singing, or other forms of noise audible at lot lines shared with single-family detached dwelling after 9:00 p.m. Sunday through Thursday nights, and 11:00 p.m. Friday and Saturday nights.

(Ord. No. S2012-016, § 12.0, 9-10-2012; Ord. No. S2012-025, §§ 11, 16, 11-13-2012; Ord. No. S2013-018, §§ 1b, 1c, 9-9-2013; Ord. S2014-002, § 5a, 1-13-2014;​​​​ Ord. No. S2018-20, 6-25-2018; There are no ordinances associated with this section.)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.L.1. Purpose and Applicability

  1. A.
    Purpose
    The purpose of this section is to provide standards to safeguard life, public health, safety, property, and welfare by guiding, coordinating, and regulating the type, number, placement and scale (size and height) of signs referenced to different zoning districts, as well as the quality of material, construction, erection, alteration, illumination, display, use, maintenance and removal of signs in the City. In addition, the purpose of this section is to:
    1. 1.
      Ensure that signage is sufficiently visible to the public for which it is intended;
    2. 2.
      Provide regulatory direction and incentives to improve the quality of commercial and noncommercial signage in the City of Fayetteville;
    3. 3.
      Ensure that signage reflects and complements the character of the location where it is installed;
    4. 4.
      Establish standards in keeping with the state-of-the-art technology and materials;
    5. 5.
      Coordinate and balance the location of signage with other site features, including site lighting and landscaping, in order to minimize conflicts and ensure adequate visibility of installed signage;
    6. 6.
      Enhance the aesthetic vitality of the City of Fayetteville by allowing and promoting creative sign design;
    7. 7.
      Allow designated historic and character-defining signs to remain in place;
    8. 8.
      Establish clear requirements and incentives for the effective display of addresses;
    9. 9.
      Ensure the effective use of temporary signage to promote economic, community, and social events and activity in the City.
  2. B.
    Applicability
    The provisions of this section shall apply to the construction, placement, display, maintenance, and removal of all signs within the territorial jurisdiction of the City of Fayetteville unless otherwise explicitly exempted herein.

(Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025)

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.L.2. General Provisions

  1. A.
    In General
    The regulations in this section specify the number, types, sizes, heights, and locations of signs which are permitted within the City. It shall be unlawful for any person to erect, place, alter or maintain a sign in the City except in accordance with the provisions of this section. Regulations governing the use of signs within the jurisdiction and referenced to the various zoning districts are set forth in this section. All signs shall be erected, altered, and maintained in accordance with the provisions of this section and, unless exempted, only those signs as specified and as regulated shall be erected within the City.
  2. B.
    Sign Permit Required
    A Sign Permit issued in accordance with the standards of Section 30-2.C.1 1 shall be required prior to the erection, placement, construction, reconstruction, or structural alteration of a sign regulated under this section, unless otherwise specifically exempted herein.
  3. C.
    Determination of Sign Copy Area
    1. 1.
      In measuring the copy area of a sign permitted under this section the entire face of the sign containing the sign copy shall be included. Specifically exempted from this provision are poles, pole covers, bases of ground signs, and decorative elements not containing sign copy.
    2. 2.
      Where both sides of a double-faced sign contain lettering or other allowable display, one side only shall be used to compute the allowable size of the sign; however, each side of a multiple-faced sign shall be used separately to compute allowable sign size.
    3. 3.
      Where the sign consists of individual letters, numbers, characters, figures or displays attached in some manner to a building or a sign face of irregular shape, the sign copy area shall include the area of the smallest circle, square, or rectangle that can encompass the total sign area composed of letters, numbers, characters, figures or displays or the irregular shaped sign face.
    4. 4.
      Where signs have appendages or additions, such as "pop-ups" or "cutouts" that extend beyond the main sign copy area, the area of such appendages or additions shall be measured separately, but included in the total sign copy area.
    5. 5.
      Any area designed for changeable copy shall also be counted as part of the total sign area.
  4. D.
    Determination of Sign Height
    1. 1.
      The height of a sign erected within 30 feet of a street right-of-way line shall be the distance from the grade level of the nearest edge of the street to the top of the sign or sign structure, whichever is greater.
    2. 2.
      The height of all signs farther than 30 feet from a street right-of-way line shall be the distance from the grade level where the sign is erected to the top of the sign or sign structure, whichever is greater.
  5. E.
    Determination of Sign Setback
    In determining setback, measurement shall be made from the nearest street right-of-way line.
  6. F.
    Changeable Copy Signs
    Unless otherwise specified herein, any permanent sign allowed in this section may use manual, electrically, or mechanically activated changeable copy provided that the text, numbers or images change no more frequently than once every six seconds. Limitations on the proportion or dimensions of changeable copy signs are included with the regulations for each type of permanent sign where such is permitted.

(Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025 )

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.L.3. Sign Construction Standards

  1. A.
    Design and Construction
    All signs shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with generally accepted engineering practices to withstand wind pressures and load distributions as specified in the state building code. All signs shall be constructed according to the requirements of this article and the state building code, as amended, or whichever is more restrictive. It shall be unlawful for any person to erect or place any sign that does not conform to the requirements of this article and the state building code as amended.
  2. B.
    Electric Service
    1. 1.
      All signs in which electrical wiring and connections are included shall be constructed in accordance with the state building code.
    2. 2.
      All detached signs to be illuminated shall be so illuminated by an underground electrical service.
  3. C.
    Illuminated Signs
    1. 1.
      Illuminated signs shall be shielded and directed in a manner so as not to produce glare, excessive light, or concentrations of light that interfere with vehicular or pedestrian safety.
    2. 2.
      External sources of illumination shall be shielded from streets and adjoining property.
    3. 3.
      Any external source of illumination, such as spotlights or floodlights shall be placed so that the source is not directly visible from any adjacent residentially zoned or used property.
    4. 4.
      Freestanding signs, other than Billboard Signs, with a height exceeding six (6) feet shall only be permitted to utilize internal sources of illumination.
  4. D.
    Billboard Signs
    All billboard signs erected within the City after the effective date of the ordinance from which this section is derived shall be supported by a structure of monopole steel design and construction.

(Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025)

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.L.4. Sign Maintenance and Repair

  1. A.
    Maintenance Required
    1. 1.
      Every sign and its support, braces, guys, anchors and electrical equipment shall be maintained in safe condition at all times.
    2. 2.
      All signs shall be kept in a state of good repair and aesthetic condition, free from defective, rusting or missing parts (e.g., broken sign facing, broken supports, loose appendages or struts, disfigured, cracked, ripped or peeling paint or poster paper) or missing letters or numbers.
    3. 3.
      Signs shall be able to withstand the wind pressure as prescribed in the state building code.
    4. 4.
      Illuminated signs shall have their light sources regularly inspected and maintained to ensure that they are functioning properly.
    5. 5.
      The area within ten feet in all directions of the base of a freestanding sign shall be kept clear of debris and undergrowth.
    6. 6.
      A sign face or sign structure may be disassembled and taken down temporarily for the purposes of maintenance provided such sign face and/or structure are reassembled to their original location and position within a period of no more than 60 days. A permit shall be required for such purpose.
  2. B.
    Repair or Removal of Improperly Maintained Signs; Actions by the City Manager
    The City Manager or his designee is authorized to order the painting, repair, or alteration of any sign which constitutes a hazard to the health, safety, or public welfare by reason of inadequate maintenance, dilapidation, obsolescence or abandonment. The City Manager may order the removal of any sign that is not maintained in accordance with the provisions of this article. Such removal shall be at the expense of the owner. Signs that are not repaired or removed as required by the City Manager shall be cause to take legal action to effectuate such repair or removal.

(Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025)

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.L.5. Prohibited Signs

The following signs, components, and characteristics are expressly prohibited within all zoning districts unless specifically stated otherwise in this section:

  1. A.
    Simulated Public Safety, Warning, or Traffic Sign
    Signs by their location, color, illumination, size, shape, nature, message or appearance tend to obstruct the view of or be confused with official traffic, safety, or warning signs, or lights or other devices erected by governmental agencies. This prohibition includes signs having no bona fide safety necessity, involving the terms "CAUTION," "DANGER," "SLOW," "STOP" OR "YIELD," or which utilize geometric figures, symbols, lights, location or message not unlike official traffic, safety, or warning signs, signals, or lights; provided, however, this provision is not intended to prevent the placement on private property of signs with "stop," "yield," or other such wording or design where such is necessary for traffic control or other such legitimate notice to the public.
  2. B.
    Snipe Signs
    Signs placed upon or attached to any curb, sidewalk, utility pole, post, fence, hydrant, bridge, another sign or other surface, public bench, street light, or any tree, rock or other natural object located on, over, or across any public street or public property; provided, however, this provision shall not apply to the posting of public interest, security, and warning signs permitted section 30-5.L.6.(b).
  3. C.
    Flashing Signs
    Signs or devices with flashing, intermittent, animated or changing intensity of illumination; provided, however, traffic signals, railroad crossing signals, and other official warning or regulatory signs and electronically controlled message centers or readerboards where different copy changes that present messages of a public service or commercial nature shall not be considered flashing signs.
  4. D.
    Motion Signs
    Signs or devices designed to attract attention, all or any part of which use movement or apparent movement by fluttering, revolving, rotating, spinning, swinging, animation or moving in some other manner, including fabric signs not securely fastened to their supporting structures, and are set in motion by movement of water or the atmosphere or by mechanical, electrical, or any other means. Such signs or devices include, but are not limited to, pennants, ribbons, streamers, spinners, propellers, discs, consecutively hung official or unofficial flags, and bunting, whether or not any such sign or device has a written message. However, signs or devices that only move occasionally because of the wind are not prohibited if their movement is not a primary design feature of the sign or device, is not intended to attract attention to the sign or device, and is permitted for a limited period of time for a special event not to exceed 60 days. Additionally, non-advertising/non-informational flags and feather flags are not prohibited (designated as Type 5 Freestanding Temporary Signs).
  5. E.
    Signs Obstructing Motorists' Visibility
    Signs that substantially interfere with the view necessary for motorists to proceed safely through intersections or to enter onto or exit from public streets or private roads or driveways or that obstruct the motorists' view of approaching, merging, or intersecting traffic including, but not limited to, signs in sight visibility triangles.
  6. F.
    Signs in Public Rights-of-Way
    Any sign erected in or over any public right-of-way is prohibited except for:
    1. 1.
      Signs as permitted and regulated in the Downtown DT-1 and DT-2 districts;
    2. 2.
      Governmental signs;
    3. 3.
      Signs explicitly permitted to encroach into a public right-of-way which have received an encroachment permit or other authorization from the City or NCDOT.
  7. G.
    Signs Obstructing Light, Air, or Ingress/Egress of Buildings
    Signs that obstruct any window, door, fire escape, stairway, ladder or opening intended to provide light, air, ingress or egress for any building as required by law.
  8. H.
    Signs Emitting Glare
    Signs with light sources or reflectivity of such brightness that result in glare, blinding, or any other such adverse effect on motorist vision or into or upon any residential building not related to the signs.
  9. I.
    Portable or Moveable Signs
    Any sign that is not permanently affixed to a building, structure, or the ground, other than a Temporary Sign authorized by this section.
  10. J.
    Roof Signs
    Signs which are located, or extend, in any manner above the highest point of the roof or parapet, except as otherwise provided in this section.
  11. K.
    Obscene Signs
    Signs containing words or graphics that are obscene, as defined in North Carolina ' General Statutes Section 14-190.1.
  12. L.
    Signs Below Minimum Clearance
    Signs, marquees, canopies and awnings with vertical clearance of less than nine feet above sidewalks and pedestrian areas and less than 14 feet above parking or vehicular passage areas.
  13. M.
    Improperly Maintained Signs
    Signs, including structural elements and illumination, which are not maintained in accordance with the requirement of Section 30-5.L.4, Sign Maintenance and Repair.
  14. N.
    Illuminated Temporary Signs
    Temporary signs illuminated in any manner.
  15. O.
    Novelty Signs
    Signs which emit visible smoke, vapor particles, odor, or noises.
  16. P.
    Unspecified Temporary Signs
    Temporary signs not expressly permitted by Section 30-5.L.7.
  17. Q.
    Temporary Special Advertising Devices
    Searchlights, stroboscopic lights, laser lights or similar illuminating systems. Also, inflatable and three-dimensional objects, except those specifically provided for herein.
  18. R.
    All Other Signs not Specifically Permitted
    Other signs not expressly allowed by this section.
  19. S.
    Vehicles with Large Signs Parked Near a Right-of-Way
    1. 1.
      Except when in the process of loading or unloading or generally carrying out activities associated with the normal conduct of business (except advertising) vehicles and trailers with signs exceeding eight square feet on any one side, except passenger cars, vans and light trucks, are prohibited from parking within 50 feet of a public right-of-way. Licensed and operable passenger cars, vans and light trucks containing such signage may park in any legally-established parking space on the property on which the business being advertised is being conducted.
    2. 2.
      Exceptions to subsection (1) above may be granted by the City Manager in cases where lot size or topographical constraints require parking of vehicles closer than 50 feet from the right-of-way, or when the inventory of a business (such as rental trucks) greatly relies on the storage area within the subject 50- foot zone.

(Ord. No. S2021-045, 10/25/2021; Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025; Ord. No. S2026-006, § 2, 02/23/2026)

Effective on: 2/23/2026

30-5.L.6. Exempt Signs

The following signs are not subject to the regulations of this section and do not require the issuance of a Sign Permit prior to their placement and display:

  1. A.
    Governmental and Public Utility Signs
    Signs erected by, or on behalf of, a legally recognized unit of local, state, or federal government, including legal notices, identification and informational signs, and traffic warning, directional, or regulatory signs. Also, official signs of a noncommercial nature erected by public utilities, including safety, warning, and informational signs.
  2. B.
    Warning (Health, Safety, Hazard) Signs
    Temporary or permanent signs erected by government agencies, public utility companies, or construction companies to warn of danger or hazardous conditions, including signs indicating the presence of underground cables, gas lines, and similar devices or signs providing directions around such conditions.
  3. C.
    Internal Signs
    Signs located on the interior of buildings, courts, lobbies, stadiums or other structures which are not primarily intended to be seen from the exterior of such buildings or structures.
  4. D.
    Flags (Non-Advertising and Non-Informational)
    1. 1.
      Flags of the United States, North Carolina, County or City jurisdictions, foreign nations having diplomatic relations with the United States, or organizations of nations; flags of any religious, civic or fraternal organization, or any educational or cultural facility; any one corporate flag per lot; or any other flags adopted or sanctioned by the City Council, subject to United States Congressional protocol; except when such are used in connection with a commercial promotion or as an advertising device or as an integral part of a sign regulated under this section; provided not more than five such flags shall be flown on any lot or parcel, and provided such flags are displayed on permanent pole structures. Failure to display such flags in a manner which meets Congressional protocol will be a violation of this Ordinance.
    2. 2.
      A greater number than five flags may be flown for community facilities and institutions, such as, but not limited to cemeteries, military museums, public parks, athletic facilities and hospitals.
    3. 3.
      Proper maintenance shall not permit flags which are torn, ripped, frayed, separated from their grommets or incompletely fixed to their pole structures.
    4. 4.
      All flags used in connection with a commercial promotion, as an advertising device, or as an integral part of a commercial sign, must conform to the permanent freestanding sign regulations for the district in which they are located.
    5. 5.
      This exemption shall not apply to flags mounted or affixed to buildings in the DT-1 and DT-2 districts.
  5. E.
    Vehicular Signs
    1. 1.
      Signs painted or otherwise permanently affixed to currently licensed operational motor vehicles and trailers used in the normal transport of goods or persons where the sign is incidental and accessory to the primary use of the vehicle or trailer.
    2. 2.
      Temporary signs displayed upon the windows of vehicles in the inventory of a licensed automobile dealership.
  6. F.
    Incidental Signs
    1. 1.
      Any sign painted or affixed to an object or product, where the sign is clearly incidental and accessory to the primary use and purpose of the object or product including, but not limited to, product dispensers and point of purchase displays for newspapers, soft drinks, gasoline, ice, ATMs or similar items which indicate the contents of the machine, the name or logo of the supplier, the price or operating instructions.
    2. 2.
      Signs imprinted upon table umbrellas.
    3. 3.
      Barber poles associated with a currently occupied barbershop.
    4. 4.
      All other clearly incidental signs smaller than 1 square foot in area that are attached to a window, door, or wall of an occupiable structure, provided that where the aggregate area of such signage exceeds 8 square feet, it shall count toward the maximum permitted window signage permitted on that frontage.
  7. G.
    Signs Required by Law
    Legal notices and signs required by law, statute, ordinance, or regulation.
  8. H.
    Integral Decorative or Architectural Building Features
    Integral decorative or architectural features of buildings so long as such features do not contain advertising, letters, trademarks, moving parts or lights.
  9. I.
    Artistic Works
    Public displays of works of art, including murals, which contain no commercial messages or references to products or services offered upon the premises on which the work of art is displayed.
  10. J.
    Memorials
    Permanent memorials, plaques, cornerstones, tablets, gravestones or markers and similar objects that are noncommercial in nature.
  11. K.
    Historical Markers and Monuments
    Historical tablets, markers, plaques, or monuments specifically designated by resolution of City Council or the Historic Resources Commission due to their historic character or interest, as well as plaques and similar markers placed upon buildings, structures, and sites listed by the Secretary of the Interior on the National Register of Historic Places.
  12. L.
    Transportation Facilities Signs
    Informational signs indicating bus stops, taxi stands, train stations and similar transportation facilities.
  13. M.
    Signs at Polling Places
    Signs erected at polling places in conformance with the applicable provisions of North Carolina General Statute § 163-129.
  14. N.
    Window Displays
    Commercial or noncommercial displays of items, products, or services offered that may be viewed through a window from the outside,
  15. O.
    Outdoor Merchandise Displays
    Outside displays of merchandise offered for sale or rent on the premises where displayed. Only merchandise of the type that is actually for sale or rent, and not pictorial or other representations of such merchandise.
  16. P.
    Street Address Numbers
    Display of street address numbers on buildings, structures, and mailboxes in accordance with the requirements of the North Carolina Fire Prevention Code.
  17. Q.
    Fence Wraps
    Fence wraps on construction sites displaying signage in conformance with the standards of North Carolina General Statute 160D-908 shall be permitted for a period not to exceed 24 months from the date that such signage was initially installed on the site, provided that the period of permitted display shall terminate upon the receipt of a certificate of occupancy for the final portion of construction on the site.
  18. R.
    Internal Facing Sports Field Signage
    internal facing signs not exceeding 32 square feet in area affixed to a fence or wall around the exterior of a sports field or stadium which are not visible from a street right-­of-way, provided that such signage is well-maintained and does not present a threat to public safety.
  19. S.
    Transit System Advertising Signage. Third-party signage displayed on bus shelters and benches associated with the Fayetteville Area System of Transit under an agreement approved by the City Manager or his designee.
  20. T.
    Directional and Circulation Signage

    Permanent freestanding directional and circulation signage may be established along entranceways, within parking areas, and along internal drives to direct vehicular and pedestrian traffic, subject to the following standards:

    1. 1.
      Directional signs shall not exceed four (4) square feet of copy area.
    2. 2.
      Signs shall be placed in a manner that does not interfere with site distance requirements or otherwise obstruct visibility.
    3. 3.
      No directional signage shall be installed within a public right-of-way.
    4. 4.
      Directional signs may be internally or externally illuminated.

    ​Directional signs shall have a common design, including materials, color, illumination, and typeface.

(Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025; Ord. No. S2026-006, § 9, 02/23/2026)

Effective on: 2/23/2026

30-5.L.7. Temporary Signs

  1. A.
    Applicability
    The provisions of this section shall apply to the placement and display of temporary signage within the City’s jurisdiction. Any temporary sign that does not comply with the provisions of this Section is prohibited.
  2. B.
    Common Standards
    All temporary signs shall comply with the following common standards:
    1. 1.
      Temporary signs shall not be illuminated or be provided with any electric service.
    2. 2.
      Temporary signs shall not be placed within any public street right-of-way, including within medians, unless expressly permitted by this ordinance or the North Carolina General Statutes.
    3. 3.
      Temporary signs attached to building walls (other than permitted temporary window signs) shall not be placed in a manner that obstructs any window, door, fire department sprinkler connection, or street number sign.
    4. 4.
      Temporary signs shall not be affixed to a permanent sign or its supporting structure, including both building mounted and freestanding permanent signs.
    5. 5.
      Temporary signs shall not be placed in a manner that obstructs clear site distance (within the required sight triangle) at street intersections or driveways.
    6. 6.
      Temporary signs, other than Type 4 Freestanding Temporary Signs, shall not be placed upon or above any street, sidewalk, or other pedestrian walkway.
    7. 7.
      Temporary signs shall not be placed on the roof of a building, or affixed to a tree, utility pole, street sign or a parked motor vehicle.
    8. 8.
      Where temporary signs are limited in the duration of their display and limited in the total number of displays per calendar year, any required period of separation between such displays shall carry through to the following calendar year, and shall be observed prior to initiating the first allowed display during the new calendar year.
  3. C.
    Freestanding Temporary Signs
    1. 1.
      General Provisions
      The following standards shall apply to all Freestanding Temporary Signs:
      1. a.
        Signs shall not be affixed to poles, posts, stakes or other supporting structures that are permanently installed or anchored into the ground through the use of concrete foundations or similar anchoring techniques.
      2. b.
        Signs, other than Type 4 Freestanding Temporary signs, shall not encroach into the right-of-way of any public or private street.
      3. c.
        No more than one (1) Freestanding Temporary Sign may be displayed on a parcel or group of adjacent parcels under common ownership or tenancy at any given time, regardless of type, unless otherwise expressly permitted.
    2. 2.
      Type 1 Freestanding Temporary Signs
      Signs in this category consist of small, temporary yard signs that are typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of real estate, political campaigns, community events, and meeting announcements
      1. a.
        Where Permitted
        Type 1 Freestanding Temporary signs may be displayed in any district, except the DT-1 district, and may be associated with any use, including parcels containing only vacant or undeveloped land.
      2. b.
        Permitted Size
        The maximum sign display area is limited to six (6) square feet (per side if dual sided).
      3. c.
        Permitted Height
        The maximum height of the sign, including any supporting posts or stakes, is limited to four (4) feet above the adjacent grade.
      4. d.
        Number Permitted
        1. 1.
          General
          One (1) Type 1 Freestanding Temporary Sign may be displayed per 200 linear feet of street frontage upon each parcel, provided that where parcels have multiple street frontages, signs shall be separated by a minimum of 50 feet as measured in a straight line between them.
        2. 2.
          Suspension of Type 1 Freestanding Temporary Sign Limits
          Beginning on the 30th day prior to the beginning of early voting for any scheduled primary or election, as established by the North Carolina Board of Elections, and ending the 10th day following the primary or election, the limit on the number of Type 1 Freestanding Temporary Signs that may be displayed on a parcel containing a use in the Household Living use classification is suspended. All other regulations associated with such signage shall remain in effect during such period of suspension. Following the end of such period of suspension of this regulation, the limit on the number of permitted Type 1 Freestanding Temporary Signs shall be in force until the following period of suspension.
      5. e.
        Sign Material
        The display area (sign face) shall be composed of a rigid material.
      6. f.
        Mounting Standard
        Signs may only be mounted and supported by posts or stakes.
      7. g.
        Permitted Duration of Display
        There is no limit to the duration of the display of a Type 1 sign.
    3. 3.
      Type 2 Freestanding Temporary Signs
      Signs in this category are typically referred to as “banners” that are typically associated with (but not limited to) the announcement of community, sporting and similar special events.
      1. a.
        Where Permitted
        1. 1.
          Type 2 Freestanding Temporary signs are permitted in all districts, with the exception of the DT-1 district.
        2. 2.
          In districts where permitted, Type 2 signs may be displayed only on parcels or groups of adjacent parcels under common ownership which contain either:
          1. (i)
            A use in the Agricultural use classification.
          2. (ii)
            A multi-family use with twenty-four (24) or more dwelling units;
          3. (iii)
            A use in the Group Living use classification;
          4. (iv)
            A use in the Public and Institutional use category; or
          5. (iv)
            A use in the Recreation / Entertainment, Outdoor use category.
      2. b.
        Permitted Size
        The maximum sign display area is limited to eighteen (18) square feet (per side if dual sided).
      3. c.
        Permitted Height
        The maximum height of the sign, including any supporting posts or stakes, is limited to four (4) feet above the adjacent grade.
      4. d.
        Number Permitted
        One (1) Type 2 Freestanding Temporary Sign may be displayed on a parcel or group of adjacent parcels under common ownership or tenancy.
      5. e.
        Sign Material
        The display area (sign face) shall be composed of flexible material.
      6. f.
        Mounting Standard
        Signs may only be mounted and supported by posts or stakes.
      7. g.
        Number of Sides
        The display area may be either single or dual sided, but shall not consist of more than one (1) distinct component.
      8. h.
        Permitted Duration of Display
        Type 2 signs are permitted to be displayed for a maximum period of fourteen (14) calendar days. A maximum of six (6) separate displays are permitted during each calendar year with a minimum of ten (10) days of separation between displays.
    4. 4.
      Type 3 Freestanding Temporary Signs.
      Signs in this category are large temporary signs typically associated with (but not limited to) the advertisement of large tracts of land for sale, large-scale construction and Development activity, or the advertisement of commercial or industrial buildings for sale or lease.
      1. a.
        Where Permitted
        Type 3 Freestanding Temporary signs are permitted only on parcels or groups of adjacent parcels under common ownership which contain either:
        1. 1.
          A one- to four family dwelling where the size of the parcel or group of adjacent parcels under common ownership is a minimum of (3) acres in size;
        2. 2.
          Vacant or undeveloped land where the parcel or group of adjacent parcels under common ownership is a minimum of one (1) acre in size; or
        3. 3.
          A use in any other classification, category, or group, provided that the parcel upon which the sign is displayed has a minimum of 200 feet of frontage on a public street, as measured at the right-of-way.
      2. b.
        Simultaneous Display Prohibited
        A Type 3 Freestanding Temporary sign shall not be displayed upon a parcel that contains a permanent freestanding sign, including a sign structure that has had its display area removed.
      3. c.
        Permitted Size
        The maximum sign display area is limited to twenty-four (24) square feet (per side if dual sided).
      4. d.
        Permitted Height
        The maximum height of the sign, including any supporting posts or stakes, is limited to eight (8) feet above the adjacent grade.
      5. e.
        Number Permitted
        One (1) Type 3 Freestanding Temporary Sign may be displayed on a parcel or group of adjacent parcels under common ownership or tenancy.
      6. f.
        Sign Material
        The display area (sign face) shall be composed of a rigid material.
      7. g.
        Mounting Standard
        Signs shall be mounted to and supported by a minimum of two (2) separate posts or stakes.
      8. h.
        Number of Sides
        The display area may be either single or dual sided, provided that the sides of a dual sided sign may not exceed a separation of more than 30 degrees from parallel at their point of intersection.
      9. i.
        Permitted Duration of Display
        1. 1.
          Type 3 signs may be displayed without limit to duration upon any parcel or group of adjacent parcels under common ownership which contain only vacant or undeveloped land, including land whose principal use is the production of agricultural commodities or silviculture (forestry).
        2. 2.
          In all other cases, the duration of display shall be limited to two (2) years, provided that this limit shall not apply if the land, and any building(s) and/or structure(s) upon such parcel or group of parcels, is not occupied or in active use for purposes other than the occupancy of a one- to four family dwelling at any time during the period of display.
        3. 3.
          Where the display of a Type 3 sign is subject to a limit on the duration of display, there shall be a minimum period of separation of sixty (60) days between the removal of the previously permitted sign and the display of a new sign. Such period of separation shall apply in all cases where a sign subject to a limit on the duration of its display is removed, regardless of whether the maximum allowed duration for its display has been reached at the time of its removal.
    5. 5.
      Type 4 Freestanding Temporary Signs
      The category of signs defined as Type 4 Freestanding Temporary signs shall include only those signs which are constructed in a manner that is commonly referred to as an “A-frame” or “sandwich board” sign. The faces of the sign shall be connected at the top by hinges or similar mechanisms and the sign shall be self-supporting when placed in its display position.
      1. a.
        Where Permitted
        Type 4 Freestanding Temporary signs may only be displayed in association with a nonresidential use, subject to the following standards.
      2. b.
        Permitted Size
        The maximum sign display area is limited to eight (8) square feet (per side if dual sided).
      3. c.
        Permitted Sign Dimensions
        The maximum height of the sign is limited to four (4) feet above the grade of the surface upon which it is displayed when placed in its display position, and shall have a width of no more than four (4) feet.
      4. d.
        Sign Material
        The display areas (sign faces) shall be composed of a rigid material, such as wood, metal, slate, or a high-quality synthetic material.
      5. e.
        Number Permitted
        One (1) Type 4 Freestanding Temporary Sign may be displayed per customer entrance, subject to the limitations on separation under Placement Standards.
      6. f.
        Placement Standards
        1. 1.
          A Type 4 sign may only be placed within an area bounded by an imaginary line running tea (10) feet along the building wall from the outer edges of the customer entrance, extending ten (10) feet perpendicular to the building wall and thence connecting at the center point of the customer entrance ten (10) feet from the building wall.
        2. 2.
          Type 4 signs may be placed upon a public sidewalk or other pedestrian walkway, provided that a minimum of four (4) feet of unobstructed clearance is maintained along the directional path of the walkway.
        3. 3.
          Type 4 signs associated with an individual tenant space with multiple entrances shall be separated by a minimum of 50 feet.
        4. 4.
          In no case shall a Type 4 sign be placed within a landscaped area, or within a vehicular use area, including parking areas.
      7. g.
        Permitted Duration of Display
        Type 4 signs may only be displayed during the period beginning 30 minutes prior to the daily opening and ending 30 minutes following the daily closing of the entity displaying the sign.
    6. 6.
      Type 5 Freestanding Temporary Signs
      The category of signs defined as Type 5 Freestanding Temporary signs are typically known as “feather flags.”
      1. a.
        Where Permitted
        Type 5 Freestanding Temporary signs may be displayed in any zoning district with the exception of the DT-1 and DT-2 districts, and areas designated as a Historic or Landmark Overlay District.
      2. b.
        Permitted Size
        Flags may not have a width of greater than three (3) feet.
      3. c.
        Permitted Height
        The maximum height of the sign (flag and pole) is limited to 10 feet above the grade of the surface upon which it is displayed when placed in its display position.
      4. d.
        Number Permitted
        One (1) sign is permitted per 50 feet of lot frontage, with a maximum of four signs per parcel.
      5. e.
        Sign Material
        Flag display areas shall be composed of a flexible fabric material.
      6. f.
        Placement Standards
        Type 5 signs shall be separated by a minimum of 50 feet from each other.
      7. g.
        Mounting Standards
        Type 5 signs shall be affixed with ground mounts with the pole installed perpendicular to the ground. Aboveground mounts including, but not limited to, feet or legs shall not be permitted. Type 5 signs shall not be mounted to any other structure.
      8. h.
        Permitted Duration of Display
        There is no limit to the duration of display of a Type 5 sign, provided that the sign is well-maintained and is not torn, faded, flayed, damaged, broken, or otherwise in disrepair.
      9. i.
        Attachments
        No other sign, object, or device shall be attached to a Type 5 sign.
  4. D.
    Wall Mounted Temporary Signs
    Temporary signs mounted to building walls may be displayed subject to the following provisions:
    1. 1.
      Where Permitted
      1. a.
        Wall mounted temporary signs are permitted in accordance with these regulations in all districts, subject to the following use restrictions.
      2. b.
        Wall mounted temporary signs are permitted to be displayed on buildings housing a principal use within the Public and Institutional, Commercial or Industrial use classification, as well as any building occupied in its entirety by a unit of government or a registered non-profit corporation.
    2. 2.
      Number Permitted
      One (1) temporary wall sign may be displayed per building occupied by a single tenant. Buildings designed for occupancy by multiple tenants where each tenant has a separate entrance may display one (1) temporary wall sign per tenant space. Buildings occupied by multiple tenants that share a common entrance may not display more than one (1) temporary wall sign at any given time.
    3. 3.
      Mounting Requirement
      Temporary wall signs shall be mounted flush against the building wall and secured by fasteners or other anchors at each corner.
    4. 4.
      Maximum Display Area
      The maximum display area for temporary wall signs shall be the greater of eighteen (18) square feet or twenty-five percent (25%) of the maximum permitted permanent wall signage, not to exceed 72 square feet. In the DT-1 district, the maximum size shall be limited to six (6) square feet.
    5. 5.
      Permitted Duration of Display
      Temporary wall signs may be displayed for a maximum of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days.
    6. 6.
      Permitted Number of Displays
      Temporary wall signs may be displayed a maximum of four (4) times per calendar year, with a minimum of thirty (30) days of separation between removing a temporary wall sign and displaying a new temporary wall sign. The minimum time period between temporary sign displays for buildings housing multiple uses that share a common entrance is ten (10) days.
    7. 7.
      Supplemental Display
      Beginning on the date that a certificate of occupancy for a newly constructed building or permit for a bona fide change of use is issued and ending 60 calendar days following the issuance of said certificate or permit, a temporary wall sign in compliance with the remaining standards of this section may be displayed for the duration of the 60-day period. The display of a temporary wall sign subject to this provision shall be counted as one of the four (4) permitted displays for the calendar year in which the sign is removed. The required thirty (30) day separation period shall begin upon the removal of such sign.
  5. E.
    Temporary Window Signage
    The display of temporary window signs shall be regulated by the general window signage standard established in Section 30-5.L.8(b)(3).
  6. F.
    Festival and Special Event Signage
    A permit for the display of temporary signage advertising a festival or special event may be issued by the City Manager or his designee upon application by the event organizer. Such application shall specify the size, location, illumination, design, and duration of display for the temporary signs. If approved, a compliance deposit for each sign in an amount established by the City Council shall be required. Each permitted sign must be removed upon the expiration date of the approval. The compliance deposit shall be refunded when the permitted sign(s) is removed in a timely manner upon the expiration date of the approval. In addition to the other remedies cited in this Ordinance, failure to remove a sign upon the expiration date of the approval will result in the removal of the sign(s) by the City and retention of the entire compliance deposit.
  7. G.
    Temporary Use Signage
    The issuance of a Temporary Use Permit allows the display of one (1) Freestanding Temporary Sign (Type 1, 2 or 4) at the permitted location of the Temporary Use for the period of operation as specified in the Temporary Use Permit.
  8. H.
    Supplemental Land Development Signage
    Beginning upon the date of land Development or construction activity authorized by a building permit, site plan, or preliminary subdivision plat approval and ending on the date that a certificate of compliance, certificate of occupancy, or final plat approval is granted, two (2) additional Type 1,2 or 3 Freestanding Temporary Signs may be displayed upon the site of the permitted activity.
  9. I.
    Supplemental Commercial Business Commencement and Cessation Signage
    1. 1.
      Uses in the Commercial Use Group are permitted to display up to two (2) conforming Type 2 Freestanding Temporary signs per street frontage and one (1) Wall Mounted Temporary signs per street frontage for a period of 30 days to coincide with the period of the bona fide initial occupancy or commencement of business operations.
    2. 2.
      Such signage shall also be permitted for a period of 30 days coinciding with the bona fide cessation of a commercial use, provided that it shall be a violation of this Ordinance for the business to continue in operation or resume operations at the same location within 30 days following the date of cessation specified in the registration of the supplemental signage with the Planning and Development Department.
    3. 3.
      No more than one (1) display authorized by the proceeding may occur within any 12-month period on a parcel that is individually occupied or in association with any individual tenant space in a multi-building or other multi-tenant Development.
  10. J.
    Supplemental Federal Holiday Temporary Signage
    1. 1.
      Uses in the Commercial Use Group are permitted to display one (1) conforming Type 2 Temporary Freestanding sign per street frontage and one (1) conforming Wall Mounted Temporary Sign per building frontage for three (3) days prior to a recognized Federal Holiday, the day of the Federal Holiday, and the day immediately following the Federal Holiday.
    2. 2.
      The display of such signs shall not count toward limits on the otherwise applicable limits on frequency of display per calendar year for each type of sign.
  11. K.
    UC District Supplemental Temporary Signs
    Colleges and universities located within the UC zoning district may display the following supplemental temporary signage.
    1. 1.
      Supplemental Type 2 Signage Attached to Light Poles
      1. a.
        Type 2 Freestanding Temporary signs of a unified design may be affixed to and displayed on privately owned and maintained light poles situated on the campus of the college or university.
      2. b.
        Such signs shall not exceed 15 square feet in area.
      3. c.
        There is no limit to the number of Type 2 signs that may be displayed in conformance with the provisions above.
    2. 2.
      Supplemental Type 5 Freestanding Temporary Signs
      1. a.
        The restriction on the number of Type 5 sings shall not apply to colleges and universities in the UC district, provided that such signs maintain a 50-foot separation from each other and are set back at least 10 feet from property lines.

(Ord. No. 2014-020, § 3c, 11/24/2014; Ord. No. S2016-008, § 7, 8/22/2016; Ord. No. S2019-015, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2020-010, § 1, 09/28/2020; Ord. No. S2022-031, § 2, 10/24/2022; Ord. No. S0224-012, § 1, 05/28/2024; Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025; Ord. No. S2026-006, § 1, 02/23/2026)

Effective on: 2/23/2026

30-5.L.8. Permanent Signs

  1. A.
    Permanent Signs Permitted within Residential Zoning Districts
    The following regulations shall govern the display of permanent signs within the AR, SF-15, SF-10, SF-6, MR-5, and MH zoning districts.
    1. 1.
      Freestanding Residential Development Identification Sign
      1. a.
        Where Permitted
        Freestanding residential development identification signs shall be permitted in association with any residential development containing at least 12 lots or dwelling units, including single-family attached and detached developments, multi-family developments, and mobile home parks. Such signage may also be permitted within the interior of a residential development to identify the location of community amenities, such as clubhouses and recreational areas.
      2. b.
        Number Permitted
        1. 1.
          One double-faced sign or two single-faced signs are permitted at each entrance to the residential development from an external street.
        2. 2.
          One double or single faced sign is permitted along each road frontage adjacent to a community amenity area, where such amenity is located at least 100 feet from an external street.
      3. c.
        Sign Type
        Residential development identification signs shall be designed as a ground mounted monument style sign or may be incorporated into a perimeter landscape wall or similar feature.
      4. d.
        Permitted Sign Area
        Residential development identification signs shall not exceed 32 square feet in area. When attached to walls or other landscaping features, only the area containing text, graphics, or logos shall count toward the maximum area.
      5. e.
        Permitted Sign Height
        Residential development identification signs shall not exceed six (6) feet in height.
      6. f.
        Permitted Location
        Signs shall be located within 100 feet of the entrance to the residential development with which they are associated. If requested, the City of Fayetteville may grant an encroachment agreement to permit the placement of ground mounted monument style signage within the right-of-way at the entrance of the development, provided the location, design, and construction are approved by the Traffic Engineering Division and the Fire Department.
      7. g.
        Illumination
        Signs may only be externally illuminated.
    2. 2.
      Freestanding Non-Residential Signs
      The following permanent signs shall be permitted in association with permitted non- residential uses within a residential zoning district.
      1. a.
        Freestanding Non-Residential Use Identification Sign
        1. 1.
          Where Permitted
          Freestanding non-residential use identification signs may be established on any parcel or group of parcels under common ownership containing a permitted non-residential use in a residential zoning district.
        2. 2.
          Number Permitted
          One (1) sign is permitted per street frontage.
        3. 3.
          Sign Type
          Non-residential use identification signs shall be designed as a ground mounted monument style sign.
        4. 4.
          Permitted Sign Area
          Non-residential use identification signs shall not exceed 32 square feet in area.
        5. 5.
          Permitted Sign Height
          Non-residential use identification signs shall not exceed six (6) feet in height.
        6. 6.
          Illumination
          Only external illumination is permitted.
      2. b.
        Freestanding Directional and Circulation Signage
        Permanent freestanding directional and circulation signage may be established along entranceways, within parking areas, and along internal drives to direct vehicular and pedestrian traffic, subject to the following standards:
        1. 1.
          Directional signs shall not exceed four (4) square feet of copy area.
        2. 2.
          Signs shall be placed in a manner that does not interfere with site distance requirements or otherwise obstruct visibility.
        3. 3.
          No directional signage shall be installed within a public right-of-way.
        4. 4.
          Directional signs may be internally or externally illuminated.
        5. 5.
          Directional signs shall have a common design, including materials, color, illumination, and typeface.
    3. 3.
      External-Facing Sports Field Signage
      External-facing signage may be established upon fences and walls enclosing sports fields and stadiums exclusively hosting amateur youth sports, subject to the following regulations:
      1. a.
        Number Permitted
        One (1) externally facing sign is permitted per each corresponding internally facing sign. No externally facing sign shall be displayed without the presence of an identical sign facing inward toward the sporting field or stadium.
      2. b.
        Location
        The sign shall be attached to a fence or wall enclosing a sports field or stadium that is at least 75 feet from a street right-of-way or any residentiafly used or zoned property line.
      3. c.
        Permitted Sign Height
        Signs shall not exceed six (6) feet in height and shall not extend beyond the top of the fence or wall to which they are mounted.
      4. d.
        Design
        Signs shall be constructed of a rigid material that permits secure mounting to a fence or wall. Signs shall all be of a similar shape and size to present a uniform appearance along the fence or wall.
      5. e.
        Arrangement
        All signs shall be mounted in a single row along the fence or wall. No sign shall be mounted above or below another sign.
      6. f.
        Illumination
        Signs may not have any direct illumination.
    4. 4.
      Home Occupation Signage
      A permitted Home Occupation is allowed to display one (1) wall sign with an area of up to four (4) square feet that is mounted directly onto the wall of the structure in which the occupation is performed. Signs shall not be internally illuminated or have direct external illumination.
    5. 5.
      Wall Signage for Non-Residential Uses

      Non-residential uses may have one (1) wall sign not to exceed 32 square feet in copy area. The sign may be externally or internally illuminated, except that no illumination is permitted when facing a residentially zoned property or use within 50 feet of the property line.

    6. 6.
      Signage for Governmental Uses

      Governmental uses, including, but not limited to, police or fire stations, resource centers, recreation centers, and public or private schools licensed through the State of North Carolina, may use the signage regulations as listed for the O&I Zoning District.

  2. B.
    Permanent Signs Permitted within General Non-Residential Zoning Districts
    The following regulations shall govern the display of permanent signs within the OI, NC, LC, CC, MU, BP, LI, and HI districts. Property owners are encouraged to pursue high quality signage through the use of performance incentives and alternative signage plans for unique or innovative sign designs, such as three-dimensional signs.
    1. 1.
      Freestanding Signs
      The following standards shall govern the display of freestanding signs.
      1. a.
        General Standards
        1. 1.
          Permitted Number of Signs
          1. i.
            One (1) freestanding sign is permitted per parcel per street frontage with a length of up to 150 feet.
          2. ii.
            Parcels with street frontage exceeding 150 feet, may place one additional freestanding sign per each additional 100 feet of street frontage, up to a maximum of three (3) freestanding signs.
          3. iii.
            Automobile sales uses holding franchises for the sale of multiple makes of vehicles on a single parcel shall be permitted to have at least one (1) freestanding sign per franchised make being held for sale on the parcel.
          4. iv.
            A parcel containing a theater use which also contains other commercial uses in a combined development shall be permitted to have one (1) additional freestanding sign.
        2. 2.
          Minimum Separation of Signs
          1. i.
            Freestanding signs, other than directional signs, located on the same parcel shall be separated by a minimum distance of 75 linear feet.
          2. ii.
            Freestanding signs shall be separated from other freestanding signs on adjacent parcels by a minimum distance of 20 linear feet.
        3. 3.
          Unified Signage Style
          Where multiple freestanding signs are permitted on a single parcel, only one type of freestanding sing (ground or pole) shall be permitted.
        4. 4.
          Supplemental Sign Height and Copy Area Allowance
          Where a single entity occupies one or more contiguous parcels exceeding the minimum size threshold established herein, the following allowances shall be made for supplemental height and copy area for permitted freestanding ground and poles signs as follows:
          1. i.
            Parcels 3.0 acres to 4.99 acres: 20% increase in height and copy area
          2. ii.
            Parcels 5.0 acres and larger: 30% increase in height and copy area
      2. b.
        Ground Signs
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.b. Ground Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign with a base which either appears to rest on the ground or which has a support which places the base and portion of the sign copy area less than ten feet from the ground. Pylon and monument signs are ground signs. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 3 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       7575150150150100150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       121220202012202020 
REQUIRED SETBACKGround signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 10 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI and NC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of either 24 square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 75 square feet.
  • In the UC zoning district, the maximum sign copy area shall be one (1) square foot per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed one hundred (100) square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of forty-eight (48) square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
  • All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
NOTES
  • Internal and external illumination are permitted.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.b. Ground Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign with a base which either appears to rest on the ground or which has a support which places the base and portion of the sign copy area less than ten feet from the ground. Pylon and monument signs are ground signs. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 3 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       7575150150150100150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       121220202012202020 
REQUIRED SETBACKGround signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 10 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI and NC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of either 24 square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 75 square feet.
  • In the UC zoning district, the maximum sign copy area shall be one (1) square foot per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed one hundred (100) square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of forty-eight (48) square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
  • All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
NOTES
  • Internal and external illumination are permitted.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.b. Ground Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign with a base which either appears to rest on the ground or which has a support which places the base and portion of the sign copy area less than ten feet from the ground. Pylon and monument signs are ground signs. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 3 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       7575150150150100150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       121220202012202020 
REQUIRED SETBACKGround signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 10 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI and NC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of either 24 square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 75 square feet.
  • In the UC zoning district, the maximum sign copy area shall be one (1) square foot per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed one hundred (100) square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of forty-eight (48) square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
  • All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
NOTES
  • Internal and external illumination are permitted.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.b. Ground Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign with a base which either appears to rest on the ground or which has a support which places the base and portion of the sign copy area less than ten feet from the ground. Pylon and monument signs are ground signs. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 3 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       7575150150150100150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       121220202012202020 
REQUIRED SETBACKGround signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 10 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI and NC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of either 24 square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 75 square feet.
  • In the UC zoning district, the maximum sign copy area shall be one (1) square foot per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed one hundred (100) square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be the greater of forty-eight (48) square feet or one-half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
  • All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
NOTES
  • Internal and external illumination are permitted.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
  1.  
    1.  
      1. c.
        Pole Signs
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.c. Pole Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign which is supported from the ground by one or more poles or similar support structures of narrow width (maximum of 20% of the width of the sign face). (Not a ground sign.)   
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 4 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       505015015015050150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       151525252515252525 
REQUIRED SETBACKPole signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 5 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI, NC and UC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 50 square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • In any situation in which multiple pole signs are permitted on a single parcel and the owner chooses to utile no more than one (1) pole sign per frontage, the permitted copy area of the sign may be increased by 25%. Any sign erected utilizing this incentive shall be removed or otherwise made conforming to the general standards before additional permitted pole signs may be placed on the parcel or frontage.
NOTES
  • Only internal illumination is permitted.
  • Rectangular covers having a color and finish similar to the main body of the sign shall be installed around each supporting pole from the sign base or grade to the bottom of the sign. The cumulative width of the covers shall be a minimum of 20% and maximum of 50% of the width of the sign.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.c. Pole Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign which is supported from the ground by one or more poles or similar support structures of narrow width (maximum of 20% of the width of the sign face). (Not a ground sign.)   
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 4 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       505015015015050150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       151525252515252525 
REQUIRED SETBACKPole signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 5 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI, NC and UC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 50 square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • In any situation in which multiple pole signs are permitted on a single parcel and the owner chooses to utile no more than one (1) pole sign per frontage, the permitted copy area of the sign may be increased by 25%. Any sign erected utilizing this incentive shall be removed or otherwise made conforming to the general standards before additional permitted pole signs may be placed on the parcel or frontage.
NOTES
  • Only internal illumination is permitted.
  • Rectangular covers having a color and finish similar to the main body of the sign shall be installed around each supporting pole from the sign base or grade to the bottom of the sign. The cumulative width of the covers shall be a minimum of 20% and maximum of 50% of the width of the sign.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.c. Pole Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign which is supported from the ground by one or more poles or similar support structures of narrow width (maximum of 20% of the width of the sign face). (Not a ground sign.)   
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 4 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       505015015015050150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       151525252515252525 
REQUIRED SETBACKPole signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 5 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI, NC and UC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 50 square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • In any situation in which multiple pole signs are permitted on a single parcel and the owner chooses to utile no more than one (1) pole sign per frontage, the permitted copy area of the sign may be increased by 25%. Any sign erected utilizing this incentive shall be removed or otherwise made conforming to the general standards before additional permitted pole signs may be placed on the parcel or frontage.
NOTES
  • Only internal illumination is permitted.
  • Rectangular covers having a color and finish similar to the main body of the sign shall be installed around each supporting pole from the sign base or grade to the bottom of the sign. The cumulative width of the covers shall be a minimum of 20% and maximum of 50% of the width of the sign.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.1.c. Pole Signs
DEFINITIONA freestanding sign which is supported from the ground by one or more poles or similar support structures of narrow width (maximum of 20% of the width of the sign face). (Not a ground sign.)   
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
See note 4 belowP P P P P P P P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

       505015015015050150150150 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

       151525252515252525 
REQUIRED SETBACKPole signs shall be setback from all adjoining rights-of-way and property lines by a minimum of 5 feet.
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • In the OI, NC and UC zoning districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 50 square feet.
  • In the LC, CC, MU, BP, LI and HI districts the maximum sign copy area shall be one - half square foot (0.5) per linear foot of street frontage, not to exceed 150 square feet.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • In any situation in which multiple pole signs are permitted on a single parcel and the owner chooses to utile no more than one (1) pole sign per frontage, the permitted copy area of the sign may be increased by 25%. Any sign erected utilizing this incentive shall be removed or otherwise made conforming to the general standards before additional permitted pole signs may be placed on the parcel or frontage.
NOTES
  • Only internal illumination is permitted.
  • Rectangular covers having a color and finish similar to the main body of the sign shall be installed around each supporting pole from the sign base or grade to the bottom of the sign. The cumulative width of the covers shall be a minimum of 20% and maximum of 50% of the width of the sign.
  • Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 30% of the sign face. Either manual changeable copy or electronic changeable copy is permitted. Where changeable copy displays are utilized, the display area shall be installed flush with the sign face.
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.a.6.
  1.  
    1. 2.
      Building Mounted Signage
      The following standards shall govern the display of wall, window, canopy, awning, and marquee signs.
      1. a.
        General Standards
        1. 1.
          Permitted Copy Area Calculation
          Unless otherwise stated, the permitted copy area for building mounted signage shall be calculated as the greater of either:
          1. i.
            One and one-half (1.5) square feet per linear foot of building wall or width of tenant space; or
          2. ii.
            15% of the area of the building wall (or portion of the building wall for the tenant space) between the base of the building and top of the parapet wall for flat roofed buildings or bottom of the eaves for buildings with sloped roofs.
      2. b.
        Wall Signs
Table 30-5.L.8.B.2.b Wall Signs
DEFINITIONA sign which is placed on and/or attached to and supported throughout its entire length by the facade or exterior side of a building (or fence) wall by means of adhesive, paint, manufacturing process, structural and/or mechanical attachment, where such sign is not more than twelve (12) inches from the facade or exterior wall line and when its exposed face is parallel or approximately parallel to the plane of the building or structure on which the sign is affixed. Such sign may not extend above the roof line. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC DT-2BP LI HI 
See note belowP 
MAX NUMBER OF WALL SIGNS PER BUILDING OR TENANT SPACE       No Maximum (see note below)
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for building mounted signage shall be calculated as the greater of either:
    1. a)
      Copy area (1.5 square feet per linear foot of building frontage) or
    2. b)
      15% of the area of the building (or portion of the building wall for the tenant space) between the base of the building and top of the parapet wall for flat roofed buildings or bottom of the eaves for buildings with sloped roofs.
    3. c)
      Manual changeable copy sign area is not permitted on the face of a wall sign.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • The permitted area of such signs may be increased by up to 50% if one of the following:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style design is utilized for the entire sign.
    2. b)
      All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
    3. c)
      All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
  • Wall signs shall not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall to which they are attached. The foregoing shall apply to:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style signs:
    2. b)
      Graphics, text, and logos that are affixed to, or protrude from, the face of a sign six (6) inches or less where the depth of the body of the sign does not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall.
  • Wall signs may be internally or externally illuminated.
  • Digital reader boards and similar electronic display screens shall not be utilized for a wall sign.
  • Wall signs shall not be painted directly on the surface of a building.
NOTES
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see sections 30-5.L.8.A.6.
  • For non-residential uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.A.5.
  • Wall mounted signs are allowed regardless of the type. Wall mounted signs include wall, canopy and awning, marquee, and projecting signs.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.2.b Wall Signs
DEFINITIONA sign which is placed on and/or attached to and supported throughout its entire length by the facade or exterior side of a building (or fence) wall by means of adhesive, paint, manufacturing process, structural and/or mechanical attachment, where such sign is not more than twelve (12) inches from the facade or exterior wall line and when its exposed face is parallel or approximately parallel to the plane of the building or structure on which the sign is affixed. Such sign may not extend above the roof line. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC DT-2BP LI HI 
See note belowP 
MAX NUMBER OF WALL SIGNS PER BUILDING OR TENANT SPACE       No Maximum (see note below)
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for building mounted signage shall be calculated as the greater of either:
    1. a)
      Copy area (1.5 square feet per linear foot of building frontage) or
    2. b)
      15% of the area of the building (or portion of the building wall for the tenant space) between the base of the building and top of the parapet wall for flat roofed buildings or bottom of the eaves for buildings with sloped roofs.
    3. c)
      Manual changeable copy sign area is not permitted on the face of a wall sign.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • The permitted area of such signs may be increased by up to 50% if one of the following:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style design is utilized for the entire sign.
    2. b)
      All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
    3. c)
      All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
  • Wall signs shall not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall to which they are attached. The foregoing shall apply to:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style signs:
    2. b)
      Graphics, text, and logos that are affixed to, or protrude from, the face of a sign six (6) inches or less where the depth of the body of the sign does not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall.
  • Wall signs may be internally or externally illuminated.
  • Digital reader boards and similar electronic display screens shall not be utilized for a wall sign.
  • Wall signs shall not be painted directly on the surface of a building.
NOTES
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see sections 30-5.L.8.A.6.
  • For non-residential uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.A.5.
  • Wall mounted signs are allowed regardless of the type. Wall mounted signs include wall, canopy and awning, marquee, and projecting signs.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.2.b Wall Signs
DEFINITIONA sign which is placed on and/or attached to and supported throughout its entire length by the facade or exterior side of a building (or fence) wall by means of adhesive, paint, manufacturing process, structural and/or mechanical attachment, where such sign is not more than twelve (12) inches from the facade or exterior wall line and when its exposed face is parallel or approximately parallel to the plane of the building or structure on which the sign is affixed. Such sign may not extend above the roof line. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC DT-2BP LI HI 
See note belowP 
MAX NUMBER OF WALL SIGNS PER BUILDING OR TENANT SPACE       No Maximum (see note below)
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for building mounted signage shall be calculated as the greater of either:
    1. a)
      Copy area (1.5 square feet per linear foot of building frontage) or
    2. b)
      15% of the area of the building (or portion of the building wall for the tenant space) between the base of the building and top of the parapet wall for flat roofed buildings or bottom of the eaves for buildings with sloped roofs.
    3. c)
      Manual changeable copy sign area is not permitted on the face of a wall sign.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • The permitted area of such signs may be increased by up to 50% if one of the following:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style design is utilized for the entire sign.
    2. b)
      All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
    3. c)
      All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
  • Wall signs shall not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall to which they are attached. The foregoing shall apply to:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style signs:
    2. b)
      Graphics, text, and logos that are affixed to, or protrude from, the face of a sign six (6) inches or less where the depth of the body of the sign does not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall.
  • Wall signs may be internally or externally illuminated.
  • Digital reader boards and similar electronic display screens shall not be utilized for a wall sign.
  • Wall signs shall not be painted directly on the surface of a building.
NOTES
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see sections 30-5.L.8.A.6.
  • For non-residential uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.A.5.
  • Wall mounted signs are allowed regardless of the type. Wall mounted signs include wall, canopy and awning, marquee, and projecting signs.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.2.b Wall Signs
DEFINITIONA sign which is placed on and/or attached to and supported throughout its entire length by the facade or exterior side of a building (or fence) wall by means of adhesive, paint, manufacturing process, structural and/or mechanical attachment, where such sign is not more than twelve (12) inches from the facade or exterior wall line and when its exposed face is parallel or approximately parallel to the plane of the building or structure on which the sign is affixed. Such sign may not extend above the roof line. 
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICT CD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC DT-2BP LI HI 
See note belowP 
MAX NUMBER OF WALL SIGNS PER BUILDING OR TENANT SPACE       No Maximum (see note below)
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for building mounted signage shall be calculated as the greater of either:
    1. a)
      Copy area (1.5 square feet per linear foot of building frontage) or
    2. b)
      15% of the area of the building (or portion of the building wall for the tenant space) between the base of the building and top of the parapet wall for flat roofed buildings or bottom of the eaves for buildings with sloped roofs.
    3. c)
      Manual changeable copy sign area is not permitted on the face of a wall sign.
SIGN SIZE INCENTIVES
  • The permitted area of such signs may be increased by up to 50% if one of the following:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style design is utilized for the entire sign.
    2. b)
      All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
    3. c)
      All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
  • Wall signs shall not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall to which they are attached. The foregoing shall apply to:
    1. a)
      Channel letter style signs:
    2. b)
      Graphics, text, and logos that are affixed to, or protrude from, the face of a sign six (6) inches or less where the depth of the body of the sign does not project more than six (6) inches from the building wall.
  • Wall signs may be internally or externally illuminated.
  • Digital reader boards and similar electronic display screens shall not be utilized for a wall sign.
  • Wall signs shall not be painted directly on the surface of a building.
NOTES
  • For governmental uses in residential districts see sections 30-5.L.8.A.6.
  • For non-residential uses in residential districts see section 30-5.L.8.A.5.
  • Wall mounted signs are allowed regardless of the type. Wall mounted signs include wall, canopy and awning, marquee, and projecting signs.
  1.  
    1.  
      1. c.
        Canopy and Awning Signs
        1. 1.
          Canopy and awning signs may be painted or printed upon a canopy or awning or may be attached, provided such attached sign shall be affixed flat to the surface of the canopy or awning completely within the limits of the canopy or awning.
        2. 2.
          Canopy and awning signs may only be externally illuminated.
        3. 3.
          Under-canopy, canopy soffit, or ceiling signs shall be hung beneath a canopy so that the copy or display shall be perpendicular to the building wall. Signage shall be permitted along the edge of a canopy provided the sign copy shall not extend in any direction above, beyond or below the canopy edge. The fringe or drip-flap portion of a canvas awning shall be considered as a canopy edge.
        4. 4.
          Signage shall be permitted above the edge of the canopy on the protection covering of the canopy provided the signage is within the parallel edges of the protective covering and is an integral part of the protective covering or is applied directly thereto.
        5. 5.
          Except that free standing Canopies may have two (2) wall signs, with a maximum copy area not to exceed one (1) square foot of sign per one (1) linear foot of canopy elevation that the sign is placed on.
      2. d.
        Marquee Signs
        1. 1.
          The copy area of a marquee sign shall be permitted to extend the full length of the sign, without regard to copy area limitations for building mounted signs.
        2. 2.
          The copy area of a marquee sign shall not exceed six (6) feet in height.
        3. 3.
          Marquee signs may project over a pedestrian walkway, provided that a minimum overhead clearance of nine (9) feet is maintained from the grade of the walkway.
        4. 4.
          Marquee signs may not project within two (2) feet of the curb or edge of a street.
        5. 5.
          Where a marquee sign projects into a public right-of-way, a right-of-way encroachment permit shall be required prior to the approval of the sign permit.
        6. 6.
          The copy area of a marquee sign may consist of either manual changeable copy or a digital readerboard or similar electronic display.
        7. 7.
          Marquee signs may be either externally or internally illuminated.
      3. e.
        Projecting Signs
        1. 1.
          Projecting signs shall not extend vertically above the roof line or parapet wall of the building to which it is mounted.
        2. 2.
          Where a projecting sign is located above a pedestrian walkway, a minimum overhead clearance of nine (9) feet shall be maintained from the grade of the walkway to the lowest point of the sign.
        3. 3.
          Projecting signs may not project within two (2) feet of the curb or edge of a street.
        4. 4.
          Where a projecting sign projects into a public right-of-way, a right-of-way encroachment permit shall be required prior to the approval of the sign permit.
        5. 5.
          Projecting signs may be externally or internally illuminated.
        6. 6.
          To incentivize the use of high-quality design and materials in projecting signs, the permitted copy area of such signs may be increased by up to 50% if one of the following options is used:
          1. i.
            Channel letter style design is utilized for the entire sign.
          2. ii.
            All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
          3. iii.
            All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, hollow sign structure, with such routed area not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.
    2. 3.
      Window Signs
      Signs affixed to the interior or exterior of the glazed area of any window or glass door are permitted to cover a maximum of 100% of the square footage of glazed area on each building frontage.
    3. 4.
      External Facing Sports Field Signage
      External-facing signage may be established upon fences and walls enclosing sports fields and stadiums exclusively hosting amateur youth sports, subject to the following regulations:
      1. a.
        Number Permitted
        One (1) sign is permitted per each corresponding internally facing sign. No externally facing sign shall be displayed without the presence of an identical sign facing inward toward the sporting field or stadium.
      2. b.
        Location
        The sign shall be attached to a fence or wall enclosing a sports field or stadium that is at least 75 feet from a street right-of-way or any residentially used or zoned property line.
      3. c.
        Permitted Sign Height
        Signs shall not exceed six (6) feet in height and shall not extend beyond the top of the fence or wall to which they are mounted.
      4. d.
        Design
        Signs shall be constructed of a rigid material that permits secure mounting to a fence or wall. Signs shall all be of a similar shape and size to present a uniform appearance along the fence or wall.
      5. e.
        Arrangement
        All signs shall be mounted in a single row along the fence or wall. No sign shall be mounted above or below another sign.
      6. f.
        Illumination
        Signs may not have any direct illumination.
    4. 5.
      Billboard Signs
Table 30-5.L.8.B.5 Billboard Signs
DEFINITIONA permanent, usually freestanding, off-premises sign affixed to the ground or to a building, owned by a person, corporation or other entity that engages in the business of selling or leasing the advertising space on the sign and which advertises an establishment, service, commodity, goods or entertainment sold or offered on premises other than that on which such sign is located. Such signs commonly referred to as "outdoor advertising signs" are generally designed so that the copy or posters on the sign can be changed frequently.     
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICTCD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
 // / / / / / / / / / / / / P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

               300400 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

               2530 
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for Billboard Signs will be measured by the total square feet of the sign itself which will need to comply with the max square feet of the underlying zoning district.
LOCATION RESTRICTIONS
  • No billboard shall be located within 2,000 feet of any other billboard.
  • No billboard shall be located within 500 feet of any residential zoning district or residential structure.
NUMBER OF SIGN FACES
  • Billboards may display a single face or a double sign face where the two faces of the sign are situated back-to-back and parallel to each other.
LANDSCAPING
  • The area below the sign within a radius of 15 feet of the support structure shall be landscaped and maintained with a vegetative ground cover and shrubs in compliance with Section 30-5.B.1, Landscaping Standards, with shrubs planted at a rate of one per five square feet.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.5 Billboard Signs
DEFINITIONA permanent, usually freestanding, off-premises sign affixed to the ground or to a building, owned by a person, corporation or other entity that engages in the business of selling or leasing the advertising space on the sign and which advertises an establishment, service, commodity, goods or entertainment sold or offered on premises other than that on which such sign is located. Such signs commonly referred to as "outdoor advertising signs" are generally designed so that the copy or posters on the sign can be changed frequently.     
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICTCD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
 // / / / / / / / / / / / / P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

               300400 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

               2530 
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for Billboard Signs will be measured by the total square feet of the sign itself which will need to comply with the max square feet of the underlying zoning district.
LOCATION RESTRICTIONS
  • No billboard shall be located within 2,000 feet of any other billboard.
  • No billboard shall be located within 500 feet of any residential zoning district or residential structure.
NUMBER OF SIGN FACES
  • Billboards may display a single face or a double sign face where the two faces of the sign are situated back-to-back and parallel to each other.
LANDSCAPING
  • The area below the sign within a radius of 15 feet of the support structure shall be landscaped and maintained with a vegetative ground cover and shrubs in compliance with Section 30-5.B.1, Landscaping Standards, with shrubs planted at a rate of one per five square feet.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.5 Billboard Signs
DEFINITIONA permanent, usually freestanding, off-premises sign affixed to the ground or to a building, owned by a person, corporation or other entity that engages in the business of selling or leasing the advertising space on the sign and which advertises an establishment, service, commodity, goods or entertainment sold or offered on premises other than that on which such sign is located. Such signs commonly referred to as "outdoor advertising signs" are generally designed so that the copy or posters on the sign can be changed frequently.     
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICTCD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
 // / / / / / / / / / / / / P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

               300400 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

               2530 
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for Billboard Signs will be measured by the total square feet of the sign itself which will need to comply with the max square feet of the underlying zoning district.
LOCATION RESTRICTIONS
  • No billboard shall be located within 2,000 feet of any other billboard.
  • No billboard shall be located within 500 feet of any residential zoning district or residential structure.
NUMBER OF SIGN FACES
  • Billboards may display a single face or a double sign face where the two faces of the sign are situated back-to-back and parallel to each other.
LANDSCAPING
  • The area below the sign within a radius of 15 feet of the support structure shall be landscaped and maintained with a vegetative ground cover and shrubs in compliance with Section 30-5.B.1, Landscaping Standards, with shrubs planted at a rate of one per five square feet.
Table 30-5.L.8.B.5 Billboard Signs
DEFINITIONA permanent, usually freestanding, off-premises sign affixed to the ground or to a building, owned by a person, corporation or other entity that engages in the business of selling or leasing the advertising space on the sign and which advertises an establishment, service, commodity, goods or entertainment sold or offered on premises other than that on which such sign is located. Such signs commonly referred to as "outdoor advertising signs" are generally designed so that the copy or posters on the sign can be changed frequently.     
PERMITTED ZONING DISTRICTCD AR SF-15 SF-10 SF-6 MR-5 MH OI NC LC CC MU UC BP LI HI 
 // / / / / / / / / / / / / P P 

COPY AREA MAX

(sq. feet)

               300400 

PERMITTED HEIGHT

(feet)

               2530 
COPY AREA COMPLIANCE
  • The permitted copy area for Billboard Signs will be measured by the total square feet of the sign itself which will need to comply with the max square feet of the underlying zoning district.
LOCATION RESTRICTIONS
  • No billboard shall be located within 2,000 feet of any other billboard.
  • No billboard shall be located within 500 feet of any residential zoning district or residential structure.
NUMBER OF SIGN FACES
  • Billboards may display a single face or a double sign face where the two faces of the sign are situated back-to-back and parallel to each other.
LANDSCAPING
  • The area below the sign within a radius of 15 feet of the support structure shall be landscaped and maintained with a vegetative ground cover and shrubs in compliance with Section 30-5.B.1, Landscaping Standards, with shrubs planted at a rate of one per five square feet.
  1. C.
    Permanent Signs Permitted within the Downtown Zoning Districts
    The following regulations shall govern the display of permanent signs within DT-1 and DT-2 districts.
    1. 5.
      Building Mounted Signage
      1. f.
        General Standards
        1. 1.
          Permitted Number of Signs
          1. i.
            DT-1 District
            One (1) primary exterior building mounted sign (wall or projecting) is permitted per street frontage or one (1) sign for each ground floor tenant space having an individual customer entrance. Additional secondary building mounted signs are permitted as specified herein.
          2. ii.
            DT-2 District
            See Table 30-5.L.8.B.2.b. Wall Signs.
        2. 2.
          Permitted Copy Area Measurement
          1. i.
            DT-1 District
            1. 1.
              Single Tenant Buildings and Multi-Tenant Buildings with Common Ground Floor Tenant Entrances
              The maximum copy area shall be limited to one (1) square foot per linear foot of building wall upon which the sign is mounted.
            2. 2.
              Multi-Tenant Buildings with Individual Ground Floor Tenant Entrances
              The maximum copy area shall be limited to one (1) square foot per linear foot of building wall as measured from the outer edges of the ground floor tenant space accessed by the customer entrance with which the sign is associated.
          2. ii.
            DT-2 District
            The maximum copy area shall be limited to one (1) square foot per linear foot of building wall upon which the sign is mounted.
        3. 3.
          Uniformity of Sign Type Required
          Where a building is permitted to display multiple exterior building mounted signs, all primary signs along each frontage shall be of a uniform type - either wall signs or projecting signs.
        4. 4.
          Changeable Copy
          Changeable copy area of any type shall not be included in the design of building mounted signage other than for assembly and entertainment uses, such as theaters, arenas, and similar venues.
        5. 5.
          Integration with Architectural Features
          Building mounted signs shall not be installed so as to obstruct architectural features. Where a building contains an existing space for a sign integrated into the facade, it shall be utilized for the placement of new wall signage.
      2. g.
        Wall Signs
        1. 1.
          Wall signs may not project more than 12 inches from the face of the building upon which they are mounted.
        2. 2.
          Wall signs may not extend:
          1. i.
            Above the bottom of the building’s upper cornice or cap;
          2. ii.
            The top of the parapet wall of a flat roofed building without a cornice or cap; or
          3. iii.
            The bottom of the eaves of a sloped roof building.
        3. 3.
          Wall signs shall not be painted directly onto the surface of a building.
      3. h.
        Projecting Signs
        1. 1.
          Projecting signs shall not exceed 50 square feet in copy area.
        2. 2.
          Projecting signs may project to a maximum of five (5) feet from the building wall upon which they are mounted.
        3. 3.
          No part of a projecting sign shall be more than 20 feet above grade.
        4. 4.
          Projecting signs located above pedestrian walkways shall maintain a clear heigh of at least nine (9) feet from the grade of a walkway to the bottom of the sign.
        5. 5.
          Projecting signs extending into a public right-of-way shall require an encroachment agreement prior to the issuance of a sign permit.
      4. i.
        Window Signs
        Window signs (including signs on glass doors) are permitted in accordance with the standard established in Section 30-5.L.8(b)(3), except that in the DT-1 district the following restrictions on size and coverage shall apply:
        1. 1.
          Signage attached to an individual window shall not exceed the lesser of one- third (1/3) of the glazed area of the window or 15 square feet.
        2. 2.
          The cumulative amount of window signage permitted for any individual tenant space, or building frontage in the case of a single tenant building, shall not exceed the lesser of one-third (1/3) of the cumulative glazed window area or 50 square feet.
      5. j.
        Permanent Flag Displays
        1. 1.
          Each single tenant building or individual tenant space having an individual street level customer entrance onto a public sidewalk is permitted to permanently display one (1) exempt flag and one (1) other flag mounted to the building wall.
        2. 2.
          One (1) additional flag is permitted to be mounted for each 50 linear feet of building wall, up to a total of five (5) flags.
        3. 3.
          Flags displayed in accordance with this section shall not exceed 25 square feet in area.
        4. 4.
          No portion of the flag or mounting hardware shall be below nine (9) feet above the grade of a pedestrian walkway.
        5. 5.
          Flags projecting into a public right-of-way shall require the issuance of an encroachment permit.
      6. k.
        Canopy and Marquee Signs
        1. 1.
          Signs may be installed on the face of a canopy or marquee, or may be mounted to the top of a canopy using cut-out or channel style lettering.
        2. 2.
          Where mounted to the top of a canopy, the sign components shall not exceed 24 inches in height or extend past the outer edges of the canopy structure.
        3. 3.
          Canopy and marquee signs shall not exceed the maximum copy area that would be permitted for a wall mounted sign.
        4. 4.
          Where permitted, changeable copy area may be included on a canopy or marquee at the rate of three (3) square feet per linear foot of the canopy or marquee. The changeable copy area shall be limited to five (5) feet in height.
      7. l.
        Awning Signs
        Text, graphics, and logos, not exceeding 18 inches in height are permitted to be displayed (painted, printed, or embroidered) on the front and sides of awnings.
      8. m.
        Directory and Customer Entrance Signage
        One (1) sign having an area not exceeding three (3) square feet shall be permitted to me mounted to the exterior of a building wall within three (3) feet of each customer entrance.
    2. 6.
      Freestanding Signs
      Freestanding signs in the DT-2 district shall be regulated in accordance with the standards set forth for such signs in the NC and OI districts as set forth in section 30-5.L.8.(b). Freestanding signs in the DT-1 district are permitted subject to the following regulations.
      1. a.
        Ground Signs
        1. 1.
          Number Permitted
          One (1) ground sign is permitted per street frontage.
        2. 2.
          Permitted Copy Area
          The maximum permitted copy area is 20 square feet.
        3. 3.
          Maximum Height
          The maximum permitted height of a ground sign is seven (7) feet. As measured from the grade of the adjacent sidewalk.
        4. 4.
          Illumination
          Internal and external illumination are permitted.
        5. 5.
          Changeable Copy
          Changeable copy area is permitted to occupy up to 50% of the sign face, provided that only manual changeable copy is permitted. Changeable copy area shall be designed so that it is flush with the sign face.
        6. 6.
          Design Standard
          One of the following design options shall be utilized:
          1. i.
            All graphics, text, and logos are designed in a manner so that they are attached to, protrude from, or are etched/routed into, an opaque, solid, sign face, with a minimum relief of one (1) inch (either projection or recession), and either external or halo style illumination is utilized, if any.
          2. ii.
            All graphics, text, and logos are routed into an opaque, solid surface, sign face, not to exceed 35% of the area of the sign face. Such routed area may have transparent (including colored) backing to allow for internal illumination of the sign.

(Ord. No. S2012-024, § 17, 11-13-2102; Ord. No. S2013-002, § 7, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2016-008, § 8, 8/22/2016; Ord. No. S2019-017, 1, 04/23/2019; Ord. No. S2022-009, §§ 16, 17, 05/23/2022; Ord. No. S2022-027, § 1, 09/26/2022; Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025; Ord. No. S2026-006, §§ 4-8, 02/23/2026; Ord. No. S2026-007, § 1, 02/23/2026; Ord. No. S2026-008, § 1, 02/23/2026; Ord. No. S2026-009, § 1, 02/23/2026; Ord. No. S2026-010, § 1, 02/23/2026; Ord. No. S2026-028, § 1, 08/24/2026; Ord. No. S2026-029, § 1, 08/24/2026; Ord. No. S2026-030, § 1, 08/24/2026; Ord. No. S2026-031, § 1, 08/24/2026)

Effective on: 8/24/2026

30-5.L.9. Alternative Signage Plan

Regardless of the other provisions of this Article, the Planning Commission may, at its sole discretion, approve a signage plan for Development projects listed in this section. The approved signage plan may include signs of different sizes, types, locations, placement and height from those otherwise enumerated in this Article.

  1. A.
    Purpose
    The purpose of the optional provisions for an Alternative Signage Plan are:
    1. 1.
      To permit creativity in sign design and placement to address site issues and constraints associated with topography, pedestrian-orientation, wayfinding and other conditions unique to the subject Development.
    2. 2.
      To encourage the Development of comprehensive signage plans for large Developments that promote an integrated approach to sign design and placement that is both attractive and informative.
  2. B.
    Application
    Alternative signage plans may be submitted for the following types of Development: Commercial, industrial, institutional, office, residential or mixed-use Developments containing five or more acres in area, and, regardless of site area, three-dimensional and signs associated with artist studios and galleries, business incubators, schools and large cultural or public facilities of a singular nature (for example, large public museums, city­wide or regional sports or convention centers, transportation centers).
  3. C.
    Submittal Process
    Alternative signage plan applications may be submitted for Planning Commission consideration at the time of original consideration of the proposed Development or separately from the original Development proposal. The following information or material shall be required for a signage plan application.
    1. 1.
      Owner and contract name, address, telephone number and signature(s), as applicable.
    2. 2.
      A signage plan proposal illustrating the proposed signs, their proposed location, their proposed purpose, along with a statement as to why the existing sign code cannot or should not be followed in the subject case.
    3. 3.
      An analysis showing how the proposed signage plan differs from what could be provided under the existing city sign regulations set forth in this Article.
    4. 4.
      Other similar information determined by the City Manager to be necessary for understanding the purpose and intent of the proposed signage plan application.
  4. D.
    Review Procedure
    The City Manager shall schedule the alternative signage plan for Planning Commission consideration at a legislative hearing. Appeal of the decision may be made to the City Council in accordance with procedures in section 30-2.C.18 Appeal, Item (c) Initiation. In reviewing the proposed signage plan, the Planning Commission shall take the following matters into consideration.
    1. 1.
      The extent to which the proposed signage plan deviates from the sign allowances otherwise applicable in this Article.
    2. 2.
      The rationale provided by the applicant for the deviations.
    3. 3.
      The extent to which the signage plan promotes city goals for way-finding, pedestrian­orientation, and business identification.
    4. 4.
      The degree to which the signage plan creatively and effectively addresses the issues and constraints unique to the site with regard to signage.
    5. 5.
      The degree to which the signage plan creates a unified approach to Development signage that is attractive and effective in communication.
    6. 6.
      The Planning Commission may deny or approve the proposed signage plan in part or in total and may establish conditions regarding approval.

(Ord. No. S2013-002, § 5, 2-11-2013; Ord. No. S2015-009 adopted 8-10-2015; Ord. No. S2022-009, §§ 18, 19, 05/23/2022; Ord. No. S2025-013, § 1, 06/23/2025)

Effective on: 6/23/2025

30-5.M.1. Intent

This section is intended to ensure that new development does not adversely impact the capacity of streets and intersections to safely and efficiently accommodate vehicular or pedestrian traffic. It provides a standard set of analytical tools and a format that can be used to identify a development's expected traffic impacts on the City's road system, any traffic congestion problems associated with access to and from the development site, and any improvements or site design modifications needed to address potential adverse traffic impacts and access problems.

(Ord. No. S2013-012, § 1, 6-10-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.M.2. Traffic Impact Analysis Required

The traffic impact analysis (TIA) requirement for amendments to Map Amendments (Rezonings) (see Section 30-2.C.1), Planned Developments (see Section 30-2.C.3), Site Plans (see Section 30-2.C.5), Subdivision Plans (see Section 30-2.C.6), or Special Use Permits (see Section 30-2.C.7) for any development is noted below:

  1. A TIA may be required if the development is expected to generate 150-299 peak traffic hour trips or 1,500-2,999 average daily additional external vehicle trips (i.e. new trips - no pass-by or internal capture trips shall be used in calculating "additional external vehicle trips") based on trip generation estimates made in accordance with the most recent editions of Trip Generation and Trip Generation Handbook, published by the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE);
  2. A TIA shall be required if the development is expected to generate 300 or more peak traffic hour trips or 3,000 average daily additional external vehicle trips (i.e. new trips - no pass-by or internal capture trips shall be used in calculating "additional external vehicle trips") based on trip generation estimates made in accordance with the most recent editions of Trip Generation and Trip Generation Handbook, published by the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE);
  3. As determined by the City Manager when conditions warrant.
  4. In lieu of a TIA, alternative vehicular and/or pedestrian analyses may be requested by the City Manager which include, but are not limited to, individual intersection peak hour counts, trip generation and/or trip distribution calculations for use by City staff to determine any mitigation measures that may be required by development sites.
  5. A TIA may be waived by the City Manager when certain conditions exist for a development site. These conditions may include development sites that are being proposed at locations where roadway improvement projects have been constructed to accommodate these specific development sites.

(Ord. No. S2011-013, § 1.8, 11-28-2011; Ord. No. S2013-012, § 2, 6-10-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.M.3. Traffic Impact Analysis Contents

The TIA shall be completed in accordance with the most recent editions of the following documents:

  1. NCDOT Policy on Street and Driveway Access to North Carolina Highways;
  2. Manual on Street and Driveway Access in Cumberland County and City of Fayetteville;
  3. "NCDOT Congestion Management Capacity Analysis Guidelines";
  4. "NCDOT Congestion Management General Recommendations and Comments for Driveway Permit Reviews".

(Ord. No. S2013-012, § 3, 6-10-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.M.4. Reserved*

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.M.5. Reserved†

Effective on: 11/18/2013

Section Footnote(s)

*Editor’s note—Ord. No. S2013-012, § 4, adopted June 10, 2013, repealed Section 4, in its entirety, which pertained to traffic impact analysis area. See also the Code Comparative Table.

†Editor’s note—Ord. No. S2013-012, § 5, adopted June 10, 2013, repealed Section 5, in its entirety, which pertained to traffic impact analysis contents. See also the Code Comparative Table.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.N.1. Purpose

In an effort to encourage sustainable development practices within multifamily and a range of business districts as a means of addressing global climate change, the protection of natural resources, and ensuring a high quality of life for future City residents, the following sustainable development incentives are provided.

(Ord. No. S2013-016, § 1a, 9-9-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.N.2. Incentives

Development providing sustainable features in accordance with the provisions of this section is eligible for a density bonus of up to 20 percent beyond the maximum allowable gross residential density and increases in the maximum allowable height up to two stories beyond the maximum allowable height in the base zoning district.

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.N.3. Applicability

The incentives included in this section are available in the MR-5, OI, NC, LC, CC, MU, BP, DT-1 and DT-2 districts.

(Ord. No. S2013-016, § 1a, 9-9-2013; Ord. No. S2022-009, § 20, 05/23/2022)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.N.4. Procedure

  1. Development seeking density or height bonuses in accordance with this section shall be reviewed (and approved or denied) by the TRC as part of a Site Plan or Subdivision Plan, as appropriate, or in the event the development requires a Special Use Permit, reviewed (and approved or denied) as part of the Special Use Permit application.
  2. The density or height bonus shall be based on the number of sustainability features provided, in accordance with Table 30-5.N.4, Sustainability Bonuses, and Section 30-5.N.5, Menu of Sustainability Features.
Table 30-5.N.4: Sustainability Bonuses
TYPE OF BONUSMINIMUM NUMBER OF SUSTAINABILITY FEATURES PROVIDED (#) [1]
Increase in gross residential density by up to 10 percent beyond district maximum3
Increase in building height by one story beyond district maximum5
Increase in gross residential density between 10 and 20 percent beyond district maximum7
Increase in building height by two stories beyond district maximum [2]9

(Ord. No. S2013-016, § 1b, 9-9-2013; Ord. No. S2022-009, § 21, 05/23/2022)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.N.5. Menu of Sustainability Practices

One or more of the following sustainability features may be offered by an applicant for proposed development within the applicable districts in accordance with Table 30-5.N.1, Sustainability Bonuses.

  1. a.
    Generation of a minimum of 25 percent of the electricity needed by the development from alternative energy sources (solar, wind, etc.);
  2. b.
    Minimum LEED certification of silver for at least 50 percent of the nonresidential floor area;
    Figure 30-5.N.5: Solar Configuration
    Diagram illustrating solar configuration
    The majority of the building should have an east-west configuration to take advantage of solar access opportunities.
  3. c.
    Purchase of carbon offsets in an amount equivalent to 15 percent of the construction costs;
  4. d.
    Energy star recognition for at least 75 percent of the residential floor area;
  5. e.
    Inclusion of green roofs on at least 30 percent of the roof area within the development;
  6. f.
    Provision of solar access to a minimum of 25 percent of the buildings in the development;
  7. g.
    Configuration of nonresidential buildings with one axis 1.5 times longer than the other, and the long axis oriented in an east-west configuration (see Figure 30-5.N.5, Solar Configuration);
  8. h.
    Inclusion of a recycled or grey water system for landscaping irrigation;
  9. i.
    Use of paving materials in driveways and parking lots that have high solar reflectance (excluding gravel or similar paving materials) that reduce the urban heat island effect of parking lots;
  10. j.
    Provision of a network of multi-purpose trails with at least one connection to the public greenway or sidewalk system for every acre of land;
  11. k.
    Provision of 50-foot undisturbed buffers adjacent to all perennial stream banks; or
  12. l.
    Provision of a community garden with at least 500 square feet per dwelling that is controlled by a property-owners association. Applicants may propose features for consideration not on this list as materials, methods, technology, and practices are anticipated to evolve over time.

(Ord. No. S2013-016, § 1a, 9-9-2013)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.O.1. Purpose

Minimum fire-flow standards are necessary to ensure public safety and to maintain and/or enhance the City of Fayetteville Fire Department's ISO rating.

(Ord. No. S2012-010, § 1, 5-29-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013

30-5.O.2. Minimum Standards Established

All new development within the City of Fayetteville shall be served by fire-flow volumes in compliance with Appendix B of the North Carolina Fire Code. These shall be the minimum design standards for fire-flow, and any amendments to this Appendix shall be incorporated into this section by reference. If the service-providing utility has fire-flow design standards in excess of those provided in Appendix B of the North Carolina Fire Code, the higher standards shall prevail.

(Ord. No. S2012-010, § 1, 5-29-2012)

Effective on: 11/18/2013